GSM-Cellular Networks PDF-Book

GSM System and Products Overview
SY1 Course
Student Guide
"NORTHERN TELECOM AND NORTEL MATRA CELLULAR CONFIDENTIAL:

Information contained in this document is the property of Northern Telecom and/or Nortel Matra Cellular. Except as
specifically authorized in writing by Northern Telecom and Nortel Matra Cellular, the holder of this document shall
keep the information contained herein confidential and shall protect same in whole or in part from disclosure and
dissemination to third parties and use for evaluation, operation and maintenance purposes only".
"You may not reproduce, represent, or download through any means, the information contained herein in any way or in
any form without prior written consent of Northern Telecom and Nortel Matra Cellular".
© Nortel Matra Cellular and Northern Telecom 2000
PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

Publication History
Version Date Comments
04.01/EN September, 97 Creation

04.02/EN November, 97 Update miscellaneous mismatches
10.01/EN* August, 98 V10 Release
11.01/EN May, 99 V11 Release
12.01/EN January, 2000 V12 Release
* Starting from V10, the document edition complies with the equipment version.
"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

ii
SY1 Course
Introduction 1
GSM History 2
Basic Network Overview 3
Services 4
Cellular Principles 5
Radio Interface 6
Architecture, Functions and Protocols 7
Procedures 8
Base Transceiver Station Functions 9
S2000/S4000/S8000 BTS Families 10
Base Station Controller Functions 11
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family 12
TransCoder Unit: Functional Description 13
TCU: Physical Presentation 14
NSS Functions 15
NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP 16
OSS Functions 17
OMC-R, TML and OMC-S 18
PicoNODE Family 19
Solutions of Exercises 20
Glossary 21

iii
Volume Composition
No. Title Reference Version/Edition

1 GSM System and Products PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN
Overview

iv
Course Presentation
This course is the main starting of the GSM (GSM900, GSM 1800 and
GSM 1900) program. It provides a global overview of the digital radio
communication system (i.e. NSS, BSS, OSS) in terms of architecture,
cellular concepts, radio channel handling, cellular call control, and
Nortel’s products as well as the associated techniques necessary for the
understanding of GSM.
Course Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the participant will be able to:
describe the GSM system and its role in wireless communications worldwide,
quote the GSM network services,
describe the GSM cellular features,
describe the Radio Interface,
describe the steps of the main procedures (call establishment, location
updating, handover, etc.),
describe the functions of NSS (Network Sub System), BSS (Base station Sub
System), OSS (Operation Sub System) and MS (Mobile Station),
describe the software architecture of the GSM system,
identify and describe the NORTEL NETWORKS GSM products.
Prerequisites
Before taking this course, a basic knowledge in transmission and switching, and/or
cellular radio system, decibels, PCM links, LAPD, OSI layers, SS7 is required.
An excellent way to obtain it is to attend the 2 days TL1 course
(Telecommunications Overview).
Scope
This course applies to the V12 version of the BSS and to the GSM O9 of the NSS.

v

vi
Table of Contents
COURSE NOTES CONTENTS
PUBLICATION HISTORY ii
SY1 COURSE iii
VOLUME COMPOSITION iv
COURSE PRESENTATION v
TABLE OF CONTENTS vii
1. INTRODUCTION 1-1
GSM TRAINING CURRICULUM 1-2

BSS NORTEL TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS 1-4
SY1 COURSE 1-5
OBJECTIVES 1-6
2. GSM HISTORY 2-1
OBJECTIVES 2-2
BEFORE GSM: MOBILE TELEPHONY MILESTONES 2-3
ANALOG CELLULAR SYSTEMS AROUND THE WORLD 2-4
DEVELOPMENT OF THE GSM STANDARD 2-5
GSM SPECIFICATIONS 2-7
THE APPLICATION OF THE RADIO SPECTRUM 2-8
GSM FAMILY RADIO BAND SPECTRUM 2-9
GSM BENEFITS 2-10
GSM STANDARD SPREAD: SALES 2-11
DEVELOPMENT OF THE GSM STANDARD 2-12
EXPLOSIVE GROWTH IN WIRELESS DATA 2-13
INCREASING GSM DATA RATES 2-14
MOBILE DATA TECHNOLOGY EVOLUTION 2-15
GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE 2-16

vii
GPRS AND EDGE 2-17

UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 2-18
3. BASIC NETWORK OVERVIEW 3-1
OBJECTIVES 3-2
TRAFFIC/SIGNALING 3-3
NETWORK OVERVIEW 3-4
MOBILE STATION 3-5
SIM-CARD AND GSM MOBILE EQUIPMENT 3-6
THE SIM-CARD FUNCTIONS 3-7
SUBSCRIBER IDENTIFICATION 3-8
MOBILE IDENTIFICATION 3-9
MS CLASSMARK 3-10
TRENDS IN MOBILE STATION 3-11
BSS ARCHITECTURE 3-12
NSS ARCHITECTURE 3-13
CHECK YOUR LEARNING 3-14
4. SERVICES 4-1
OBJECTIVES 4-2
TELESERVICES 4-3
SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 4-10
INTELLIGENT NETWORK SERVICES 4-16
5. CELLULAR PRINCIPLES 5-1
OBJECTIVES 5-2
RADIO DESIGN 5-3
ERLANG CONCEPT 5-4
FADING 5-5
COVERAGE OR TRAFFIC LIMITATIONS 5-6
CELL SECTORIZATION 5-7
OMNIDIRECTIONAL SITE ANTENNAS 5-8
BI AND TRISECTORIAL SITE ANTENNAS 5-9

viii
CALCULATED CELL COVERAGE (TRISECTORIAL SITE) 5-10

CALCULATED CELL COVERAGE 5-11
CLUTTERS 5-12
LINK BUDGET PRESENTATION 5-13
COCHANNEL INTERFERENCE 5-14
THE FREQUENCY REUSE DISTANCE 5-15
INTERFERENCE LIMITS 5-16
FREQUENCY REUSE PATTERN 5-17
FREQUENCY PLAN 5-18
DIFFERENT TYPES OF CELLS 5-19
CELL LAYERING 5-20
FREQUENCY REUSE PATTERN 5-21
6. RADIO INTERFACE 6-1
OBJECTIVES 6-2
FUNCTIONS OF THE RADIO INTERFACE 6-3
GSM USES PAIRED RADIO CHANNELS 6-4
GSM BAND ALLOCATIONS (MHZ) 6-5
GSM TIME DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS (TDMA) 6-6
PHYSICAL CHANNEL 6-7
GSM DELAYS UPLINK TDMA FRAMES 6-8
PROPAGATION DELAYS 6-9
LOGICAL CHANNELS 6-10
FROM PHYSICAL CHANNELS TO LOGICAL CHANNELS 6-11
TRAFFIC CHANNELS (TCHS) 6-12
CONTROL CHANNELS 6-13
THE LOGICAL CHANNELS ON RADIO INTERFACE 6-14
LOGICAL CHANNELS DESCRIPTION 6-15
TRAFFIC AND CONTROL MULTI-FRAMING 6-17
TRAFFIC CHANNELS COMBINATION 6-18
DEDICATED SIGNALING CHANNELS COMBINATION 6-19
PHYSICAL CHANNEL AND LOGICAL CHANNELS 6-20
COMMON CHANNELS COMBINATION 6-21
BCCH COMBINED 6-22

ix
WHY 26 AND 51 FRAMES PER MULTIFRAME? 6-23

FROM SPEECH TO RADIO TRANSMISSION 6-24
SPEECH QUALITY - SOURCE CODING 6-25
CHANNEL PROCESSING 6-26
INTERLEAVING: TCH FULL RATE 6-27
BURST FORMATTING 6-28
BURST FORMATS 6-29
CIPHERING 6-31
MODULATION 6-32
DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION FEATURES 6-33
7. ARCHITECTURE, FUNCTIONS AND PROTOCOLS 7-1
OBJECTIVES 7-2
BASIC ELEMENTS OF A CELLULAR SYSTEM 7-3
ARCHITECTURE OF A GSM SYSTEM 7-4
BTS GENERAL ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS 7-6
BSC GENERAL ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS 7-7
TRAU ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS 7-8
HOME LOCATION REGISTER 7-10
AUTHENTICATION CENTER 7-11
VISITOR LOCATION REGISTER 7-12
EQUIPMENT IDENTITY REGISTER 7-13
INTERWORKING FUNCTION 7-14
PROTOCOL MODEL 7-15
RADIO INTERFACE 7-16
ABIS INTERFACE 7-17
LAPD AND LAPDM FRAMES 7-19
ATER INTERFACE 7-20
A INTERFACE 7-22
PSTN/ISDN/PSDN INTERFACE 7-24
GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE 7-25

x
8. PROCEDURES 8-1
OBJECTIVES 8-2
CONTENTS 8-3
DESCRIPTORS STORED IN SIM-CARD 8-4
DESCRIPTORS STORED IN THE NETWORK 8-5
DESCRIPTORS EMBODIED IN THE MS 8-6
GSM’S ACTORS 8-7
CELL SELECTION 8-8
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT 8-9
REGISTRATION: THE VERY FIRST LOCATION UPDATE 8-10
INTRA-VLR LOCATION UPDATE 8-11
INTER-VLR LOCATION UPDATE 8-12
IMSI ATTACH 8-13
IMSI DETACH 8-14
AUTHENTICATION 8-15
CIPHERING 8-17
MOBILE ORIGINATING CALL 8-19
MOBILE TERMINATING CALL 8-20
CALL RELEASE 8-23
REASONS FOR HANDOVER 8-25
MOBILITY AND HANDOVER 8-26
HANDOVER PREPARATION 8-27
HANDOVER DECISION 8-28
HANDOVER EXECUTION 8-29
INTRA-BSC HANDOVER 8-30
INTER-BSC HANDOVER 8-31
INTER-MSC HANDOVER 8-32
EXERCISE 8-33

xi
9. BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION FUNCTIONS 9-1
OBJECTIVES 9-2
CAPABILITIES OF A BTS 9-4
FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURE 9-6
GENERIC ARCHITECTURE 9-7
BCF 9-8
TRX 9-9
TRANSMISSION CHAIN 9-10
RECEPTION CHAIN 9-11
COUPLING SYSTEM 9-12
BTS CONNECTION MODES 9-13
10. S2000/S4000/S8000 BTS FAMILIES 10-1
OBJECTIVES 10-2
COVERAGE SOLUTION 10-3
DRX BASED BTS FAMILY 10-4
BTS S8000 OUTDOOR 10-5
BCF MODULE (FIRST VERSION) 10-7
COMPACT BCF MODULE (SECOND VERSION) 10-8
S8000 TRX 10-10
S8000 COUPLING 10-11
BTS S8000 INDOOR 10-12
BTS S8002 10-14
BTS S8006 10-16
BTS S2000L (LOW POWER) 10-18
BTS S2000H (HIGH POWER) 10-20
ENHANCED PACKAGING 10-21
HIGH POWER RF MODULE 10-22
S8000 DOWN-LINK 10-23
S8000 UP-LINK 10-24
BTS E-CELL 10-25

xii
S2000E/S4000 FAMILY 10-28

BTS S4000 INDOOR 10-29
BTS S4000 OUTDOOR 10-31
BTS S2000E INDOOR/OUTDOOR 10-33
DUAL-BAND CONFIGURATIONS 10-35
BTS CONFIGURATION TABLE 10-36
11. BASE STATION CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS 11-1
OBJECTIVES 11-2
BSC IN THE GSM NETWORK 11-3
BSC FUNCTIONS 11-4
SIGNALING IN THE BSS 11-6
GENERIC ARCHITECTURE OF THE BSC 11-7
BSC OMC-R CONNECTION OPTIONS 11-8
12. BSC 6000/12000/12000HC FAMILY 12-1
OBJECTIVES 12-2
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC 12-3
FUNCTIONAL ARCHITECTURE 12-6
PHYSICAL LAYOUT 12-7
DUPLEX OPERATION 12-8
BSC 12000 12-9
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC 12-10
GPRS SUPPORT 12-11
BSC 12000 UPGRADE TO BSC 12000HC 12-12
BSC PROVISIONING 12-13
BSC 12000 PRODUCT CONFIGURATION 12-14
BSC 12000 CONFIGURATION 12-15
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC 12-17
EXERCISES 12-18
NUMBER OF SITES THAT A BSC CAN HANDLE 12-21

xiii
13. TRANSCODER UNIT: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 13-1
OBJECTIVES 13-2
TCU FUNCTIONS 13-3
BENEFIT HAVING REMOTE TCUS 13-4
FUNCTIONAL DETAIL 13-5
SIGNALING ON THE BTS-TCU INTERFACE 13-6
SPEECH ON THE BTS-TCU INTERFACE 13-7
USER’S DATA RATE TREATMENT 13-8
14. TCU: PHYSICAL PRESENTATION 14-1
OBJECTIVES 14-2
HARDWARE LAYOUT 14-3
EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS 14-4
TCU CABINET 14-5
15. NSS FUNCTIONS 15-1
OBJECTIVES 15-2
MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER INTERFACES 15-4
GATEWAY MSC FUNCTIONS 15-5
VISITOR MSC FUNCTIONS 15-6
MSC ARCHITECTURE AND FUNCTIONS 15-7
INTERWORKING FUNCTION 15-8
ECHO CANCELER 15-9
SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE CENTER 15-10
VOICE MAIL SYSTEM 15-11
INTELLIGENT NETWORK PLATFORM 15-12

xiv
16. NSS NORTEL: DMS AND GPP 16-1
OBJECTIVES 16-2
NSS NORTEL: DMS FAMILY AND PICONODE 16-3
SUPERNODE (SN) 16-4
DIGITAL MULTIPLEX SYSTEM (DMS) ARCHITECTURE 16-5
DMS CORE MODULES 16-6
SUPERNODE CONFIGURATION 16-7
NORTEL’S ENHANCED NETWORK (ENET) 16-8
LINK PERIPHERAL PROCESSOR (LPP) 16-9
LPP CABINET 16-10
PCM-30 DIGITAL TRUNK CONTROLLER (PDTC) 16-11
PERIPHERALS: ISM 16-12
PERIPHERALS: IOM 16-13
BILLING SERVER 16-14
SUPERNODE SIZE ENHANCED (SNSE) 16-15
MICRONODE 16-17
INCOMING CALL FROM THE PSTN TO THE GMSC 16-19
A CALL GOES TO THE VMSC THAT PAGES THE MS 16-20
NORTEL IWF: GSM PASSPORT NODE 16-21
GPP NODE 16-22
NORTEL’S IN PLATFORM: SERVICEBUILDER 16-25
17. OSS FUNCTIONS 17-1
OBJECTIVES 17-2
OSS PRESENTATION 17-3
NETWORK MANAGEMENT 17-4
CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT 17-10
FAULT MANAGEMENT 17-12
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT 17-13
SECURITY MANAGEMENT 17-14
WHY AN OMC-R? 17-15

xv
OMC-R FUNCTIONS 17-16

COMMON FUNCTIONS 17-17
SERVER ADMINISTRATION 17-18
OMC-S FUNCTIONS 17-19
HIERARCHICAL ARRANGEMENT OF NMC AND OMC 17-20
18. OMC-R, TML AND OMC-S 18-1
OBJECTIVES 18-2
OMC-R 18-3
OMC-R ARCHITECTURE 18-4
HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE 18-5
REMOTE OPERATION TERMINAL APPLICATION 18-6
NETWORK ELEMENTS OPERATED BY OMC-R 18-7
IMPLEMENTATION OF THE OMC-R NETWORK 18-8
NEW MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE 18-9
NEW MMI: LOGICAL VIEW 18-10
NEW MMI: TOPOLOGICAL VIEW 18-11
ALARM WINDOW 18-12
BSS ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML 18-13
BTS ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML 18-14
BSC ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML 18-18
TCU ON SITE MAINTENANCE WITH TML 18-19
OMC-S 18-20
SDM-FT PLATFORM 18-22
OMC-S ELEMENT MANAGER MAIN WINDOW 18-25
NETWORK CONFIGURATION WINDOW 18-26
FAULT MANAGEMENT 18-27
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT 18-28

xvi
19. PICONODE FAMILY 19-1
PICONODE: A VERY SMALL GSM SYSTEM 19-2

RURAL AND COMMUNITY 19-3
CORPORATE/IN-BUILDING: CORPORATENET 19-4
PICONODE ARCHITECTURE 19-5
COMMUNITYNET 19-6
PICONODETM BTS 19-8
PICONODETM BSC 19-9
PICONODETM MSC 19-10
PICONODETM OMC 19-11
TM
PICONODE COMBO 19-12
TM
PICONODE SCALABLE GSM SOLUTIONS 19-13
20. SOLUTIONS OF EXERCISES 20-1
CELLULAR PRINCIPLES: FREQUENCY REUSE PATTERN 20-2

BTS S8000: COUPLING SYSTEM FOR TWO TRX WITH DIVERSITY 20-3
BSC: TCU WARNING INFORMATION PATH 20-4
BSC: INCOMING CALL INFORMATION PATH 20-6
BSC: CALL-ESTABLISHED TRAFFIC PATH 20-7
21. GLOSSARY 21-1

xvii
Student Notes:

xviii
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Introduction 1-1
PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN 1-1 January, 2000

Introduction
GSM Training Curriculum

1 - BSS and NSS Courses
NSS System Courses
BSS Operation
900 GSM Intelligent Networks Overview 3 days System Courses & Maintenance Courses
930 GSM DMS Overview 3 days OM1/2 BSS Operation and Maintenance 10 days
SY0 GSM General Overview 2 days
NSS
931 GSM NSS Overview 2 days
932 GSM Data Overview 1 day SY1 GSM System and Products OM4 OMC-R Administration 4 days
BSS Operation
935 GSM HLR-PS (Provisioning Server) 3 days Overview 5 days OM5 BSS Databuild 5 days
936 GSM Billing Mediation Device (GMBD) 3 days SYS GSM System Overview 3 days OM6 S8000 BTS Local Maintenance 2 days
System
937 OMC-S Overview & Operation 2 days TL1 Telecommunications Overview 2 days OM7 BSS Performance
& Maintenance
938 GSM GPP-IWF 5 days TL4 ATM Overview 1 day Measurements Tools 2 days
950 GSM DMS Maintenance Part 1 10 days OM9 BSS Operation and Fault
951
961
GSM DMS Maintenance Part 2
GSM09 Release Delta
10 days
2 days Courses
Handling 4 days
Courses
OM10 Reconfiguration Tools 3 days
962 GSM10 Release Delta 1 day BSS System Courses
OM31 BSC and TCU Local Maintenance3 days
963 GSM11 Release Delta 2 days
ARI Advanced Radio Interface OMDV10-12 BSS Release for V10 Experts 3 days
970 GSM-MSC/VLR Translations 10 days
972 GSM HLR Service Datafill 5 days Description 3 days OMDV12 BSS Release for V11 Experts 2 days
974 GSM CCS7 Transl. and Operations 5 days BS21 BSC 12000 and TCU OM36 BSC, TCU and BTS S8000
Advanced Description 2 days Local Maintenance 5 days
RSV1
Radio and Network Engineering
Courses
Radio Site Verification 1 day
NE2
NMO
BSS
BSS Optimization Parameters
Network Monitoring and
Optimization
3 days
2 days BSS Installation & Commissioning
System
PR1 S8000 BTS Family
RSV2 RSV Measurement & Post-Processing 2 days PIC1 BSC & TCU Installation and
Advanced Description 2 days
CNE Cellular Network Engine. Process 1 day Commissioning. 5 days
RF0 RF Basics 3 days PR2 S2000 L&H and e-cell BTS
Advanced Description 1 day PIC7 BTS S8000 Outdoor I&C 5 days
CP1 Cell Planning Fundamentals 2 days
Courses
CP2 Cell Planning Project 5 days PR3 BSS Products Overview 2 days PIC10 BTS S8000 Indoor I&C 4 days
RSQ1 Radio Survey and RF Qualification 2 days PR4 BSC and TCU 3G Advanced PIC17 BTS S8000 I&C 5 days
RSQ2 Radio Measurements 3 days Description 2 days PIM8 BTS S2000 (H&L) I&C and O&M 2 days
SSE1 Site Survey and Site Engineering 1 day SR11 BSS Release V11 Overview 1 day
SSE2 Site Survey Visit and Engineering SR12 BSS Release V12 Overview 1 day
Case Studies 1 day SY2 BSS Dimensioning 2 days
SSE3 Aerial Verification 2 days
NETRF1 Network and RF Engineering Course 5 days
The BSS and NSS training courses are split into several families according to the
different skills required to deal with GSM networks:
• System: to acquire general knowledge about GSM, as well as a general overview of
the equipment designed by Nortel Networks.
• BSS System: to acquire a general knowledge on BSS system: products,
dimensioning, optimization.
• BSS Operation and Maintenance: to be able to operate and maintain a
telecommunication network by fully using the OMC-R facilities and give an in-depth
understanding of the BSS functions and equipment.
• NSS System: to acquire knowledge on the operation and maintenance of the NSS
part of the system.
• Radio and Network Engineering: to be in charge of cell planning, BSS network
topology, field tests, data fill or BSS parameters optimization.
• Installation and Commissioning: to be able to install, cable, and run test on-site
equipment.

Introduction
GSM Training Curriculum

2 - GPRS, UMTS, BSS Tools, GSM-R, and PicoNODE Courses
GPRS Courses GSM-R Courses
TL2 Frame Relay Overview 1 day RL11 GSM-R System and Products
TL3 TCP/IP Overview 2 days Overview 5 days
GP0 GPRS General Overview 1 day RL12 GSM-R deltas with standard GSM 1 day
GP1 GPRS Technical Description 3 days RL21 GSM-R BSS Optimization parameters 3 days
GP10 Passport Operation and Maintenance 2 days RL22 GSM-R BSS Optimization parameters
GP2 PCUSN Configuration and Operation 1.5 day versus GSM 1 day
GP3 SGSN Configuration and Operation 1.5 day RL23 GSM-R BSS dimensioning 2 days
GP4 GGSN Configuration and Operation 2 days RL30 GSM-R IN Overview and datafill 5 days
GP5 OMC-D Operation 5 days RL31 GSM-R NSS Overview 2 days
RL32 GSM-R HLR Service Datafill 5 days
RL41 GSM-R RF Engineering 5 days
UMTS Courses RL51 BTS S8002 I&C 3 days
RL61 BTS S8002 local maintenance 2 days
UM0 UMTS Introduction 1 day
RL62 GSM-R performance measurements
tools 2 days
BSS Tools Courses RL63 BSS O&M for GSM-R 10 days
RL64 BSS Operations and Fault Handling
CT1000 CT1000 Course 8 days for GSM-R 4 days
CT1000_NRP Reconfiguration Procedures 4 days
CT3100 CT3100 Course 5 days
CT3100OJT On the job training 3 days
PicoNODE Courses
CT7100 GSM Network Monitoring and
Optimization Tool (NSS and BSS) 4 days PN1 PicoNODE Product Overview 1 day
CT7100_B GSM Network Monitoring and PN2 PicoNODE OMC Network Operation 5 days
Optimization Tool (BSS only) 3 days PN3 PicoNODE OMC System Administration 5 days
CT7100_N GSM Network Monitoring and PN4 PicoNODE BSS Operation 5 days
Optimization Tool (NSS only) 2 days PN5 PicoNODE NSS Operation 5 days
CT7100_T GSM Network Monitoring Tool PN245 PicoNODE: From I&C to O&M 10 days
(Call Trace/Call Path Trace) 1 day
The BSS and NSS training courses are split in several families according to the different
skills required to deal with GSM networks:
• GPRS: an overview of this new system and advanced description of new nodes.
• UMTS: an overview of this future system.
• BSS Tools: to be able to use the new tools.
• GSM-R: an overview and advanced description of this new system for railways
companies.
• PicoNODE: to be able to operate and manage this new product line (wireless access
in rural or corporate areas).

Introduction
BSS Nortel Technical Publications

S4000/ BSS Product What’s new OMC-R
S4000C BSS BSS BSS Preventive BSS BSS V11/ V12
Documen- in the Maintenance
Indoor 03 tation Overview BSS V12 Operating Operating & Corrective Operating Parameters O&M 39
Evolutions Principles
BTS Overview NTP suite Principles User Maintenance Procedures User Guide
OMC-R
Architecture 32 TML
and 06 00 01 88 07 08 34 36 52 50 (BSC/TCU)
Reference User Manual
TML
ROT 14 51
General Information Operations Manuals (BTS)
User Manual
BSC
TCU 16 41 Maintenance
Procedures
BSC PE/CDC/DD/0004 PE/CDC/DD/0026 TCU
6000/ 22 CD-ROM of CD-ROM of 42 Maintenance
12000 GSM BSS NTPs BSS Parameters User Guide Procedures
S2000/
S4000
Outdoor 23 Reference GSM-BSS Maintenance 46 S2000E BTS
Maintenance
BTS Manuals Documentation Manuals Procedures
S4000 BTS
S2000H/L
35 47 Maintenance
BTS Procedures
S4000 S8000 BTS

Smart 43 48 Maintenance
BTS Procedures
S2000 H/L BTS
S2000/ Fault Number Description CT Tools (optional) 49 Maintenance
S2000E 53 Procedures
BTS
S2000/ S8000/ S2000H/L Advanced CT1000 CT1000/ CT3100 CT5100 CT7100 CT7100 Call Trace/
S8000/ CT3100 Operating BSS CCM User S8002 BTS
S8002 BSC/TCU S2000E S8002 e-cell Maintenance User Instal. CallAnalyzer
Path Trace
84 Maintenance
63 S4000 Instal. Procedures User
BTS BTS BTS BTS Procedures Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual User Manual Procedures
e-cell BTS
e-cell 101 102 103 104 105 29 38 54 118 20 21 60 90 Maintenance
BTS 92 Manual
© NORTEL
The BSS product documentation or BSS Nortel Technical Publication comprises 46

manuals.
Kinds of manuals:
Reference manuals detail each subsystem or equipment in terms of architecture,
hardware and software of its modules and indicate general dimensioning rules.
Maintenance manuals include both preventive and corrective maintenance and details
the various maintenance procedure. The BSS Maintenance Principles describes the
principles of maintenance and gives the list of faults.
Generic site dossiers give a canvas to be used by the network operator, where he can
collect any specific information for a site.
General information:
• The BSS Product Documentation Overview (00) is the general manual which
introduces all the manuals of the BSS NTPs and includes the glossary.
• The BSS Overview (01) is an overview of the digital cellular network and of its
division into subsystem.
Operating manuals:
• The BSS Operating Principles gives the general principles of operation and a
dictionary of GSM parameters and observation counters.
• The BSS parameters User Guide aims at describing BSS GSM and Nortel
parameters, formules and engineering issues for algorithms parameters.

Introduction
SY1 Course
Organization
GSM System
• Section 1: Introduction • Section 5: Cellular Principles
• Section 6: Radio Interface
• Section 2: GSM History
• Section 7: Architecture, Functions and
• Section 3: Basic Network Overview
Protocols
• Section 4: Services
• Section 8: Procedures
• Section 9: BTS Functions

• Section 10: S2000/4000/S8000 BTS • Section 15: NSS Functions
Families • Section 16: NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP
• Section 11: BSC Functions • Section 17: OSS Functions
• Section 12: BSC 6000/12000/12000HC • Section 18: OMC-R, TML and OMC-S
Family • Section 19: PicoNODE Family
• Section 13: TransCoder Unit Functions • Section 20: Solutions of Exercises
• Section 14: TCU Physical Presentation • Section 21: Glossary
GSM Products

Introduction
Objectives
Upon completion of this course, the participant will be able to:

describe the GSM system and its role in wireless communications
worldwide,
quote the GSM network services,

describe the GSM cellular features,
describe the Radio Interface,
describe the steps of the main procedures (call establishment,
location updating, handover, etc.),
describe the functions of NSS (Network Sub System), BSS (Base
station Sub System), OSS (Operation Sub System) and MS (Mobile
Station),
describe the software architecture of the GSM system,
identify and describe the NORTEL NETWORKS GSM products.

Introduction
Student Notes:

Introduction
Student Notes:

GSM History
Section 2
GSM History
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 GSM History 2-1

GSM History
Objectives
Provide an introduction to the world of mobile

communications with particular emphasis on
development to digital cellular radio.
After completing this lesson you will be able to:

- Relate the early mobile communication systems.
- Show the benefits of digital radio transmission.
- Relate the development and spread of the GSM standard.
- Indicate the trend for wireless in the next years.

GSM History
Before GSM: Mobile Telephony Milestones
1876 1970
10101010
Electric transmission
(Graham Bell) Digital Technology
(1st digital switch)
• • •
1897 ———
• • • 1982
1st wireless
transmissions 1st analog cellular
(Marconi) network
1946 1992
10101010
1st public mobile 1st GSM communication

telephone (digital cellular network)
1876: The telephone was introduced to the public at the Centennial Exposition of the United States in
Philadelphia. Alexander Graham Bell was able to transmit speech electrically, in one direction only,
over a copper wire circuit of several hundred feet in length. This “speaking telegraph” was quickly
perfected for adequate two-way communication and was offered for business and residential service
the following years. Within a short time there were thousands, then tens of thousand, and soon
hundreds of thousand of paying customers.
End of the 19th century: While the struggle to search for the ways to utilize the copper wire transmission
facility more and more efficiently, a young German scientist named Heinrich Rudolf Hertz discovered
a strange and wonderful phenomenon: from an electric spark there seemed to emanate invisible
waves of force which could be captured at a distant location by a suitably constructed receiving
device. Hertz’s own experiments extended only a few yards.
1897: Guglielmo Marconi shows the first wireless transmission over 15 km in Bristol. A few years
later(1901), G. Marconi transmitted these waves overseas, and began to call it Radio.
1946: The first public mobile telephone service was introduced in twenty five American cities. Each system
used a single, high-powered transmitter and large tower in order to cover distances of over 50 km in
a particular market. Nevertheless these early FM push-to-talk telephone systems of the late 1940s
used 120 kHz of RF bandwidth in a half duplex mode (only one person on the telephone call could
talk at a time), even though the actual telephone-grade speech because of the kHz of baseband
spectrum. The large RF bandwidth was needed because of the difficulty in mass producing tight RF
filters and low-noise, front-end receiver amplifiers.
1970: A.Pinet introduced in France the first digital switch.
1982: The first commercial cellular system was turned on in Chicago.
1992: GSM, the first fully digital cellular system, was introduced on in Germany and in France.

GSM History

Analog Cellular Systems Around the World
1981 NMT 1979 AMPS

Dedicated developments
The Nordic Solution 800 MHz
Now 18 Millions Subscribers Now 25 Millions
450 MHz and 900 MHz Subscribers
1985 1986
RADIOCOM 2000 C.450
NORWAY, DENMARK 1985 TACS in UK FRANCE GERMANY
FINLAND, SWEDEN, 800 and 900 MHz 400 MHz 450 MHz
FRANCE (450 MHz) 900 MHz
Japan
• NTT cellular (1979)
• JTACS (1988)
There are several different types of analog cellular systems:

• NMT450 and NMT900: Scandinavia, Benelux, Spain, Austria, France, Switzerland;
• AMPS in more 34 countries: U.S.A., Canada, Argentine, Chile, Indonesia, Brazil,
Australia, Republic of Congo (formerly Zaire);
• TACS (Total Access Communication System) in UK Ireland and Italy;
• R2000: France;
• C450: Germany;
• NTT (1979) cellular and JTACS (1988) in Japan.
• RTMS: Italy;
The world's first cellular system actually was implemented in 1979 by the Nippon
Telephone and Telegraph company (NTT) in Japan. This system uses 600 FM duplex
channels of 25 kHz in the 800 MHz band.
In Europe, the Nordic Mobile Telephone system (NMT) was developed in 1981 for the
450 MHz band and uses 180 channels of 25 kHz.
The extended European Total Access Cellular System (ETACS) was deployed in 1985
and is virtually identical to the US. AMPS system, except that the smaller bandwidth
channels result in a slight degradation of signal-to-noise ratio and coverage range.

GSM History
Development of the GSM Standard
1982: Groupe Spécial Mobile (GSM) created within CEPT

1985: List of recommendations are settled and intensely
supported by the industry.
1987: Initial MoU (Memorandum of Understanding) aside the

drafting of technical specifications was signed by
network operators of 13 countries:
• time-scales for the procurement and deployment,
• compatibly of numbering and routing plans,
• tariff principles and definition of accounting.
1990: • The GSM specifications for the 900 MHz are frozen.
• Specifications start for the 1800 MHz GSM systems.
• GSM stands as
"Global System for Mobile communications"
1982: CEPT decides to establish a "Groupe Spécial Mobile" (the initial origin of the Term GSM) in to
develop a set of common standards for a future pan-European Cellular Mobile Network.
1984: Establishment of three Working Parties to define and describe GSM features:
• the radio interface,
• transmission and signaling protocols,
• interfaces and network architecture.
1985, 1986: Discussion and adoption of a list of recommendations to be generated by the Group Spécial
Mobile. A so-called permanent nucleus is established to continuously coordinate the work, which is
intensely supported by industry delegates. Thinking over a radio transmission prototype.
1987: The first Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) is prepared during mid-1987 and signed by 13
European countries in September 1987. Apart from the drafting of the technical specifications within
the ad-hoc working groups, European public telecommunication operators worthy recognized the
cooperation for commercial and operational aspects. The MoU serves as an adequate forum for
discussion on pure operational matters. Its main purposes is to provide a framework for all the
necessary measures to be taken by the signatories together to ensure the opening of a commercial
service in their respective countries by 1991.
The network operators plan the progressive implementation of the networks in each country so that
transport routes between the countries of signatories could be brought early into the coverage of the
respective systems.
1988: Validation and trials, especially the radio interface, show that GSM will work.
With the establishment of the European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI), Groupe
Spécial Mobile becomes a technical committee:
• GSM is embodied into European Telecommunications Standards,
• GSM stands as "Global System for Mobile Communication" grant.

GSM History
1991: First system trial are running.
1992: Official commercial launch of GSM service in Europe.

1993: - The GSM-MoU has 62 signatories in 39 countries

worldwide. In addition 32 applicants in 19 others
countries.
- GSM network are operational in Europe.
- First commercial services also start outside Europe.
- One million subscribers to GSM networks.
1995: Specification of GSM phase 2 are frozen.
1991: First system-trial are running at Telecom 91 exhibition.

The GSM Recommendations comprise:
• more than 130 single documents;
• include more than 5,000 pages.
The GSM MoU of 1987 was later signed by more operators and amended by 1991
to accept members from non CEPT operators countries thus extend its scope to
spread cooperation agreements with non-signatory bodies.
1993: Aside the GSM-MoU has 62 members (signatories) in 39 countries worldwide; and
in addition 32 potential members (observers, applicants) in 19 other countries.
GSM networks are operational in Denmark, Finland, France, Greece, Ireland, Italy,
Luxembourg, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, United kingdom.
The end of 1993 shows one millions subscribers to GSM networks, however more
than 80% of them are to be found in Germany alone.

GSM History
GSM Specifications
01 SERIES
12 SERIES GENERAL 02 SERIES
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE SERVICE ASPECTS
11 SERIES 03 SERIES
EQUIPMENT AND TYPE NETWORK ASPECTS

APPROVAL SPECIFICATIONS
10 SERIES 04 SERIES
SERVICE INTERWORKING MS-BSS INTERFACE AND
PROTOCOLS
09 SERIES 05 SERIES
NETWORK PHYSICAL LAYER ON THE
INTERWORKING RADIO PATH.
08 SERIES 06 SERIES
BSS TO MSC INTERFACES 07 SERIES SPEECH CODING
TERMINAL ADAPTERS SPECIFICATIONS
FOR MOBILE STATIONS
One important question was how far GSM should go in its specification work; that is, to
what degree the system had to be specified so as to be identical in all countries, and how
much could be left to the operators and suppliers to agree upon.
Clearly, without identical air interfaces in all networks, the subscribers are not going to
have free roaming between network. This was considered to be the absolute minimum
degree of standardization, and these equipment were favored. One might have seen it as
advantageous to specify everything in the system, including the hardware and the mobile
station and even other parts of the system. It was agreed upon that there would be no
attempt to specify the system in such detail.
Basically, only the functional interfaces between the majors buildings blocks would be
specified. This approach had several advantages, perhaps the most important of which is
that for each major building block, the principle of functional specifications offers each
operator, and thus the customer, the opportunity to purchase whatever make of
equipment he wants, thus setting the stage for maximum competition between
manufacturers. For instance the fact that an operator has purchased an exchange from a
certain supplier does not force him to go on buying equipment from the same supplier.
Standardized electrical interfaces as well as protocols are provided for both the fixed
network and subscriber equipment. These include standardized rate adaptations
compatible with conventional ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) definitions.

GSM History
The Application of the Radio Spectrum
AM Marine
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.4
Short Wave - International Broadcast - Amateur CB

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 MHz
VHF LOW Band FM VHF VHF TV 7-13
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 180 200 240 300 MHz

Cellular GSM1800, GSM1900
UHF UHF TV 14-69 GPS
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.4 3.0 GHz
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 GHz
Broadcasting Aeronautical Terrestrial Microwave
Land-Mobile Mobile telephony Satellite

In the early years of radio, only the lowest few megahertz of the radio spectrum were in
use and they were used for point to point communications between fixed stations, mainly
ships, and broadcasting. These applications were respectively called the fixed service, the
mobile service and the broadcasting service.
By international agreement, the spectrum then in use was divided into several frequency
bands, different bands being allocated for each service.
This concept of dividing the spectrum between the different links of radio service is still
found to be wise and its application has been extended and elaborated to serve modern
requirements.
The international table of frequency allocations (World Radiocommunication Conference

1995) now covers the frequency range 9 kHz to 275 MHz, divided into hundreds of
frequency bands, allocated for 33 different services.

GSM History
GSM Family Radio Band Spectrum
Uplink 915
915
876 880 890 915 1710 1785 1850 1910

P-GSM
E-GSM GSM 1800 GSM 1900
R-GSM
921 925 935 960 1805 1880 1930 1990

MHz
960
960
Downlink
According to the resolution of the World Radiocommunication Conference in 1978, the

European Telecom Authorities primarily reserved two frequency bands of twice 25 MHz:
• 890 MHz to 915 MHz from mobile to the network,
• 935 MHz to 960 MHz from base stations to the mobiles for use by cellular systems.
By 1990, a newly allocated band of twice 75 MHz (1710 MHz to 1785 MHz for uplink and
1805 MHz to 1880 MHz for downlink) was formed for the Digital Communication System
which is a version of GSM suited to the 1800 MHz frequency band. This application was
initiated in the United Kingdom.
Furthermore FCC has granted band of twice 60 MHz (1850 MHz to 1910 MHz for uplink
and 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz for downlink) devoted to GSM networks.
Two new frequency bands are supported:
• the Extended GSM 900 band or E-GSM = P-GSM + 2x10 MHz,
• the Railway GSM 900 band for Railways companies or
R-GSM = E-GSM + 2x4 MHz.

GSM History
GSM Benefits
Advantages of the GSM standard Digital Advantages
Technology low cost

Worldwide market $
High resistance
Open system to interferences
Transmission data rate
Roaming
Transmission Security
The features and benefits expected in the GSM were:

• superior speech quality (equal to or better than the existing analog cellular
technology),
• low terminal and services costs,
• a high level of security (confidentiality and fraud prevention),
• international roaming (under one subscriber directory number),
• support of low power hand-portable terminals,
• variety of new services and network facilities.
It was a logical consequence of the prevailing reality that a measure of Inter-working

compatibility with the services offered by other existing telecommunication networks was
sought. In particular, the basis for the services in GSM standard can be found in the ISDN
concept.

GSM History
GSM Standard Spread: Sales

300
70
60 250
Million users
Million users
50 200
40
150
30
100
20
10 50
0 0
1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001
areas/ customers
networks
countries (millions)
dec 92 7 13 0.25 Source:
dec 93 18 34 1.4 IDC Feb 98
GSM MoU Feb 98
dec 94 41 65 4.5
dec 95 67 113 12.5
dec 96 97 189 33
dec 97 105 233 66
dec 98 110 240 140
dec 99 137 370 220

GSM History
End 1999: 220 millions of subscribers

370 networks in 137 countries
Countries without GSM Network(s)
2005: Between 700 million and 1 billion expected.


GSM History
Explosive Growth in Wireless Data
1998
Data 70%
Data 4%
Voice 30%
Voice 96%
2005
Fixed data networks have been growing rapidly for the past 15 years. The PC or work
station attached to a LAN has become the de-facto working environment. LANs
connected to LANs on other sites around the world allow companies to improve
communications and share data. With the advent of the internet people have become
used to using a computer not only for work but for their personal lives or as a source of
entertainment.
Today’s wireless networks were designed primarily for voice, with a small data capability.
As more and more people are using data applications, the wireless market needs to
progress to provide data-on the-move and liberate users from the need to find an ethernet
cable or a telephone jack.
The Future
Imagine writing a report on the train on the way home, your secretary rings to say the
boss wants a video conference NOW!.
He comes on line, and tells you the report must be out tonight, with photos of the new
product which you can get from the Web. While still talking to the boss, you connect to the
Web, down load some files, attach them to your report and send it to a defined group of
people. All on the move.
This scenario will require considerable more than the 9.6 kbps or 14.4 kbps offered in
GSM today.
Europe’s GSM operators currently see 2 to 3% of traffic as data. But enhancements to

GSM, such as HSCSD, EDGE and GPRS will bring high data rates and get the users
used to using data applications from a wireless terminal.

GSM History
Increasing GSM Data Rates
video
photo report
UMTS clip
video
E/GPRS web photo report clip
photo video
ISDN e-mail web report clip
video
PSTN e-mail web photo report clip
photo video
e-mail web report
GSM clip
0 10 sec 1 min 10 min 1 hour

Transmission Time
GSM today
We can currently use a data terminal attached to an MS to connect to any standard data
service provided by the PSTN, ISDN or PDN networks as long as the network accepts a
data rate of 9.6 kbps and the IWF is equipped.
This includes access to the Web, e-mail, fax etc.. Use of these facilities is generally
limited due to the speed of the communication. Internet use is expensive and slow due to
the limited data rate and the circuit switched nature of the GSM system.
GSM 2+
HSCSD allows 14.4 kbps in one TS as from 1Q99 and multiple timeslots in the future. It is
however, still a circuit switched system which will supply expensive connections unless
the operators pricing schemes are imaginative. It will help those who use data over GSM
today and encourage others to use the services but it does involve a capacity penalty for
the network.

GSM History
Mobile Data Technology Evolution
2M 30 min delay intranet

t
cke
1M
p a Mobile
Mobile Data
Data Rate
Rate
throughput kbps
Explosion
Explosion in
in Next
Next 44 Years
Years
alternative: A2
100 k
64 k
it EDGE UMTS
cu HSCSD
cir
14.4
10 k
GPRS
9.6
1k SMS
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 timeframe
FTSE
-100
inde
x
GPRS = General Packet Radio Service

HSCSD = High Speed Circuit Switched Data
EDGE = Enhanced Data rate for Gsm Evolution
UMTS = Universal Mobile Telecomunication System
Up to V10* the data services were limited to 9.6 kbps.

A new service has been standardized in ETSI to reach 14.4 kbps user rate (AUIR) on one
TS. This enhancement is a part of a global strategy aimed at offering higher data rates.
This new data rate is the result of a new channel coding on the radio interface.
The BSS provides two modes:
• transparent data service,
• non transparent data service, using RLP protocol between MS and IWF.

GSM History
General Packet Radio Service
IP
(Internet/Intranet)
GPRS
PLMN
X.25 PSPDN
Corporate
Intranet
GPRS is the first major revolution in GSM data, providing speeds over 100 kbit/s on a
pseudo-packet switched radio interface and a real packet switched NSS. This will
encourage users to connect to high-speed applications across the wireless network and
optimises the network resources for data transmission.
There are however some limitations and the first implementations will have mobility
constraints. However, it is likely to attract users to internet type services and provides
operators with a natural migration path towards 3G systems.

GSM History
GPRS and EDGE
Enhanced Data rate for Gsm Evolution

New highly spectrum-efficient modulation for higher bit rates
GMSK modulation replaced with 8-Phase Shift Keying: throughput x 3
Applicable to both HSCSD and GPRS

Rates expected to reach 300 kbps (E-HSCSD) and 380 kbps (E-GPRS)
2000
UMTS
384
380
EDGE
300
GPRS 170 packet
circuit
HSCSD 43,2
GSM 14,4
speed kbps
1 10 100 1000 10000
log scale
Enhanced Data rate for Gsm Evolution or EDGE is often referred to in GPRS context as
the combination of the two technologies is seen by some groups in the mobile industry as
an alternative for UMTS. This makes EDGE an alternative for operators without an UMTS
license who wish to offer medium-speed mobile data services.
EDGE is being defined for both GPRS and GSM data services. EDGE is a redefinition of
the GSM modulation and coding scheme from GMSK to 8-PSK. It gives up to three times
higher throughput compared to GSM, using the same bandwidth.
This will enable end-user data rates of maximum 48 kbps per Time Slot for GPRS and
28.8 kbps per TS for GSM services.
By combining multiple TSs as with GPRS, data rates of 384 kbps can be achieved.

GSM History
Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
✔ Wireless office - Business

– Tele conference
– Sales order placement
– Files transfer
– Intranet services
✔ Travel - Car Centric Application

– Video and graphic oriented navigation tool 30 min delay
– Traffic intelligent information system

– Emergency services
– Location based yellow pages alternative: A2
✔ Entertainment / Education / Personal Communication

– Video/music on demand
– Interactive games / Tele-tourism
– Virtual school
– Video telephony
UMTS, or more precisely IMT2000, will at first provide a capacity advantage for wireless
data networks that become overcrowded. But it has to provide more than that. The higher
data rates will allow applications such as video and multimedia to be a real option from a
wireless terminal. And, the more open architecture will provide a service environment
allowing a wide range of services to be developed by operators and service specialists.
Total global roaming is one of the objectives of the specifications.
UMTS will take over from GSM 2+ systems to provide higher capacity and data rates.
This will allow new applications to be developed but will require new terminals. The most
obvious scenario is for existing GSM operators to migrate through GSM 2+ to
GSM/UMTS hybrid networks.

GSM History
Student Notes:

GSM History
Student Notes:

Basic Network Overview
Section 3
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Basic Network Overview 3-1

Objectives

• List the 3 sub-systems of a GSM system and their interfaces.
• List the different equipment in each GSM sub-system.

Traffic/Signaling
Traffic
«bla bla bla...»

Signaling « RING ! »
riiiiing
Network
The network can carry two types of information:

• Traffic: it concerns all the «user to user» information. It can be voice as well as data.
• Signaling: the network also requires to carry information for its own working. Their
purposes are numerous: traffic data routing, maintenance, security... These data are
usually not visible from user’s point of view.
There exists several signaling types:
• PTS (Per-Trunk Signaling): signaling and voice component are transmitted on the same
facility. PTS requires the voice component to be completely built, even if the call can’t
be completed.
• CCS (Common Channel Signaling): two separate paths are used for information transfer
(one for traffic, another for all-related signaling information). Thus, CCS allows the voice
component to be built separately which allows resources to be saved. For instance, no
voice facilities would be assigned to the call if the dialed number is busy.
GSM works with CCS(#7)

Network Overview
BTS NSS PSTN

BSS
BSC MSC
MS
OMC-R OMC-S
OSS
A GSM system is basically designed as a combination of three major subsystems: the

Network SubSystem (NSS), the radio subsystem called the Base station SubSystem (BSS),
and the Operation SubSystem (OSS).
The Network SubSystem (NSS) includes the equipment and functions related to end-to-end-
calls, management of subscribers, mobility, and interfaces with the fixed network (PSTN). It
is built on the switch of the system called Mobile-services Switching Center (MSC).
The Base station SubSystem (BSS) includes the equipment and functions related to the
management of the connection on the radio path. It mainly consists of Base Transceiver
Stations (BTS) communicating with the Mobile Station (MS) and one Base Station Controller
(BSC) managing the flow of information between the BTSs and the MSC.
The Operation SubSystem (OSS) mainly contains Operation and Maintenance Center for
NSS (OMC-S) and Operation and Maintenance Center devoted to the BSS (OMC-R). It is
connected to all equipment in the switching system and to the BSC (BTSs are not
connected to the OSS).
Any mobile network or PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) is related to a public fixed
network, commonly to the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).

Mobile Station
Mobile Station
=
SIM Card Handset Battery
Global GSM Mobility battery

Card
+ +
The Smart Card to use
f153454
GSM
2W
jmhfod
kgdjipj
The Mobile Station (MS) is composed of three parts:

• the handset includes the radio equipment (receiver-transmitter) and the Man-Machine
Interface (MMI),
• the SIM card (Subscriber Identity Module-card): this smart card allows the identification
of any subscriber (not only of his equipment) by the network. In particular, he can
borrow any mobile without changing anything from the network point of view since he
keeps the same SIM-card,
• the battery.

SIM-Card and GSM Mobile Equipment
SIM-Card
Global GSM Mobility
Card
= +
The Smart Card to use Calling line
0609225831
GSM
Contains:
- IMSI
Subscriber knows
- Called party number = MS-ISDN
- PIN
Handset
The GSM committee has introduced an important powerful innovation by using a Smart
Card in conjunction with a mobile telephone. Thus GSM subscribers are provided with a
Subscriber Identity Module card (SIM-Card) with its unique identification at the very
beginning of the service.
The subscriber is identified within the system when he inserts the SIM-Card in the mobile
equipment and switches it on. This provide a considerable amount of flexibility to the
subscribers since they can use any GSM-specified mobile equipment.
With the SIM-Card the idea of "personal communication" is already realized: the user only
needs to take his smart card on a trip. You can rent a mobile equipment unit at the
destination, even in other country, and insert your own SIM-Card. Any call you make will be
charged to your home GSM account. Also the GSM system is able to reach you at the
mobile unit you are currently using.
The Mobile Station (MS) includes radio equipment and the man machine interface (MMI)
that a subscriber needs in order to access the services provided by the GSM network.
Mobile Stations can be installed in vehicles or can be portable or hand-held stations.
The mobile station includes provisions for data communication as well as voice.
Mobile Stations transmit and receive messages to and from the GSM over the air interface
to establish and continue connection through the system.
Each mobile station has an International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) that is
permanently stored in the mobile unit. Upon request, the MS sends this number over the
signaling channel to the network. The IMEI is used to identify mobile units that are reported
stolen or operating incorrectly.

The SIM-Card Functions
Credit Card Size
µ SIM-Card
Global GSM Mobility
Card
15 mm The Smart Card to use

25 mm
Permanent data:
GSM
- Unique mobile subscriber identity Microchip with stored
through IMSI number, user information
- Authentication parameter Ki,
- Authentication algorithm A3,
- Generating encryption key Kc Removable data:
algorithm A8. - Temporary Mobile Subscriber Number,
- Location Area Identification.
The SIM-Card is a removable smart card, the size of a credit card, and contains an
integrated circuit chip with a microprocessor, random access memory, and read-only
memory.
Many MSs use the µ SIM-Card which can be snapped out of the credit card SIM, if required.
When a mobile users want to make a call, they insert their SIM-Card and provide their
Personal Identity Number (PIN), which is compared with a PIN stored within the SIM-CARD.
The PIN can also be permanently bypassed by the subscribers if authorized by the service
provider. Disabling the PIN code simplifies the call setup but reduces the protection of the
user's account in the event of a stolen SIM-CARD.

Subscriber Identification
IMSI MS - ISDN
Mobile Station -
International Mobile Subscriber Identity
Nature Integrated Services Digital Network Nb
Similar to ISDN,
Conformity with E212
Conformity with E164/E213
Identify a PLMN Identify the subscriber

National Significant Mobile Number
worldwide of a PLMN
MCC MNC MSIN CC NDC SN

Format H1 H2 x x x ......... x x x M1 M2 xx xx xx xx
Country
Mobile Mobile Mobile Subscriber National Mobile Subscriber
Code
Meaning Country Network Ident. Nb
(where Destination (national definition)
Code Code H1 H2 = Identity of HLR
subscription Code * M1 M2 = nbr of logical HLR
within the home PLMN
has been made)
Nb. digits 3 2 max 10 1 to 3 2 to 4 total max 15
* This code does not identify a geographical area

but an operator
The International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) is the primary identification of the
subscriber within the GSM network and is permanently assigned to him.
The Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number (MSISDN) is the number that the calling party dials
in order to reach the GSM subscriber. It is used by the land networks to route calls toward
an appropriate GSM network. MSISDN is stored in HLR.

Mobile Identification
PE ED
TY OV
PR
AP
TAC FAC SNR SP
Type Approval Serial number (SPare)

Code Final Assembly
Code
Stored inside the Mobile Equipment.

Used to replace IMSI or TMSI when both are unavailable (example: Emergency calls without
SIM-Card) or when required by the network (for maintenance).
Can be used for EIR database updating (when existing):
• TAC = 6 digits describing the type of equipment,
• FAC = 2 digits for identification of the factory,
• SNR = 6 digits for the serial number of the device.

MS Classmark
Classmark
Power classes
Revision level (Phase 1, 2, 2+)
GSM GSM GSM

RF power Class
900 1800 1900
Encryption algorithm (A5/1,A5/2)
1 1 W** 1 W**
Frequency (900/1800/1900)
2 8 W* 0.25 W 0.25 W
Short message
3 5W 4W 4W
4 2 W**
5 0.8 W
* Typical value for car mounted

** Typical value for handheld
The type of MS must be given to the NSS at the beginning of each new connection,
because this type can change between calls. The subscriber may insert this SIM-Card into
another Mobile Equipment (ME).
The classmark of each MS can contain up to five parameters:
• revision level,
• RF power capability,
• encryption algorithm: A5/1, A5/2,
• frequency capability: P-GSM (2 x 25 MHz), E-GSM (2 x 35 MHz), R-GSM (2 x 4
MHz), GSM 1800, GSM 1900,
• short message capability.
This classmark is sent when the system establishes the radio link between MS and the Base
Transceivers Stations.
The power class information is the maximum power the MS is able to transmit and is used
by the network for several procedures: selection, power control, handover.

Trends in Mobile Station

Booster
2W 5W Dual-band
Hands-free Data 900-1800
Pocket 2W 8W 900-1900
PC
Fax Organizer Java
Trends for MS are:

• Hands-free (2 W + booster 5 W).
• Increasing autonomy:
- idle mode: 40 hours to 140 hours,
- communication mode: 4 hours to 15 hours,
• Supplementary features (e.g. display of calling number).
• Additional features (e.g. voice recognition).
• Connection with terminals for data transmission:
- Modem on PCMCIA board for Laptop PC.
- Modem integrated.
• Dual-band terminal (GSM 900/1800 MHz).
• Radio organizer (Nokia 9000).
• Versatile terminal (under JAVA softwares): fax, internet, pager, organizer.

BSS Architecture
MSC
Radio
TCU Interface
A Interface
S2000H&L
NSS BTS
Ater Interface
Public Telephone Network
Abis Interface S8000 MS

BSC Outdoor
OMC-R BTS
Radio
Interface
OMN Interface
Sun
S8000
StorEdge A5000
Indoor
BSS BTS
MS
The Base Station SubSystem (BSS) is a set of equipment (aerials, transceivers and a
controller) that is viewed by the Mobile Switching Center through a single A interface as
being the entity responsible for communicating with mobile telephones or Mobile Stations
(MSs) in a certain area.
The radio equipment of a BSS may be composed of one or more cells, such a BSS may
contain one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs).
The interface between the BSC and the BTSs is called an Abis interface.
The BSS includes two types of equipment:

• the Base Transceiver Station (BTS functionally includes also the TRAU) in contact with
the mobile stations through the radio interface,
• the BSC, the latter being in contact with the Mobile Switching Center.
A BSS contains only one Base Station Controller (BSC).
The function split is basically between a transmission equipment, the BTS, and the BSC.

NSS Architecture
AuC EIR
PSTN
BSC
MSC
BSC
VLR HLR
MSC
BSCs of a same area are connected to a switch. In a GSM system this switch is called MSC
(Mobile Switching Center). MSCs are connected to each others.
Usually, each MSC is associated to four databases.
The Visitor Location Register (VLR) memorizes information about the subscribers physically
present in a geographic area. If a subscriber leaves this area, this information is stored in
the VLR of another MSC.
Each Home Location Register (HLR) is related to a precise number of subscribers. The
information present in a subscriber’s HLR are quite similar to these contained in the VLR of
the area where he is but, here, this information is static. Thus the VLR stands for a copy of
the HLR more easily available (the VLR and the MS are in the same area). They are always
linked, since the HLR memorizes the identity number of the VLR where it can find its
subscriber.
Authentication Center (AuC): Radio channel use sets a problem of communication safety. In
particular operators have to pay attention to the fraudulent resources use. Therefore the
network is provided with a system of user authentication.
The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) is a list of all the Mobile Equipment: it contains valid
and invalid mobile equipment.
When a communication comes from the PSTN to a given subscriber, it enters the network in
the MSC that contains the subscriber’s HLR. This MSC is called GMSC (Gateway MSC).

Check Your Learning
1- How many sizes of SIM-Card are there?

2- What is an IMSI? a MSISDN? an IMEI?
3- What is a PIN code?
4- Is it possible for a given subscriber to have several MSISDN?
1- How many sizes of SIM-Card are there?
2- What is an IMSI? a MSISDN? an IMEI?
3- What is a PIN code?
4- Is it possible for a given subscriber to have several MSISDN?

Student Notes:

Student Notes:

Services
Section 4
Services
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Services 4-1

Services
Objectives
This section explores the services that are provided

in a GSM network.
After completing this section you will be able to:

• Relate the services that can be offered to GSM subscribers

Services
Teleservices
1 - Telephony
Hello
Speaking
Originated
call 1
Speaking
Hello
Terminated
call 1
Teleservices cover regular telephony, emergency calls, voice messaging, and short
messages handling.
The most important service provided by GSM users is telephony which enables bi-directional
speech calls to be placed between GSM users and any telephone subscriber who is
reachable through the general telephony network.
Fixed telephone subscribers worldwide as well as mobile network subscribers or subscribers

of specific networks connected to a public telephone network can be reached.
Before either Mobile Originated or Mobile Terminated calls can be established, the mobile
telephone must be switched on and registered into the system.

Services
Teleservices
2 - Emergency Call
Global GSM Mobility Emergency

Card 112
GSM
Do not require a SIM-Card

while "112" is invoked
To place an emergency call enter 112 followed by SEND. Additional means to place such
call are also allowed by a dedicated button.
The Mobile Telephone supports the initiation of an emergency call without a SIM present in
it, regardless of the call being accepted or not by the network.
Note that calls to national emergency services may be standard for the country of the
serving GSM network (number 17 to call the police in France, number 911 to make an
emergency call in U.S.A.).
However, with the exception of code "112", these are not treated within the GSM network as
"teleservice emergency call" and would require a valid IMSI.

Services
Teleservices
3 - Short Message Cell Broadcast
me
ssa
ge
A
eA Information
sag
me
ssa me s Provider A
ge
B
eA
sag
mes
B
ge
ssa
me
mess
B age B
ge
sa
es
m A Information
ge Provider B
sa
es
m
GSM Network
The cell broadcast enables an Information Provider to submit short messages for
broadcasting to a specified area within the GSM network.
The cell broadcast service has the following features:

• The cell broadcast message is sent (on control channels) in a limited area, defined by
the originator of the message, by agreement with the GSM Operator.
• The mobile telephone only receive the broadcast message in idle mode.
• The short message function running in the mobile is able not to store broadcast
messages which are not wanted or which have already been received.
• The mobile telephone does not send acknowledgment.
• The GSM network continuously sends cell broadcast messages so that all such
messages are sent in turn, an then repeated. On the other hand, the cycle time is short
enough for important messages to be received by travelers (subscribers) moving
through a group of cells.
• The maximum length of each cell broadcast message will be 93 characters and GSM
specifications allows up to 15 of these 93 character messages treated as segment of a
longer message.

Services
Teleservices
4 - Short Message Service
Radio SMS-MO/ PP
PLMN
SMS-SC
Radio
PLMN
SMS-MT/ PP Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom
Short Message Service (SMS) allows the point to point transmission of a short message
to/from MS, using their IMSI.
A short message is an alphanumeric string that can be up to 160 characters long (140
octets).
Two different types of short message are defined:
• short message MT/PP (Mobile Terminated / Point to Point),
• short message MO/PP (Mobile Originated / Point to Point).
Point to point messages may be sent or received when the MS is engaged on a call (voice
or data), or in idle mode.
However, messages which overlap the boundary of such a call, or during a handover, may
be lost, in which case they will be sent again.
Messages may be input to the SC from a fixed network customer by means of a suitable
telecommunication service either from the fixed network or from a mobile network customer.
An acknowledgment indicates that the GSM Network has successfully transferred the
message to the mobile telephone or the SC.
Optionally, the SC may offer final delivery notification to the originator. This delivery report
indicates whether this particular message has been correctly received at the receiving
station or not, to the extent that the SC is able to establish this.
It does not indicate whether the message has been read. If the delivery report is negative, it
includes the failure cause. The delivery report is sent to the originator, if reachable, as soon
as the information is available.

Services
Teleservices
5 - Fax
Alternate Speech and Fax:
Automatic fax:
Fax transmissions are possible via a PLMN only with a Fax-group3 (14.4 kbps).
Two modes are available:

• manual mode allows to switch alternatively from voice transmission to fax transmission,
• automatic mode allows to send and receive a fax without any human intervention;
however, voice transmission is impossible in this mode.

Services
Teleservices
6 - User's Data Call Features
Embodied
Teleservices
bearer
Fax G3, SMS
treatments for
Teleservices radio transmission
voice
Cable that
bears data
Data / Fax
kit adaptation
Connections can be made with a suitable data/fax kit adaptation either to other Mobile
Station or to other data users on circuit-switched (PSTN).
The slide gives an example of a suitable data/fax kit and a computer that are directly
connected to the MS.
In the case of making a Fax-call to a PSTN subscriber, the GSM network automatically
selects the suitable modem for the link to the similar modem at the remote end.

Services
Teleservices
7 - Voice Messaging
Please leave
a message
Busy after the tone
Forward 1
to voice
mail box
Voice mail
box
GSM
network
You have
3 voices
messages...
Voice
message
Retrieving the voice
messages
server
Warming up...
Another service derived from telephony is voice messaging. Many operators offer it as a
basic feature.
It enables a voice message to be stored for later retrieval by the mobile recipient, either
because he was not reachable at time of the call or because the calling party choose to
access the voice mailbox of the GSM subscriber directly.

Services
Supplementary Services
Calling Party 1 - Line Identification Called Party
CoLP CLIP
CLIR CoLR
Calling Line Identification
presentation (CLIP)
restriction (CLIR)
Cnted line Calling line

0609173957 0609225831
Connected Line Identification
presentation (CoLP)
restriction (CoLR)
Calling Name Presentation

(CNAP)
Calling line identification presentation (CLIP) provides the ability to indicate the ISDN
number of the calling party with possible additional address information to the called party.
This identity is provided to the called subscriber before answering, thus enabling him to
make the decision of whether to take the call or not.
Calling line identification restriction (CLIR) enables the calling party not to send any
address information to the called party.
Connected line identification presentation (CoLP) provides the GSM caller with the
phone number he has reached.
Connected line identification restriction (CoLR) enables the called party not to send its
phone number to the calling party.
Calling Name Presentation (CNAP) provides the calling party name instead of the ISDN
number. However, this service is not yet specified by GSM recommendations.

Services
"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission". 2 - Call Transfer and Call Forwarding
unconditional (CFU)
on busy (CFB)
on no reply (CFNRy)
on not reachable (CFNRc)

1 2
Call forwarding unconditional (CFU) allows a called mobile subscriber to have the
network send all incoming calls, which are addressed to the called mobile subscriber’s
directory number, to another directory number.
Call forwarding on mobile subscriber busy (CFB): allows a called mobile subscriber to
have the network send the incoming calls, which are addressed to the called mobile
subscriber’s directory number and which meet mobile subscriber busy, definition to another
directory number.
Call forwarding on no reply (CFNRy) allows an called mobile subscriber to have the
network send the incoming calls, which are addressed to the subscriber’s directory number
and which meet no reply, to another directory number.
Call forwarding on MS not reachable (CFNRc) provides for a mobile subscriber to have
the network send all incoming calls, which are addressed to the called mobile directory
number and meet the not reachable definition, to another directory number.

Services
3 - Waiting / Hold and Multi Party
WAIT HOLD
1 2 1 2
Waiting / Hold:
1
Multi Party: 1
Max = 5 persons
2 2
Call waiting (CW): provides a mobile subscriber with the possibility of being notified of an
incoming call while his mobile telephone is in the busy state. Subsequently, the user can
either answer, reject, or ignore the incoming call. Both the call waiting and call hold
(described further) options are the same as those offered by the PSTN.
Call Hold (HOLD): allows a served mobile subscriber to interrupt communication on an

existing call and then subsequently, if desired, to reestablish communication.
Multi party service (MPTY):

• This Supplementary Service provides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have a
multi-connection call, in other words a simultaneous communication with more than one
party.
• A precondition for the multi-party service is that the served mobile subscriber is in
control of one active call and one call on hold, both calls having been answered. In this
situation the served mobile subscriber can request the network to begin the multiParty
service.
• Once a multiParty call is active, remote parties may be added, disconnected or
separated (i.e.. removed from the multiParty call but remain connected to the served
mobile subscriber).
• The maximum number of remote parties is 5.

Services
4 - Call Barring
Outgoing (BAOC)
Outgoing international (BOIC)
Outgoing international
except home PLMN country (BOIC-exHC)
Incoming (BAIC)
Incoming when roaming outside

(BIC-Roam)
Barring of all outgoing call (BAOC): makes it possible for a mobile subscriber to prevent
all outgoing calls.
Barring outgoing international calls (BOIC): allows a mobile subscriber to prevent all
attempted outgoing calls.
BOIC except those directed to the home PLMN country (BOIC-exHC)
Barring of all incoming international (BAIC).
Barring of all incoming calls when roaming outside the home GSM network country
(BIC-Roam): makes it possible for a mobile subscriber to prevent all incoming calls that
would otherwise be terminated at his directory number. This only applies to the case when
the mobile subscriber roams outside his home GSM network.

Services
5 - Call Completion (CCBS)
NEW! Unable to place

BUSY a call. Speaking Speaking
...
1 2
Reinitiate This call in state

the call
Ring !
Ring ! 1
Idle
Call is HELLO
SPEAKING established
1
Completion of calls to busy subscribers (CCBS): allows a calling mobile subscriber who
encounters a busy called subscriber to be notified by the system operator when the busy
called subscriber becomes free and have the operator re-initiate the call if the caller so
desires.
This feature has to be supported by both the originating and the terminating networks.

Services
6 - Advice of Charge
Advice of Charge Information (AoCI)
information on progress
of the cost of the call
Advice of Charge Charging (AoCC)
Insert a
SIM credit Card
Completion of call
need charging
Advice of charge Information (AoCI): informs the user of the real-time information on
progress of the cost of the call.
Advice of charge Charging (AoCC): the mobile may be a money-operated mobile

telephone or a standard mobile station that can display the charging information and can
accept either coins or charge a credit-card.

Services
Intelligent Network Services

IN and CAMEL
Main IN Services:
☎ Personal Number
☎ Virtual Private Network (VPN)
☎ Sponsored Cell & Call

☎ Prepaid Calling
☎ Location Inquiry
☎ Geo Zone
The aim of the CAMEL (Customized Application for Mobile network Enhanced
Logic) is to provide GSM network operators with the ability to create specific
services in their home network, and export these services to their subscribers
when roaming outside the home network.
CAMEL introduces the ability to provide location dependent IN type of services
to mobiles subscribers.
The Intelligent Network or IN is a switching network concept.

Its idea is to make GSM services system an open system; that is to say new services
modules can always be added on the previous system without changing its architecture.
Basic call processing is performed by the switch and when it recognizes that a call requires
an IN service, this service processing is provided by another entity, located either in the
same site or in a remote site.
This concept allows to implement numerous new services such as:
• Personal Number: gives the GSM subscribers more control over incoming calls,
• Virtual Private Network: a set of corporate services that enables similar functions to
those of private network, among a group of GSM subscribers,
• Sponsored Cell and Call: allows a third party, as sponsor, to play announcement at the
beginning of the call,
• Prepaid Calling: allows subscriber to pay in advance for the calls they will make.
To communicate between Intelligent Network platforms, GSM specifications define CAMEL
(Customized Application for Mobile network Enhanced Logic).
The aim of the CAMEL is to provide network operators with the ability to create specific
services in their home network, and export these services to their subscribers when roaming
outside the home network.
CAMEL introduces the ability to provide location dependent IN type of services to mobiles
subscribers: Location Enquiry and Geo Zone.

Services
IN Services: Virtual Private Network

Closed User Group
Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom
X 25 c/min 5696
X

c
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Location & Time

o+
*
4197
** 0 #
7PRS8TUV9WXY
dependant screening 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO

1 2ABC3DEF
Corporate Numbering Plan

4446 Wireline Access
25 c/min Lower rate for on-net calls
4197 25 c/min
5696

4446
Location & Time
dependant routing
c
Speed Dialing
1 2 3
4 5 6
London
7 8 9
* o+
Bristol 50 c/min 924 63256


Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a set of corporate services that enables private network like
features among a group of GSM subscribers and wireline users; thus, corporations can
distribute GSM phones to their employees, providing them with many of the services that
they use on their existing corporate network:
• Private Numbering Plan: subscribers can reach all members of the corporate private network,
GSM as well as wireline, by dialing their usual internal number instead of the longer, harder to
remember, public number.
• Off Net Calling: subscribers are allowed to call public numbers that are outside the corporate
private network.
• Forced On Net Calling: when a subscriber makes a call to a member of the corporate private
network using their public number (he must also be provisioned with Off Net Calling), the feature
recognizes the call as a private call and treats it as such (appropriate billing, etc.).
• White (/Black) List Screening: subscribers with White (/ Black) List, can only (/ can not) place
calls to numbers listed on it.
• Geographic Routing: specific numbers can be configured to route calls differently depending on
the location of the caller.
• Time Screening (/ Routing): some specific numbers can be configured to restrict access (/ to
route calls differently) depending on the time of the day, day of the week, day of the year or
whether the day is a statutory holiday.
• Privileged Routing: specific numbers can be configured to route calls differently depending on
the identity of the caller.
• Closer user group (CUG): provides the possibility for a group of subscribers, connected to the
GSM network and or to the PSTN/ISDN, to communicate only among themselves or receive
external calls; emergency calls still are available.

Services
IN Services: Prepaid Calling
RANK1ONE Las
5542 1139 1464 228 99494
cos t call
Newts $ 0.5 Your account
VALID DATES
6/91 6/99
is $ bala 0
SCOOBY DOO
balance
24.5 nce is $ 24.50
0


Account status
enquiry and
Multiple recharging options notification
✓ Multiple Tariff Plans
✓ Tariffs using fixed charge, CC, NC, distance, time & day, roaming
charges...
✓ Possible language selection by subscriber
Flexible features for easy

✓ Bulk account loading for easy provisioning
service packaging
Prepaid Calling enables subscribers to control their phone call expenditure, by deciding how
much to spend and limiting themselves to that amount if required.
Subscribers pay in advance for their calls and get their calls released when the balance
becomes null; thus, subscribers get a cost-control (useful for rental companies, hotels,
special events, parents wanting to give mobiles to their children).
With Prepaid Calling, subscribers are able to:
• make and receive calls (service is totally transparent to the subscriber during normal
use),
• be notified of a low balance or a pending expiry date (if the threshold is reached, the
subscriber can be notified by warning tones before the call is taken down),
• use Voice Mail,
• query the status of their account at any time from any phone and recharge their
account.
The subscriber can also be informed of his account balance and of the cost of his last call, at
the end of each call, via a short message.
Additionally, the Operator can apply different rates to calls and manage the life of prepaid
subscriptions.
Nortel’s prepaid solution currently supports all major recharging options, for increased
service usage and enhanced customer satisfaction:
• automatically, by vouchers (e.g. scratch card),
• automatically, by credit card,
• manually (through Customer Services), by any means of payment.

Services
IN Services: Sponsored Cell & Call
Calls from this

location are

sponsored. Today, up to 50 % off
Today buy one on handbags !
dinner at Bellini’s on Sponsors can
Keith Street, near the
cinemas, and get one target specific
free!
customers
by sponsoring
some of their Sponsors can also change their
calls... announcements on the phone
...made from

specified

Your next two minute calling
locations is brought to you free today by
The leather Shop located on
at predefined first level of the Central

Shopping Centre.
times of day Come and visit us
Today, up to 50 % off on
handbags !
Service can be offered via access
code or through subscription
Sponsored Cell & Call allows a third party (the sponsor) to play a promotional
announcement at the beginning of a call and for this service, pays for part of the ongoing
call.
The main features of Sponsored Cell & Call are:
Choice to sponsor the call & choice of sponsor based on one or more of the following:
• the calling party location,
• the calling party profile (age ...),
• time of day, day of week,
• destination (emergency, freephone ...).
Sponsor can change his announcement on the phone.
User can specify certain destinations as not sponsored.
User can have the choice of having his call sponsored or not.
User can cut through the announcement, but the call is not sponsored.
User can be prevented from cutting through the announcement.

Services
IN Services: Location Inquiry
The closest restaurants are:

The Wind Jammer
on 132 Flinton Street
Sea food
Phone 55 1968 Promotional
press 1 to connect Informations:
The Palace call #15
on 11 Bourke Street
Chinese food
Phone 55 0407
press 2 to connect
The closest restaurants are:

The Tower, Tower Hill,
Phone 56 4589,
Press 1 to connect
The Anchor
Today’s special at

St Catherine Dock
The Anchor is Maine
Phonce 56 2548
Press 2 to connect lobster soup
Be the first ten caller and

get a free cocktail !
Cell dependent information Possible customization of announcement

Direct connection to advertisers directly by the advertiser
Location Inquiry provides GSM subscribers with information on where to locate useful
services in their current vicinity.
It enables easy connection to any service they are interested in and wish to talk to.
However, while GSM subscribers are out of the office or away from home, they do not have
access to this information easily e.g. yellow pages, guides.
Most of time, they may be even more reliant on this information because they often are in a
foreign environment, e.g. in another part of town or out of town.
The Location Inquiry service brings in a third party known as the “Advertiser” who seeks to
sell their products/services using the operator’s network.
Location Inquiry may also list services such as hospitals, doctors, pharmacies, etc. and be
promoted as a personal security service.
The main features of Location Inquiry are:
• location dependent information based on subscriber’s cell,
• possible customization of the announcement by the advertiser (special offer of the day
...).

Services
IN Services: Geo Zone

1 - Outgoing Calls
This call is being

made outside of your
home zone.
Copyright © 1996 Northern Telecom Wait to complete it or

hang-up now.
C o p y r ig h t ©
1996
N o r th e r n
T e le c o m
Wide Area
Office Zone Cellular Home Zone
Notification of current
15 c/min 50 c/min 10 c/min zone before call set-up:
Specific rates applied to calls made from Home/Office zone • when in home/office zone
and/or
• when out of zones
Multiple zones can be defined
Different rates applied to calls made from specific locations

The main features of the outgoing side of Geo Zone are:

• zone dependent tariffing of outgoing calls:
- up to 4 zones per subscriber,
- each zone has its own tariff,
• information on the current zone available to the subscriber via:
- announcement or tones at the beginning of the call,
- optionally by a display on the mobile (in which case it must support it, which
means specific development on the handset).

Services
IN Services: Geo Zone

2 - Incoming Calls
Calling the “fixed” number You are going to be

charged 5 c/min for
this call.
When you are at home, When you are away from home,
Wait to accept it or
you are called directly you decide if the call is routed to: hang-up now.
Voice mail
OR
Notification of current
zone before incoming

With Notification call is connected:
Your Caller pays when in home/office zone
Your Caller pays Your Caller pays fixed line rate
fixed line rate and/or
fixed line rate You pay the • when out of zones
You pay nothing You pay nothing “forwarding leg”
Fixed network service with built-in mobility

The main features of the incoming side of Geo Zone are:

• routing of incoming calls according to the subscriber’s location:
- if the subscriber is in his Geo Zone, the call is routed to his mobile handset, thus
he does not have to pay anything,
- if the subscriber is out of his Geo Zone, the call can be either routed to his voice-
mail, or to his mobile handset; in the last case the subscriber pays for the
forwarding leg,
• information on the current zone available to the subscriber, when receiving a call via:
- announcement or tones before the call is connected.

Services
Check Your Learning
1- What are the three categories of services defined in GSM?

2- What are the two types of short messages?
3- What are the two required pieces of equipment for data exchanges in
GSM (one in the MS, the other in the MSC)?
4- What are the user data rates which were selected for GSM?
1- What are the three categories of services defined in GSM?
2- What are the two types of short messages?
3- What are the two required pieces of equipment for data exchanges in GSM (one in the MS,
the other in the MSC)?
4- What are the user data rates which were selected for GSM?

Services
Check Your Learning (continue)
5- What is the CLIP supplementary service?

6- What is the CoLP supplementary service?
7- What is the MPTY supplementary service?
8- What is the call forwarding supplementary services?
5- What is the CLIP supplementary service?
6- What is the CoLP supplementary service?
7- What is the MPTY supplementary service?
8- What is the call forwarding supplementary services?

Services
Student Notes:

Services
Student Notes:

Cellular Principles
Section 5
Cellular Principles
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Cellular Principles 5-1

Cellular Principles
Objectives
Provide an introduction to the concept

of cellular radio networks.

• Explain what a radio cell is
• List the various types of cells
• Explain what a clutter is
• Have basic notions on Link Budget
• Explain what an Erlang is
• Explain what a frequency reuse pattern is
• Have basic notions on Link Budget

Cellular Principles
Radio Design
The first step in designing a GSM cellular network consists in dimensioning the cells which
are the basic elements of the system.
The size of the cell is dependant on several parameters and must be determined on a case
per case basis at the implementation stage, even if the preliminary design stage takes few
cell models.
Both technical and economical aspects influence the design.
The first layer of the above drawing indicates that before implementing a network, an
operator will list and use his locations as much as possible, for economical reasons. As a
result the given position and height of the location will influence the range of the cell. The
exact situation and height of the pole and antennas can also be determined or imposed by
the microwave links.
The marketing requirements are translated into coverage areas with their associated quality
of service and traffic needs.
The operator is given a limited number of radio channels which leads to limited resources in
a given cell, depending on the chosen frequency reuse policy.
It appears then that a cell is determined by two factors: one is radio range depending on
antenna height, environment, quality of service… and the other is traffic or subscribers per
cell.

Cellular Principles
Erlang Concept
Erlang is the unit of statistical resource use.
Average number of busy channels

during the period of observation
(usually, the peak hour).
Example:
One user speaking on the phone for three minutes out of one hour will need:
3/60 = .05 ERLANG or 50 mErl
Erlang B:
At some time some users can need the resource simultaneously:
the use of the resource is associated with a blocking rate.
Erlang C:
When users request the resource at the same time, instead of rejecting the extra calls,
users are requested to wait some time before getting the line.
The Erlang B formula used to compute the resource number is quite complicated:
AN
Br = N!
A AN
1+ + ... +
1! N!
A good approximate result can be obtained by using the following formula:

N = A + kA1/2 where:
N is the number of resources needed to provide A Erlangs with the Br,
Blocking Rate expressed in 10 at power -k: Br = 10-k
For Erlang C, the concept of blocking rate is no more used. The calls instead of being
rejected, when no resource is available, are held for a given time, queuing is used. That is to
say, the user has a probability of waiting more than a given time before getting the line.
As an example, using the first formula, 117 resources provide 100 Erlangs at 1% blocking
rate. If the approximate formula is used, 117 become 120.
When queuing is implemented, 1% blocking is converted into 1% probability of waiting more
than 0.1 second or 1‰ probability of waiting more than 0.38 second.
Generally the values used for a mobile subscriber are in the 20 to 50 mErl range at 1% to
5% blocking rate.

Cellular Principles
Fading
Example of Field Strength Variation for GSM 1800

-10
-20 Zoom on
Short Term Fading
-30 Measurement
Free Space
Field Strength (dBm)
≅ λ/2
-40
±2m
-50
-60
-70
Long Term Fading
-80
-90
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
-100
Distance (m)
Information exchanged between MS and BTS is transported by means of radio waves which
are attenuated, reflected or diffracted, on their path.
The received signal is the sum of different signals resulting from these effects, sometimes
constructive, sometimes destructive.
Free-space loss is calculated using the following formula:
Loss (dB) = 32.4 + 20*log(d) + 20*log(f) where d is the distance between BTS and MS
expressed in km and f the frequency expressed in MHz.
In practice, the radio waves are not in free-space propagation conditions and the term
depending on distance can vary from 20*log(d) for free space to 40*log(d) for very dense
urban, depending on the environment.
Practical expressions of path loss are given here, depending on frequency and environment.
They come from several measurements, are statistical and represent the mean variation to
which short term and long term fading have to be added:
Rural (BTS antenna at 100 m) Urban (BTS antenna at 50 m)
GSM 900 90.7 + 31.8log(d) 123.3 + 33.7log(d)
Rural (BTS antenna at 60 m) Urban (BTS antenna at 50 m)

GSM 1800 100.1 + 33.3log(d) 133.2 + 33.8log(d)

Cellular Principles
Coverage or Traffic Limitations

TRAFFIC
LIMITED
AREA COVERAGE
(10000 LIMITED
subscriber AREA
per km2) (-75 dBm
at cell edge)
COVERAGE
LIMITED
AREA
(-70 dBm
at cell edge)
At the advent of GSM, subscribers were very few, and the radio resources available in each
cell were sufficient to cope with the call requests.
As subscriber numbers grew, some dense urban cells became congested, and the need of
extra radio resources appeared. The solution was to add extra sites to provide extra
channels even if the radio coverage was good enough. This is called cell splitting.
For radio coverage, the use of a link budget calculation sheet is necessary. The size of the
cell in this case is determined by the signal strength necessary at the edge of the cell.
For capacity limited areas, the BTS manages a given maximum number of subscribers. To
determine the number of sites necessary to provide the service is simply to divide the
amount of subscribers located in the area by the number of subscribers managed by one
site.

Cellular Principles
Cell Sectorization
OMNI
TRI
BI
Three types of site coverage are shown, on the same scale: omni, bi and tri.
Each site is equipped with optimum antennas.
Sectorization provides higher cell range thus allowing reduction of number of sites and
easier frequency reuse.

Cellular Principles
Omnidirectional Site Antennas
These pictures show one omni antenna as well as an omni site with space diversity.
On the right are printed the vertical radiation patterns with no electrical tilt (top) and with
electrical tilt (bottom).
Mechanical tilt is not used on omni antennas.

Cellular Principles
Bi and Trisectorial Site Antennas
These two pictures illustrate bi and trisector sites with space diversity.

Cellular Principles
Calculated Cell Coverage (Trisectorial Site)
This coverage map coming from a trisectorial site, illustrates the statistical representation. It
more obviously appears that an hexagon is not sufficient to represent a cell.
Some areas can be provided with coverage very far away from the average range of the cell
in line of sight conditions which can cause interference.

Cellular Principles
Calculated Cell Coverage
P
1
P’
To be able to make a GSM call, the first condition is to get sufficient signal strength. But this
is not enough, this signal must be understandable by the mobile which means not to receive
two similar signals from two different BTS using the same frequency.
As an example points P or P’ on the picture may receive good signal from sites 1 and 2, but
depending on the relative levels and frequencies, the communication can be performed
successfully or not.
Interference can occur at the MS side where two or more BTSs having the same frequency
are received with similar levels. Similarly at the BTS side when two mobiles communicating
with two different BTS can be received by one with similar levels.

Cellular Principles
Clutters
Radio waves behave differently depending on the environment, and the radio range can vary
from few hundred meters to several kilometers.
It is then important to classify the different types of environment included in the area to be
provided with GSM service.
As an example the map presented above shows a city and its surroundings, classified into
fourteen types of environment or clutters.
A link budget is established for each clutter, defining a specific cell size.
Example of Dense Urban clutter

Areas within urban perimeter. This includes dense urban areas
with dense development where built-up features do not appear
distinct from each other. It also includes built-up features of the
downtown district with heights below 40 m.
Example of Mean Urban clutter

Areas with urban perimeter. The mean urban clutter should have
mean street density with no pattern, the major streets are visible,
the built-up features appear distinct from each other. Some small
vegetation could be included. Average height is below 40 m.

Cellular Principles
Link Budget Presentation

Parameters
Antenna Gain (65°)
18 dBi Frequency 1800 MHz
Jumper Loss Base Height 40.0 m
0.5 dB Mobile Height 1,5 m
Environment Urban
Feeder Loss
3 dB
Penetration Factor 15 dB
Sensitivity Body Loss 3 dB

-110 dBm
Antenna Gain
Coupling system Outdoor Minimum Field -2 dB
Cable Loss
95%: -80 dBm 0 dB
Tx loss
4.5 dB Coverage Range RX TX
95%: 810 m
Output Power
RXm RXd 30 dBm
Sensitivity
-100 dBm
Max TX Output Power
Options
44.8 dBm
Rx Diversity Gain: 5 dB
Mobile
Base Station Overlapping Margin: 0 dB
The purpose of the link budget calculation is to determine the range of the cell with
given equipment and quality of service in a specific environment.
• First of all the technical characteristics of the BTS and the MS are taken into account:
output power and input sensitivity as well as the feeder losses and antenna gain on the
BTS side and body losses and antenna gain on the MS side.
• Secondly, quality of service is specified using various elements: percentage of area
covered inside the cell (ex: 95%), indoor penetration losses (ex: 18 dB), overlapping
margin (ex: 3 dB).
• Thirdly, environment is specified (ex: urban) with antennas height, for both BTS and MS.
Radio wave propagation losses are dependent on frequency (GSM 900 or 1800), and
environment. This is taken into account in the link budget.
The above diagram illustrates all the elements used in the link budget for determining the
maximum path loss for the radio waves, from BTS to MS (downlink) and from MS to BTS
(uplink).
The worst case or lowest path loss allowed will be used to calculate the cell range in the
specified conditions.

Cellular Principles
Cochannel Interference
Power Wanted signal

Power
Interfering signal
Frequency
f1
Frequency
f1
Power
combined
signal
The two signals are
superimposed
Frequency
f1
Cochannel interference occurs when two signals are being transmitted by two different cells
on the same frequency and both are received by the same telephone mobile.
The two signals are then superimposed, interfering with one another and creating a signal
that cannot be recognized.

Cellular Principles
The Frequency Reuse Distance
Reuse distance D
Frequency Frequency
Group A1 Group A1
Other Other
frequencies frequencies
R R
Wanted signal
Interfering signal
γ
C 1æDö
= ç
I 6 èR
C = "useful" signal
I = Interfere signal
γ = Constant depending on the environment type.
Ex: down-town γ=4
rural γ = 2.

Cellular Principles
Interference Limits
Ia2 (+41dB)
C (0 dB)
Ia1 (+9 dB)
Ic (-9 dB)
F1 + 200 kHz + 400 kHz
GSM specifications state that system and equipment must operate with specific ratios of
carrier to interference:
• C/Ic or useful signal over interfering signal at same frequency may be as low as 9 dB,
• C/Ia1 or useful signal over interfering signal at ± 200 kHz may be as low as -9 dB,
• C/Ia2 or useful signal over interfering signal at ± 400 kHz may be as low as -41
dB,
• C/Ia3 or useful signal over interfering signal at ± 600 kHz may be as low as -49
dB.

Cellular Principles
Frequency Reuse Pattern
A4 C3 B3 A4 C3 B3 A4 C3
Trisectorial
Site B4 A1 C4 B4 A1 C4 B4
A2 C1 B1 A2 C1 B1 A2 C1
A3 B2
Distance of B2 A3 C2 B2 C2
4*3 Reuse
frequency reuse Pattern
A4 C3 B3 A4 C3 B3 A4 C3 of 12 cells
B4 A1 C4 B4
A1 C4 B4
A2 C1 B1 A2 C1 B1 A2 C1
B2 A3 C2 B2 A3 C2 B2
Channels are reused at regular distance intervals. The mechanism that governs this process
is called frequency planning.
The slide shows an example of N =12 frequency plan where the available frequencies of a
GSM network are placed.
This set of 12 cells is called a frequency reuse pattern and is generally used for BCCH
frequency plan.

Cellular Principles
Frequency Plan
A practical example of 4*3 reuse frequency pattern is displayed here, one color represents a
frequency group.

Cellular Principles
Different Types of Cells

EXTENDED - CELL: CONCENTRIC - CELL:
macro cell with system coverage macro cell with system coverage
≤ 120 km) for coasts...
extension (≤ limitation inside another macro
MACRO - CELL:
antenna radiating ‘above’ roofs
≤ 35 km)
---> Wide Coverage (≤
• High sensitivity to
interference
• Requires "secured"
Frequency reuse pattern
PICO-CELL:
Antenna inside building MICRO-CELL: • High isolation from
Antenna ‘below’ the roofs interferences
---> Very small coverage • A few Frequencies
---> small coverage
intensively reused
As capacity needs increase, various solutions have to be implemented to provide local extra
capacity.
Micro cells provide coverage to one or several streets as well as indoor coverage
improvement.
Pico cells provide specific service in given buildings, shopping malls, conference halls…
Concentric cells allow provision of extra capacity close to the site by adding TRXs with
system limitations reducing their coverage range.

Cellular Principles
Cell Layering
Macrocell
Antenna
Macrocell
Umbrella cell
2 layers
model
Microcell
Antenna µ cell 1 Microcell
µ cell 2 Pedestrian
Slow speed
Fast speed vehicle after
vehicle direction change
Micro-cells can be seen as an efficient design for mobile network to improve:

• indoor propagation,
• network capacity.
The actual solution consists in creating a two layers model:

• macro-cell or ‘umbrella’ cell layer dedicated in priority to fast speed users,
• micro-cells layer, dedicated to slow speed mobile (pedestrian, traffic jam).

Cellular Principles

Exercise
A1 A1
C1 B1 A2 C1 B1 A2
A3 C2 B2 A3 C2 B2
C3 B3 A4 C3 B3
C4 B4
This exercise depicts the advantages of the frequency reuse pattern assuming the following
data for bandwidth, and number of cells, over the same service area to be covered.
Assumptions:
• Operator bandwidth: 9.6 MHz (48 freq.).
• 36 cells (12 tri-sectorial sites).
• Channel spacing: 200 kHz.
• TDMA: 8 channels per carrier.
Questions:
What are the number of channels available within this area for these two cases:
• 1° case: reuse pattern = 12 cells?
• 2° case: reuse pattern = 9 cells?

Cellular Principles
Student Notes:

Radio Interface
Section 6
Radio Interface
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Radio Interface 6-1

Radio Interface
Objectives
Provides an introduction to the Radio Interface


• Explain the purposes of the radio interface
• Show how GSM organizes its radio channels
• Identify the physical channels and the logical channels
• Relate basic steps that GSM must perform for the successful
transmission over the radio interface
• Explain how GSM use its logical channels at call setup

Radio Interface
Functions of the Radio Interface
• Speech and user's data

• Signaling
BTS
BTS-1 BTS-2
The radio interface in the GSM system is responsible for maintaining communication between
the fixed network and mobile subscribers.
The radio interface serves two major functions in the GSM system.
• To transport user information, both speech and data:
- Bi-directional speech transmission at rate of 13 kbps (full rate).
- Bi-directional data transmission: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bps.
• To exchange signaling messages between the mobile station and the network (e.g. call in
progress indication and preparation and execution of handovers).
• Signaling by preemption over the existing communication.
- Signaling over a dedicated channel.
The transmission resource used to fulfill this radio need is the channel.

Radio Interface
GSM Uses Paired Radio Channels

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission". Case of GSM 900
Uplink Downlink BTS
890 MHz Frequency 915 MHz 935 MHz Frequency 960 MHz
0 channel # 124 0 channel # 124

Example:
Channel 48
Duplex spacing = 45 MHz

Frequency band spectrum = 2 x 25 MHz
Channel spacing = 200 kHz
A pair of channels are used for full duplex communications. Thus GSM uses both the uplink
and the downlink bands of a given spectrum.
In other words, a channel refers to a pair of frequencies used for a cellular radio talk path.
One is used for cell site to mobile transmission while the other is used for mobile to cell site
transmission.
GSM signal requires channels spacing of 200 kHz.

Radio Interface
GSM Band Allocations (MHz)
GSM systems Uplink Downlink Band Duplex Duplex

Spacing channels
GSM 900 890-915 935-960 2x25 45 124

E-GSM (900) 880-915 925-960 2x35 45 174
R-GSM (900) 876-915 921-960 2x39 45 194
GSM 1800 1710-1785 1805-1880 2x75 95 374

GSM 1900 1850-1910 1930-1990 2x60 80 299
Frequencies are in MHz
Carrier frequency = ARFCN = Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
The carrier frequency is designated by the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
(ARFCN).
If we call Fl(n) the frequency value of the carrier ARFCN n in the lower band, and Fu(n) the
corresponding frequency value in the upper band, we have:
P-GSM 900: Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*n (1 ≤=n ≤=124) Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,
E-GSM 900: Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*n (0 ≤=n ≤=124) Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,
Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*(n -1024) (955 ≤=n ≤=1023) Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,
R-GSM 900: Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*n (0 ≤=n ≤=124) Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,
Fl(n) = 890 + 0.2*(n -1024) (955 ≤=n ≤=1023) Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 45,
GSM 1800: Fl(n) = 1710.2 + 0.2*(n-512) (512 ≤=n ≤=885) Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 95,
GSM 1900: Fl(n) = 1850.2 + 0.2*(n-512) (512 ≤=n ≤=885) Fu(n) = Fl(n) + 80.
Frequencies are in MHz.

Radio Interface
GSM Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)

Frame and Physical Channels
Time-slot TDMA frame TDMA frame
TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(frames repeat continuously)
Time
0 4.615 ms 9.23 ms
Physical channel # 2 = recurrence of time-slot # 2
A frame (TDMA), 8 successive Time-Slots (TS), has a duration of 60/13 ms or 4.615385 ms.
A TS, has a duration of 15/26 ms or 0.576923 ms.
A physical channel is made of the recurrence of the same TS taken from successive frames.

Radio Interface
Physical Channel
BTS
time
n+1
TDMAs
7
n TS
0
n-1 MS1
MS2
MS3
0 //
FDMA 1 123 ARFCN

Radio Interface
GSM Delays Uplink TDMA Frames

BTS side The start of the uplink TDMA
is delayed of three time-slots TDMA Frame (4.615 ms)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R R R R R R R R
Downlink TDMA
BTS
T T T T T T T T
Down Up
MSs side link link
MS1 R T
R T
MS2
Fixed transmit
delay of three
time-slots
The start of an uplink TDMA frame is delayed with respect to downlink by a fixed period of
three Time Slots. Why?
Staggering TDMA frames allows the same TS number (TN) to be used in both the down and
uplink while avoiding the requirement for MS to transmit and receive simultaneously.

Radio Interface
Propagation Delays
M2 d2 d1>>d2 M1
BTS Frame reference TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7
Propagation Delay τp
Bits Overlapping
MSs transmit
On the radio path, propagation delays can not be ignored. Indeed, 1 km corresponds to a
propagation delay of 3.33 µs (compare to a bit period of 48/13 = 3.7 µs).
But the BTS receives continuously, and has its own scheduling. The mobile station must itself
balance the propagation delay, in order to avoid overlapping in the frame received by the
BTS.
This is why the system takes into account these timing delays and orders the mobile station to
transmit with an anticipation called the Timing Advance.

Radio Interface
Logical Channels
Traffic and Control Channels
TDMA frame TDMA frame
TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(frames repeat continuously)
Voice transmitted over the physical channel #2

defines a logical traffic channel
Information (e.g. to set up a call) transmitted over

the physical channel #1 defines a logical control channel
The specific type of information carried on a physical channel are known as a logical channel.
Logical channels can be split into two main categories:
• Traffic channels full rate (TCH/ F) and half rate (TCH/ H) which carry user’s data and
speech.
• Signaling channels, also known as control channel.

Radio Interface
From Physical Channel to Logical Channels
Time Slot LOGICAL

TDMA Frame Logical CHANNELS
= 4.615 ms channels
multiplexing
• Traffic
0 12 345 67 01 234 56 701 23 45 67 • Broadcasted signaling
TS = 577 µs • Dedicated signaling

• Associated signaling
different
MESSAGE TYPE message
types
Physical Channel =
different
logical
channels
A Physical Channel (a TS, defined by a fixed position (0-7) on a given TDMA frame) is used
to broadcast messages containing different kinds of information:
• traffic messages for speech and data,
• signaling messages for different procedures and supplementary services,
• synchronization messages for synchronization between the mobile station and the BTS,
• measurements messages for uplink report of the downlink measurements,
• control messages to manage the access to the network.
All these kinds of messages are classified and separated in Logical Channels.
Depending on the quantity of information to transmit and on their consistency, several logical
channels may be grouped into one physical channel, in order to occupy its successive TS as
much as possible (optimization of the resources number by maximizing the occupancy time of
each).

Radio Interface
Traffic Channels (TCHs)
BSS
sp
BSC ee
ch
MSC BTS
or
TC da
H ta
sp TC
ee H
ch
o rd
ata
Full rate TCH carries:

• speech (13 kbps)
• user’s data (300 bps up to14.4 kbps)
Half rate TCH carries:
• user’s data (300 bps up to 4.8 kbps)
Traffic Channels (TCH) are intended to carry either encoded speech or user data both in the
up and downlink directions in a point to point communication.
There are two type of Traffic Channels (TCHs) that are differentiated by their traffic rates as
follows:
• A full rate TCH that carries information (speech and data) at a gross rate of 22.8
kbps. The raw data rate for each TCH is 13 kbps for speech.
• A half rate TCH (TCH / H) carries information (encoded speech or data) at half of the full
rate channel with a gross rate of 11.4 kbps.
The allowed combining of user data rate with full and half rate are as follows:
• Full rate speech (TCH /F).
• Half rate speech (TCH /H), not available at the present time.
• 14.4 kbps full rate data (TCH / F14.4).
• 4.8 kbps half rate data (TCH / H4.8).
• 2.4 kbps half rate data (TCH / H2.4).

Radio Interface
Control Channels
GSM Channels
Traffic Channels Control Channels

(TCHs)
Broadcast Common Control Dedicated Control

Channels Channels Channels
(BCHs) (CCCHs) (DCCHs)
(down uplink)
Full Half
Downlink Downlink Uplink
rate rate
Fast Slow
TCH /F TCH /H FCCH SCH BCCH PCH AGCH CBCH RACH SDCCH FACCH SACCH
Traffic Multiframing Signaling Multiframing Traffic Multiframing
Control channels are intended to carry signaling or synchronization data. Three are defined: Broadcast Channels
(BCHs), Common Control Channels (CCCHs), Dedicated Control Channels (DCCHs).
Broadcast channels are point to multipoint unidirectional (downlink) control channels from the the fixed
subsystem to the mobile telephone.
• First, BCHs include a Frequency Control Channel (FCCH) that allows an MS to accurately tune to a Base
Transceiver Station (BTS).
• Then BCHs contain the Synchronization Channel (SCH), which provide TDMA frame oriented
synchronization data to a MS.
• Last, BCHs include the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) intended to broadcast a variety of information
to MSs, including cues necessary for the MS to register in the network.
Common Control Channels (CCCHs) are point to multipoint channels that is primarily intended to carry
signaling information for access handling functions. The CCCHs include:
Paging Channel (PCH), which is down channel used to page (call terminating) MSs.
• Access Grant Channel (AGCH) that is a downlink channel used to assign a MS to a specific Dedicated
Control Channel (DCCH).
• Cell Broadcast Channel (CBCH), which is down channel used to broadcast miscellaneous short
messages to the MSs.
• Random Access Control Channel (RACH) is an uplink channel which allows MS to initiate a call.
Dedicated Control Channels are point to point, bi-directional control channel. Two types of DCCHs are used:
• Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channels (SDCCH) whose allocation is not linked to the assignment of a
traffic channel (TCH). It bears information about authentication, location updates, and assignment to traffic
channels (TCHs).
• Otherwise, Associated Control Channels are linked to the allocation of a traffic channel (TCH). The Fast
Associated Control Channel (FACCH) or burst stealing is a control channel obtained by preemptive
dynamic multiplexing on a TCH. The Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH), also know as a
continue data stream, is allocated together with a TCH or a SDCCH.

Radio Interface
The Logical Channels on Radio Interface

TS 01234567
BTS MS
FCCH TCH
Frequency correction Traffic (speech-data)
SCH FACCH
Synchronization Associated Signaling
BCCH
Broadcast control
Radio Measurement + SMS
RACH SACCH
Access request SDCCH
Dedicated Signaling
PCH
Subscriber paging CBCH
Broadcast info
AGCH
Answer to Access request
FCCH
CBCH
Broadcast info SCH
M.S. Pre-synchronization
SDCCH
Dedicated Signaling BCCH
SACCH
Sys InFo 5, 6 + SMS RACH
Access request
PCH
Traffic (speech data) Subscriber paging
TCH
AGCH
Associated Signaling Answer to Access request
FACCH
Three groups of logical channels:

1. Traffic channels (TCH), and associated channels (FACCH, SACCH):
Number computed from Erlang B law, starting from offered traffic, according to the
traffic model.
2. Dedicated signaling channels (SDCCH, SACCH, CBCH):
Number computed from Erlang B law, using figures given by the traffic model.
The CBCH is optionally used; when activated, it uses permanently one SDCCH
resource.
3. Common channels (CCCH), BCCH and synchronization channels (FCCH, SCH)
Theoretical studies on message exchanges on radio interface have shown that one
common channel is sufficient, whatever the offered traffic on CELL.
“BCCH combined”: common channel pattern for small capacity cells (O1):
- Signaling channels SDCCH/SACCH are included in same frame as common
channels:
AGCH : Access Grant CHannel PCH : Paging CHannel
BCCH : Broadcast Control CHannel RACH : Random Access CHannel
CBCH : Common Broadcast CHannel SACCH : Slow Associated Control CHannel
CCCH : Common Control CHannel SCH : Signaling CHannel
FACCH : Fast Associated Control CHannel SDCCH : Stand-alone Dedicated Control
CHannel
FCCH : Frequency Control CHannel TCH : Traffic CHannel

Radio Interface
Logical Channel Description (1/2)
SDCCH MESSAGES TCH MESSAGES

• Request for a SDCCH assignment • Full rate speech at 13 kbit/s
• Request for the end of channel • Half rate speech at 6.5 kbit/s
assignment
• Full rate data at 9.6, 4.8, or 2.4 kbit/s
• Order of commutation from SDCCH to
TCH • Half rate data at 4.8 or 2.4 kbit/s

• Handover Access message (uplink)
FACCH MESSAGES
SACCH MESSAGES
• Connection establishment from
SDCCH to TCH • System Information 5, 5bis, 5ter and 6
(connected mode)
• End validation of a SDCCH-TCH
commutation • Measures:
- power level of the communication
• Characteristics of the future used BS - quality level of the communication
after handover - level on the beacon frequency of
• Connection establishment to BS after the neighboring cells
handover • Timing Advance
• Validation of an handover • Power Control

Radio Interface
Logical Channel Description (2/2)
FCCH MESSAGES AGCH MESSAGES
• no message is sent (all bits 0) • For dedicated channel assignment:

- frequency number
- slot number
SCH MESSAGES - frequency hopping description
- Timing Advance (1st estimation)
• Frame Number - MS identification

• Base Station Identity Code (BSIC)
RACH MESSAGES
BCCH MESSAGES • Service request:
- emergency call
• System Information type 1, 2, 2bis, - answer to an incoming call
2ter, 3, 4, 7, 8 - outgoing call
(idle mode) - short message
- call re-establishment
- inscription
CBCH MESSAGES
PCH MESSAGES
• Specific information
• messages containing a mobile
For example:
- weather identity for a call, a short message
- road information or an authentication

Radio Interface
Traffic and Control Multi-Framing
Traffic channel Control channel

Frame
4.615 ms
TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
26 traffic frames = 120 ms 51 control frame = 235.38 ms
0 1 2 3 4 21 22 23 24 25 0 1 2 3 4 46 47 48 49 50
1326 0 1 2 3 4 51 x 26 traffic frames = 6.12 s 46 47 48 49 50

frames
0 1 2 3 26 x 51 control frames = 6.12 s 22 23 24 25
0 1 2 3 4 5 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047
1 Hyperframe = 2,715,648 frames= 3h 28 min. 53 s 760 ms

Introducing to Multi Framing

Higher order frames, called traffic multiframes, consist of 26 TDMA frames and have a duration of
120 ms (26 x 4.615 ms). This 26 DTMA multiframe carries Traffic Channels (TCHs), Slow Associated
Control Channel (SACCH), and Fast Associated Control Channel (FACCH).
Similarly, a 51-frame multiframe, called a control multiframe, has a duration of 235.365 ms (51 x
4.615 ms) and supports Common Control Channels (CCCHs), Broadcast Channels (BCHs) and Stand
Alone Control Channels (SDCCHs).
One Superframe consists of 51 traffic multiframes or 26 control multiframes, in other words contains
51 x 26 TDMA frames with a total duration of 6.12 seconds (51 x 120 ms).
The highest order frame is called a hyperframe and consists of 2,048 superframes, or 2,715,648
frames (2048 x 51 x 21). The time duration of the hyperframe is 3 hrs, 28 min., and 52.76 sec
(2,715,648 x 4.615 ms). This long period of hyperframe is called the GSM time.
Thus to organize the information transmitted on each carrier, GSM defines several time intervals
ranging from 0.9 µs (exactly the time duration of a quarter of one bit) to a hyperframe interval of more
than three hours (GSM time).
As we have just seen, the cycle of a multiframe and superframe is different for speech and control
channels.
This arrangement enables a receiver to decode all the control channels along with the traffic channel
(TCHs) because of the timing of the traffic multiframe always moving in relation to the control channel
multi frame. Otherwise, if two multiframes were exact multiples of each other, the control channel time
slot would be permanently masked by the TCH time slot activities.

Radio Interface
Traffic Channels Combination

Logical Channel Mapping (1/5)
Full Rate - Downlink & Uplink

26 frames = 120 ms
T T T T T T T T T T T T A T T T T T T T T T T T T time
Half Rate - Downlink & Uplink

26 frames = 120 ms
T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 A 0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 T1 T0 A 1 time
T : TCH Ti : TCH A : SACCH Ai :sub-channel

SACCH
n° i
: IDLE
sub-channel n° i
Full rate speech transmission

When a Mobile Station is in communication mode, speech is coded every 20 ms in blocks.
These blocks are coded in 8 half-bursts, whose information quantity is equivalent to 4 entire
bursts.
Then, one burst has to be delivered every 5 ms. But in reality a burst is transmitted every
4.615 ms.
So, in 26 frames lasting 120 ms, 24 bursts are used for speech transmission. One free burst
is used for SACCH. The other one is an idle burst. During this burst, the mobile is not idle, but
it uses this time to monitor the neighboring cells frequencies.
Half rate speech transmission (not often used because of lower quality)
When the half rate speech transmission is in use, the 26 frames of a given time slot can be
separated between two users, since only 12 coded speech bursts are used per user.
So, in 26 frames lasting 120 ms, the odd burst numbers are restricted to one user, and the
other numbers are for the other one. SACCH bursts are in the 13th and 26th positions. In this
case, the monitoring is more frequent.
Full rate speech: 13 kbit/s Half rate speech: 5.6 kbit/s

Radio Interface
Dedicated Signaling Channels Combination

Downlink
51 frames = 235 ms
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 A0 A1 A2 A3
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 A4 A5 A6 A7
time
Uplink
51 frames = 235 ms
A5 A6 A7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 A0
A1 A2 A3 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 A4
time
A : SACCH D : SDCCH : IDLE
The dedicated channels are combined into two multiframes of 51 frames. In the uplink and the
downlink directions, the configuration is almost the same one, only shifted by 15 frames.
The dedicated channels combination broadcasts a group of 8 SDCCH frames (2 groups of 4
consecutive SDCCH frames), each of them is associated to 4 consecutive SACCH frames.
Each different group is used by a different dedicated communication. The multiframe
configuration is shown on the above figure.
So 8 users can use the same physical channel simultaneously, and the different
communications associated to their SACCH signaling are spread on a cycle of 102 frames (2
51-multiframes). In such a multiplexing cycle, 6 frames are unused (idle TS).

Radio Interface
Physical Channel and Logical Channels

Common Channels Combination
Multiframe m
Multiframe Multiframe
m-1 51 frames = 235.38 ms m+1
C FS B C FS C C FS C C FS C C FS C C FS B
Frames repeat continuously time
PCH/AGCH
BTS Physical Channel MS
SCH BCCH
ARFCN (n) TS (s)
FCCH
Logical Channels F : FCCH S : SCH B : BCCH C : PCH/AGCH : IDLE

Radio Interface
Common Channels Combination

Downlink
51 frames = 235 ms
FS B C FS C C FS C C FS C C FS C C
time
Uplink
51 frames = 235 ms
RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
time
: AGCH
F : FCCH S : SCH B : BCCH C /PCH R : RACH : IDLE
Downlink way
The downlink direction is used to combine FCCH, SCH, BCCH, PCH and AGCH:
• FCCH and SCH are always transmitted consecutively (SCH always follows FCCH). Over
51 frames, the pairs are located at the 0-1, 10-11, 20-21, 30-31 and 40-41 positions.
• BCCH uses 4 frames per multiframe (Frame Number 2 to 5) and sometimes 4 other
frames (6 to 9) for BCCH ext (see p. 2-22).
• PCH and AGCH form the CCCH blocks (9 groups of 4 frames). They can have different
configurations, depending on the cell capacity and are dynamically defined in SI Type 3
(management of these channels).
• The 51th frame is unused.
Uplink way
The uplink direction is reserved for RACH. The configuration is simple: all the 51 frames
broadcast RACH messages. So all the mobile station can request a dedicated resource to
access the network on each TS 0 of a specific TDMA frame in the cell.

Radio Interface
BCCH Combined
Downlink
51 frames = 235 ms
FS B C FS C C FS D0 D1 FS D2 D3 FS A0 A1
FS B C FS C C FS D0 D1 FS D2 D3 FS A2 A3
time
Uplink
51 frames = 235 ms
D3 RR A2 A3 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR D0 D1 RR D2
D3 RR A0 A1 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR D0 D1 RR D2
time
: AGCH
F : FCCH S : SCH B : BCCH C /PCH R : RACH A : SACCH D : SDCCH : IDLE
In the case of a low capacity cell, it is possible to combine on the same physical channel
some dedicated channels with some common control channels.
Their configuration is done on 2x51 frames and is indicated in the SI type 3.
This combination contains all the channels of dedicated and common combinations: FCCH,
SCH, BCCH, PCH, AGCH, SDCCH, SACCH and RACH.
Downlink way
From a common control combination, FCCH, SCH and BCCH keep their configuration
(FCCH+SCH: 0, 10, 20, 30 and 40; BCCH: 2 to 5) for both multiframes.
PCH and AGCH are still dynamically configured but only on the bursts: 6-9 (except when
extended BCCH are used), 12-15 and 16-19, for both multiframes.
On the bursts left, 4 blocks of 4 SDCCH TSs, each of them associated with a SACCH block of
4 TSs, and one idle TS at the end of each multiframe. Each different group is used by a
different sub-channel.
Uplink way
On 102 frames, 27 RACH frames are kept and the other ones are replaced by 4 blocks of 4
SDCCH TSs, each of them associated with a block of 4 SACCH TSs.

Radio Interface
Why 26 and 51 Frames per Multiframe?

0 1 10 20 30 40 50 0 1
FS B C FS C C FS C C FS C C FS C C FS
TTTTTTTTTTTTATTTTTTTTTTTT TTTTT TTTTTTTATTTTTTTTTTTT

01 12 25 0 1 12 25
Downlink message
Uplink message
Mobile activity Rx Tx Rx Rx Tx Rx Rx Tx
(n) (n)
Neighboring BTS
(downlink)
Measurement Window
During a communication, the Mobile Station has to listen to the beacon frequency of the
neighboring cells (which list is provided to the MS through SACCH) in order to get pre-
synchronized with the neighboring sites.
This pre-synchronization is useful for an eventual handover, so that the mobile station can
access the assigned channel.
The MS can decode beacon frequency information only during the idle window of the TCH
multiframe. Indeed, during data exchanges, the mobile has not enough time to decode
information between receipt, broadcast (3 TSs later), and new receipt (5 TSs later), since it
has to change the frequency and to process some data.
However, between transmission and reception (4 TSs), the MS is able to perform level
measurement on a neighboring cell.
But the MS must find time to decode the synchronization information broadcasted on SCH of
the neighboring cells and read and decode BCCH information for new cells. For this, the MS
uses the idle TS (TS 26 on the traffic multiframe) that provides a larger observation window
and processing time.
Since 26 and 51 have no common divider and 26*2=51+1, the idle slot of the TCH multiframe
shifts forward a frame in the 51-multiframe: 0, 26, 1, 27, 2,...
We are sure that the MS has been able to pre-synchronize with a neighboring site
(FCCH+SCH decoding) after at most 11 successive decoding at the idle TS level.

Radio Interface
From Speech to Radio Transmission

Speech
Speech
Digitizing and Source

Step 1 source coding decoding
Channel Channel
Step 2
coding decoding
Interleaving De-interleaving
Step 3
Burst deformatting
Burst formatting
Deciphering
Step 4 Ciphering
Demodulation
Modulation equalization
Step 5
Diversity
Step 6 Transmission
From speech to radio signal, several operations are performed. The reverse transformations
are performed on the receiver side.
Main operations are the following:
• Digitizing: Speech blocks are first digitized to obtain digital blocks: 20 ms speech = 260 bits.
• Source coding uses low bit rate code for air interface.
• Channel coding uses codes enabling detection and correction of signals errors. The result is a flow of code
words (456 bits long).
• Interleaving and burst formatting spread the bits of several code words to expand data of the same block
in different bursts. The results is a succession of blocks, one block for each channel burst.
• Ciphering modifies the contents of these block through a "secret recipe" known only by the mobile
telephone and the Base Transceiver Station, thus protecting data from eavesdropping.
• Modulation transforms the binary signal into an analog signal at the right frequency and moment using
Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK).
• Transmission amplifies and radiates the resulting signal as radio waves via an antenna.
• Diversity are different techniques used to provide the reception quality.
• Demodulation: From the radio waves captured by the antenna, the portion of the received signal which is
of interest to the receiver is demodulated.
• Deciphering reverses the encryption "secret recipe".
• Burst de-formatting and de-interleaving puts the bits of the different burst back in order to rebuild the code
words.
• Channel Decoding reconstructs the source information from the output of the demodulator using added
redundancy to detect or correct possible errors.
• Speech decoding operates as suitable filters receiving the voice parameters, then performs them out
analog speech.

Radio Interface
Speech Quality - Source Coding
Codec Type Mean Opinion Score Rate (kb/s)

(MOS)
PCM A law 4.25 64

GSM EFR 4.2 12.2
CDMA 13 4.2 13
D-AMPS 4 8
GSM FR 3.8 13
CDMA 8 3.4 8
Quality MOS Listening Effort Required
Excellent 5 Complete relaxation possible, no effort.

Good 4 Attention necessary, no appreciable effort.
Fair 3 Moderate effort.
Poor 2 Considerable effort.
Bad 1 No meaning understood with feasible effort.
Since each telecommunication system has its own intrinsic characteristics and limitations,
specific voice CODECs have been designed for each system with the objective of achieving
the best trade-off between voice quality, robustness to errors and network capacity. As a
result, the voice quality differ from one system to another.
The advent of new speech compression codecs for wireless systems has provoked intense
interest in comparisons of subjective voice quality over these codecs. Estimates of
subjective quality are typically given as Mean Opinion Scores (MOS) obtained from listening
tests.
Voice quality is a subjective parameter. By asking a group of normal telephone listeners to
rate the quality of telephone speech samples, we can obtain an estimate of the quality that
would be achieved on various types of connections.
In particular, we use subjective listening tests to characterize the voice quality of speech
compression codecs used in wireless and other systems where bandwidth efficiency is at a
premium, because there are no objective measures that can estimate voice quality effectively.

Radio Interface
Channel Processing
Overview
20 ms Speech blocks 20 ms 20 ms
A B C
260 bits 260 bits 260 bits

Source coding
Channel coding
A 456 bits B 456 bits C 456 bits
A A A A B B B B B B B B 8 Sub blocks C C C C
5 6 7 8 Interleaving 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
of 57 bits
A5 A6 A7 A8 B5 B6 B7 B8
8 Bursts B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 C2 C3 C4
Normal 3 57 bits 1 26 bits 1 57 bits 3

burst
Tail Information CRL Training CRL Information Tail
After having transformed speech blocks (20 ms) into digital blocks, channel coding adds
redundancy.
The purpose of channel coding is to improve poor transmission quality due to disturbances
such as noise, interference, or multipath propagation (resulting from the reflections of the
transmitted signal from buildings, etc.).
Channel coding consist in adding, some redundant information, to the source data calculated
from this source information:
• Convolutional codes and block codes: for correction purposes.
• Fire code: detection and correction of “bursty” errors.
• Parity code: error detection.
Each channel has its own coding and interleaving scheme.
A common structure of 456 coded bit is interleaved and mapped onto bursts.
The blocks are interleaved and spread into segments which are combined with flags and a
training sequence to build up the burst.
Ciphering is applied to these burst and the resulting data is used to modulate the carriers.

Radio Interface
Interleaving: TCH Full Rate

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ... ... 452 453 454 455 456
coded bits
Divide 456 bits in 8 sub-blocks
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
57 Rows
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 reordering
•• •• •• •• •• •• •• •• &
• • • • • • • • partitioning
448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 out
4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3
diagonal
interleaving
bit
interleaving
burst
b0 b1 b56 b0 b1 b56
After channel coding, speech coded information (TCH Full rate) are classified into 456 bits
blocks. See how they are spread into bursts.
These 456 bits are reordered into a 8 x 57 array, line by line. The initially close bits are
separated. The array is split into 8 columns of 57 bits. In this way, each 57 bits block contains
bits which were all distant each other.
Each 57 bits block shall be grouped with another one in order to create a burst which contains
114 information bits. Each of the 4 first blocks is grouped with each of the 4 last blocks of the
previous segment. In the same way, each of the 4 last blocks is grouped with each of the 4
first blocks of the next segment.
In a burst, containing 2 57 bits blocks, it is possible to increase bit spreading. The first block
uses the even positions and the second one uses the odd positions inside the burst. The
proximity of initially successive bits are now destroyed.
Each speech block of 456 bits (20 ms) is so spread over 8 bursts.

Radio Interface
Burst Formatting
Normal Burst
1 frame:
4.615 ms
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Training Guard
DATA S S DATA
sequence Band
3 57 1 26 1 57 3 8.25
Burst
148 bits
Guard
156.25 bits
0.577 ms
A basic unit of measure in transmission on a radio path is a burst, a series of 114 modulated
bits of information. Bursts have a finite duration and occupy a finite part of the radio spectrum.
Bursts are sent in time and frequency windows called slots.
The normal burst shown in this slide is made of:
• Tail bits: three "0" bits at the beginning and end to help avoid loss of synchronization.
• Information: speech, data, and signaling.
• A training sequence: a list of bits known by the receiver allowing it to demodulate the burst.
• Stealing flags (S): indicate if information is either user's data (includes speech) or signaling data
for call in state.
• A guard band: bits where nothing is transmitted to allow for overlap due to the variable distance
from the mobile telephone to the Base Transceiver Station. This is necessary if the timing
advance is not exactly right.
• Normal Burst bears traffic channels, its associated channel (slow and fast), Stand Alone, and the
broadcast Control Channels (BCCHs).
Other burst are defined with regard to their time-amplitude profile:
• Access burst: used in the uplink direction during initial phase of transmission when propagation
delay (timing advance) between the mobile telephone is not yet known. The training sequence
and tail are longer than those of a normal burst to increase the probability of demodulation
success.
• Frequency correction burst: to enable the mobile telephone to find and demodulate a
synchronization burst to the same cell.
• Synchronization burst: time synchronization of the mobile station, the first burst a mobile
telephone needs to be able to demodulate.
• Dummy burst: dummy sequence to replace data if there is nothing to transmit, for example,
Broadcast Control Channel filling.

Radio Interface
Burst Formats
Frequency Correction Burst

(FCCH) Guard
Tail Data Tail Period
3 bits 142 fixed bits (0) 3 bits 8.25 bits
156.25 bits (0.577 ms)
Synchronization Burst
(SCH) Guard
Tail Data Extended Training Sequence Data Tail Period
3 bits 39 encrypted bits 64 synchronization bits 39 bits 3 bits 8.25 bits
156.25 bits (0.577 ms)
Frequency correction burst

A frequency correction burst contains 142 fixed bits for the frequency correction and 3 tail bits
at the beginning and the end. The guard period corresponds to a transmission time of 8.25
bits.
It is used on FCCH in order to enable the mobile to find and demodulate a synchronization
burst in the same cell. Its structure is simple, since its bits are all equal to 0 (no information is
transmitted). When this burst is modulated, the result is a pure sine wave at the carrier
frequency plus 1625/24 Hz due to the modulation. This frequency is in fact the information
carried by this burst. It provides the frequency needed to understand the following bursts of
the same physical channel.
Synchronization burst
A synchronization burst contains 64 bits for the training sequence, twice 39 for the
information, 3 tail bits at the beginning and the end. The guard period corresponds to a
transmission time of 8.25 bits.
It is used on SCH, in the downlink direction, for time synchronization of the mobile station. It is
the first burst a mobile needs to be able to demodulate. It is the reason why its training
sequence is longer than the one of other bursts.

Radio Interface
Burst Formats
Normal Burst
Tail Data Training Sequence Data Tail Guard
Period
3 bits 57 encrypted bits 1 26 bits 1 57 encrypted bits 3 bits 8.25 bits
156.25 bits (0.577 ms)
Dummy Burst
Guard
Tail Dummy Sequence Training Sequence Dummy Sequence Tail Period
3 bits 58 mixed bits 28 midamble bits 58 mixed bits 3 bits 8.25 bits
156.25 bits (0.577 ms)
Access Burst
Training
Tail Sequence Data Tail Guard Period
8 bits 41 synch bits 36 encrypted bits 3 bits 68.25 bits
156.25 bits (0.577 ms)

Normal burst
A normal burst contains 26 bits for the training sequence, plus 2 times 58 bits for information.
More precisely, there are twice 57 information bits and two stealing flags, which indicate if
information is traffic or signaling. There are also out three tail bits, and 8.25 bits for the guard
period.
Dummy burst
The dummy burst structure is the same as for the normal burst. But information bits are
replaced by mixed bits: this burst is used to replace data if there is nothing to transmit. It is
the case for BCCH and TCH filling when they are transmitted on the beacon frequency.
Access burst
An access burst contains 41 bits for the training sequence, 36 bits for the information, 8 and 3
tail bits at respectively the beginning and the end of the burst. The guard period is of 68.25
bits.
It is used on RACH, in the uplink direction, during initial phase of transmission when the
propagation delay between the mobile station and the BTS is not yet known. The training tail
sequences are longer than those of a normal burst to increase the probability of demodulation
success.

Radio Interface
Ciphering
Burst to be
Data S S Data
transmitted
Plain data: 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0.....

Ciphering sequence: 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0.....

XOR:
Ciphered data (transmitted): 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0.....
Ciphered sequence: 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0.....
XOR:
Recovered data: 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0.....
Received Data S
Training
S Data
burst sequence
Ciphering, or encryption, is a procedure that provides additional security for the subscriber.
Ciphering is not a channel coding. It is performed after the encoding and interleaving of
different channel and is done independently of whether the channel is a signaling channel or a
traffic channel. Ciphering is only done on the two data segments.
Thus ciphering is achieved by performing an exclusive OR (XOR) operation between a
pseudo-random bit sequence (which was computed through A5 algorithm by the ciphering key
allowed to user for a call and the burst number) and the 114 useful bits of a normal burst.
Deciphering, in turn, applies exactly the same operation, since XOR twice with the same data
leads back to the original value.
Last, it is worth noting that the whole specification of the encryption algorithm (A5) is
distributed under conditions by the Association of European Operators which have signed the
GSM Memorandum of Understanding (MoU). GSM uses two A5 types of algorithm:
• Encryption algorithm A5-1 which contains European and United States technical software
that could not directly or indirectly exported to any either embargoed or restricted country.
• Encryption algorithm A5-2 which contains software that do not require license or
approval.

Radio Interface
Modulation
GMSK Modulation
Bit 0 phase shift + 90 °

Bit 1 phase shift - 90 °
Ωt + ϕ)
I = sin (Ω Q
'1' - 90 ° + 90 ° '0'
GMSK GMSK
Modulator Signal
Ωt + ϕ)
Q = cos (Ω
I
Carrier
Frequency
GSM modulation GMSK (Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying) is a “constant envelope”

modulation scheme.
This choice has been mainly made to avoid specific need of linear amplifier.
GMSK relies on MSK scheme using Gaussian low pass filtering.
MSK
MSK is a continuous phase shift. It allows the RF vector to rotate during one bit period on a
circle (constant amplitude) from one phase state to the other:
• phase shift = + 90 ° when bit b = 0,
• phase shift = - 90 ° when bit b = 1,
As a result, the phase shift of +90 ° or -90 ° during one bit period by MSK is equivalent to a
frequency shift so MSK also can be seen as FSK (Frequency Shift Keying).
MSK has steady phase transitions however with a dip at any bit change caused by rapid
change of the frequency (+/- Df). This leads to a very broad RF spectrum.
Gaussian filter
The data signal is base band filtered by a Gaussian filter to obtain GMSK modulation.
The phase transition does not have dips any more and the bandwidth of the spectrum has
considerably decreased.

Radio Interface
Discontinuous Transmission Features
speech
Hearpiece From receiver
decoder
Digital to
Analog
Converter Comfort
noise
function
Microphone speech
To transmitter
encoder
Analog to
Digital
Converter Voice Activity
Detection
Pauses in normal speech occur at a rate that makes speech appear to have about 50 per
cent activity. This means that a telephony channel is only used for speech transmission about
half the time a speaker is using the phone.
Since transmit time is further reduced when Discontinuous transmission (DTX) is used, the
power consumption of hand-held terminals is reduced, which gives users the option of fitting
their terminal with smaller batteries. Furthermore these functions tend to reduce interference
in adjacent cells and to mobile station close to the base transmitters when suspending radio
transmission when the coder detects a speech pause.
The GSM speech coder features this with:
• Voice Activity Detection (VAD) that determines the presence or absence of speech at the
microphone. Note this function has to work well even when there is high level of
background noise, such as in a car.
• Confort Noise function: The total absence of sound in the ear piece would annoy the user
at the receiving end of a radio channel and the handset appears to be dead. Thus the
users tend to speak too loudly when there is total silence in the ear piece. There needs to
be a minimum of conventional background noise present during pause. This is
accomplished by transmitting silent descriptor (SID) frames at a rather slow rate of once
every 480 ms. Then upon receiving this SID frame, the receiving speech decoder has to
fake an existing wireline connection by generating some background noise.

Radio Interface
Check Your Learning
1- Why does GSM use paired radio channels?

2- How many time-slots does a GSM TDMA contain?
3- What is a GSM physical channel?
4- Why does GSM delay the uplink TDMA frame?
1- Why does GSM use paired radio channels?
2- How many time-slots does a GSM TDMA contain?
3- What is a GSM physical channel?
4- Why does GSM delay the uplink TDMA frame?

Radio Interface
5- What are the logical channels?

6- What does a traffic channel carry?
7- Why does GSM use the channel coding?
8- Why does GSM use the interleaving?
5- What are the logical channels?
6- What does a traffic channel carry?
7- Why does GSM use the channel coding?
8- Why does GSM use the interleaving?

Radio Interface
Student Notes:

Architecture, Functions and Protocols
Section 7
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Architecture, Functions and Protocols 7-1

Objectives

• List the 3 sub-systems of a GSM system and their interfaces;

• List the different equipment in each GSM sub-system;
• Indicate functions for each equipment;
• List the interfaces in each sub-system, indicate if it is standard or not
and identify the main protocol used on it.

Basic Elements of a Cellular System
Exchange
To another service area
To another PSTN exchange
service area
PSTN Switch
To another
To another PSTN exchange
service area
Today's wireless communications systems are based on a composite wireless and wired
system as shown in this slide where the wireless segment of the communication system is
shown as a cluster of seven hexagonal cells.
Each cell is essentially a radio communication center where a mobile subscriber establishes
a call with a land telephone through the switch and the Public Switching Telephone Network
(PSTN).
This composite platform enables us to communicate with anyone at any time, from
anywhere within the service area.
Switch and PSTN are essentially multiple points serving as system intelligence.

Architecture of a GSM System
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)

ISDN, PSDN
Signaling System No.7 SS7

Network and MSC

GMSC HLR-AUC
Switching VLR VLR
Sub-system EIR
A-interface
BSS
Base
OMN interface (X.25)
Station TRAU
Sub-system
BSC
Operation
Cell 3 Abis Interface
Um (radio) Sub-
interface Cell 1
BTS System OMC-R OMC-S
Cell 2
BTS
MS
A GSM system is basically designed as a combination of three major sub-systems: the

Network and Switching Sub-system (NSS), the radio sub-system called the Base Station
Sub-system (BSS), and the Operation Sub-System (OSS).
The Network and Switching Sub-system includes the equipment and functions related to
end-to-end-calls, management of subscribers, mobility, and interfaces with the fixed network
(PSTN).
In particular, the NSS consist of Mobile Switching Centers (MSC), Visitor Location Registers
(VLR), Home Location Registers (HLR), Authentication Center (AUC), and Equipment
Identity Register (EIR).
The Base Station Sub-system includes the equipment and functions related to the
management of the connection on the radio path.
It mainly consists of one Base Station Controller (BSC), and several Base Transceiver
Stations (BTSs), linked by the Abis interface.
An optional equipment, the Transcoder / Rate Adapter Unit (TRAU) so called TransCoder
Unit (TCU) within Nortel BSS products, is designed to reduce the amount of PCM links.
The Operation Sub-System is connected to all equipment in the switching system and to
the BSC. OSS mainly contains Operation and Maintenance Center for NSS (OMC-S) and
Operation and Maintenance Center devoted to the Radio subsystem (OMC-R).
In order to ensure that network operators will have several sources of cellular infrastructure
equipment, GSM decided to specify:
• the radio interface (or air interface or Um interface), between the BTS and the MS,
• the A interface, between the NSS and the BSS.

BSS Architecture
MSC
Radio
TCU Interface
A Interface
S2000H&L
NSS
BTS
Ater Interface

OMC-R BSC Outdoor
BTS
Radio
Interface
OMN Interface
Sun
S8000
StorEdge A5000
Indoor
BSS BTS
MS
The Base Station Sub-system (BSS) is a set of equipment (aerials, transceivers and a
controller) that is viewed by the Mobile Switching Center through a single A interface as
being the entity responsible for communicating with mobile telephones (MSs) in a certain
area.
The radio equipment of a BSS may be composed of one or more cells, such a BSS may
contain one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs).
The interface between the BSC and the BTSs is called an Abis interface.
The BSS includes two types of equipment:

• the Base Transceiver Station (BTS functionally includes also the TRAU) in contact with
the Mobile Stations through the radio interface,
• the BSC, the latter being in contact with the Mobile Switching Center.
A BSS contains only one Base Station Controller (BSC).

BTS General Architecture and Functions

BTS
- Interface between Antennas Antenna

Transmission coupler
and TRXs of each cell
Duplexer
COUPLING SYSTEM
- Encodes, encrypts, modulates, Reception coupler

feeds the RF signal to the antenna
- Decrypts and equalizes the signal
then demodulates TRX
- Mobile call detection (Transceiver-Receiver)
- Uplink channel measurements
- Timing advance
- Frequency hopping BCF
(Base Common Functions)
Abis
interface
BSC - Multiplexes speech and user's data channels to BSC.

- Multiplexes signaling channels to BSC.
As stated, the primary responsibility of the BTS is to transmit and receive radio signals from
a mobile unit over the air interface Um.
To perform this function completely, the signals are encoded, encrypted, multiplexed,
modulated, and then fed to the antenna system at the cell site.
In order to keep the mobile synchronized, BTS transmits frequency and time
synchronization signal over a devoted channel called a Frequency Correction Channel.
Functions performed by a BTS are:
• encodes, encrypts, multiplexes, modulates and feeds the RF signals to the antenna,
• time and frequency synchronization signals transmitted from BTS,
• voice communication through a full rate or half rate (enable) speech channel,
• the received signal from the MS is equalized, decoded, and decrypted before
demodulation,
• timing advance computation,
• uplink radio channel measurements,
• mobile random access detection,
• Frequency Hopping management.

BSC General Architecture and Functions
- Radio Resource management BSC

for its BTSs
- Intercell hand-over Processing X.25
Unit controller
O&M
- Allocation of channels for
communication
- Reallocation of frequencies Switching

among BTSs matrix
- Time and frequency
synchronization to BTSs
- Controls frequency hopping
PCM PCM
controller controller
To Network
BTS A interface SubSystem
Abis interface
BSC architecture mainly involves a processor unit, a switching matrix, and trunk control
units (PCM and X.25).
Note that through the Processing Unit and the X.25 controller, the BSC downloads new
software releases from the O&M Center. In turn, all data of interest to the O&M is buffered
and forwarded to the O&M Center when being asked or transmitted periodically.
The Base Station Controller (BSC) is connected to the Mobile Switching Center on one side
and to the BTSs on the other.
Functions performed by a BSC are:
• performs the Radio Resource (RR, explained below) management for the cells under its
control. It assign and release frequencies for all MSs in its own area,
• performs the Intercell hand-over for MSs moving between BTSs in its control,
• reallocates frequencies to the BTSs in its area to meet locally heavy demands during
peak hours or on special events,
• controls the power transmission of both BTSs and MSs in its area,
• provides the time and frequency synchronization reference signals, broadcast for each
BTS.

TRAU Architecture and Functions

Converts the 13 kbps GSM speech frame either Routes the users' data stream
into a 64 kbps T1 PCM µ-law or into an E1 PCM A-law to suitable Inter-working function
TRAU
Transcoder
Controller
T1 trunk
up to 92 user's
and T1 trunk = up to
control channels Transcoder
24 user's channels
A
Ater
External PCM
BSC MSC
Interface
interface
interface
E1 trunk
up to 120 user's E1 trunk = up to
channels 31 user's channels
Depending on the relative cost of transmission plan, there is some benefit in having the
Transcoder/ Rate adapter Unit (TRAU) at the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) location.
Moreover, in that case, the TRAU is still considered functionally as a part of the Base
Station SubSystem (BSS).
The TRAU is a device that takes 13 kbps speech (or data) multiplexes and two of them, to
convert into standard 64 kbps data:
• within the BTS, the 13 kbps speech (or data) are brought up to level of 16 kbps by
inserting additional synchronizing data to make up the difference between a 13 kbps
speech or lower data rate,
• the TRAU converts the 13 kbps speech into 64 kbps T1 µ-law or E1 A-law PCM time
slots,
• furthermore the TRAU routes the users' data stream to a suitable device that inter-works
with the recipient modem.
It is worth noting that:

• four traffic channels are multiplexed on a 64 kbps PCM circuit at the Ater interface,
• one T1 trunk carries up to 92 traffic and control channels,
• one E1 trunk carries up to 120 traffic and control channels.

NSS Architecture
Site 1 Site 2
AUC
H
HLR
BSS D D BSS
VLR VLR
G-interface
B-interface B-interface
C-interface
A-interface MSC A-interface
GMSC
Other GSM, Other GSM,

PSTN, ISDN E-interface PSTN, ISDN
F F
E EIR
E
IWF IWF
Billing SMS-SC Billing

Server Server
The distributed architecture of the Network and Switching Sub-system is organized with MSCs,
servers and data bases, linked by interfaces normalized (B to G).
There are two types of MSC to provide switching services to a defined part of the PLMN:
• MSC, used to establish traffic channels and to switch signaling messages between PLMN
entities and other GSM networks or fixed networks,
• Gateway MSC (GMSC), is a specialized MSC managing the central data base HLR, containing
permanent and dynamic subscriber data.
All the information requested by the different functions is stored in four types of data bases
connected to (or included in) the MSCs:
• HLR or Home Location Register: permanent data specific to each subscriber, including service
profile, location and billing options,
• VLR or Visitor Location Register: in order to minimize access to the HLR, MSC uses this data
base, which contains working data for subscribers moving within its coverage area (LAs),
• Network security and access control are provided by the Authentication Center (AUC) and by
the Equipment Identity Register (EIR):
- AUC: to ensure that only authorized users have access to the network,
- EIR: to maintain lists of stolen, faulty and valid equipment identities.
NSS includes also specific equipment such as:
• Inter-Working Functions (IWF): to provide the different bearer services offered by the network,
• Short Message Services-Service Center (SMS-SC): used to store and forward point to point
short messages,
• Billing Server.
These equipment or software elements are running applications more or less operator dependent.

Home Location Register
HLR
Subscriber
Management
Permanent records
Center
- MSISDN
- IMSI
- Subscriber's service provision
Temporary records
- VLR address
- Ciphering items
(Kc, Sres, Rand)
The Home Location Register (HLR) is a database that holds information upon the
subscribers. It performs the following functions:
• Handling of permanent subscribers data:
- Identification: IMSI, MSISDN.
- Subscription information: related services options (Teleservices, Bearer Services
and Supplementary Services).
- Service limitations (e.g. roaming limitation).
• Handling of temporary subscribers data:
- Current VLR address where the subscriber roams.
- Provide VLR with 5 ciphering items.
• Dialogue with the AUC database (see next slide).

Authentication Center
AUC
Ciphering Triplets
Ki RAND 5
HLR Request
Security SRES, Kc, RAND

A3, A8 algorithms
IMSI
AUC provides
The Authentication Center (AUC) is a database that contains the secret authentication key
Ki of each subscriber and generates security related parameters to protect the network
operator and subscribers against fraud.
The same Ki is to be found in the subscribers SIM card and is used to generate these
ciphering items named triplets:
• a RANDom number RAND,
• a Signature RESponse SRES, using A3 algorithm,
• a ciphering Key Kc, using A8 algorithm and computed each time authentication is
performed.
Software keys Kc and SRES are never passed over the air interface.
The two algorithms A3 and A8 are operator dependent.
For security reason AUC has often an internal interface with the HLR. However this is a
choice of implementation, it is up to HLR to start security algorithms located in AUC.

Visitor Location Register
VLR
LA1
Permanent records
- IMSI
- Subscriber’s service provision
LA3
LA2 Temporary records
- Ciphering items
(Kc, Sres, Rand)
- LAI - TMSI
LA4
When a mobile station enters the LA borders, it signals its arrival to the MSC that stores its
identity in the Visitor Location Register (VLR).
The information necessary to manage the MS is contained in the HLR and is transferred to
the VLR so that it can be easily retrieved if so required.
The Location Registration procedure allows the subscriber data to follow the movements of
the MS. For such reason the data contained in the VLR and in the HLR are more or less the
same. Nevertheless, the data are present in the VLR only as long as the MS is registered in
the area related to that VLR.
The VLR supports a mobile paging, and tracking subsystem in the local area where the
mobile is presently roaming.
The detailed functions of VLR are as follows:

• Works with the HLR and AUC on authentication.
• Relays cipher key from HLR to BSS for encryption and decryption.
• Controls allocation of the new TMSI numbers that can be periodically changed to secure
a subscriber's identity.
• Supports paging (incoming calls).
• Tracks the state of all mobile in its area.

Equipment Identity Register
EIR
Black list
(barred ME)
IMEI
White list
(valid ME)
Mobile
Equipment Gray list
(faulty ME)
The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) is a database that performs a screening function
within the network. It keeps track of all valid and invalid Mobile Equipment by storing their
International Mobile Equipment Identities (IMEI). Data for the Equipment Identity Register
are provided by:
• Manufacturers of Mobile Equipment which provide complete lists of IMEI for the Mobile
Stations that they produce.
• Other network operators which provide lists of malfunctioning Mobile Equipment.
• Police organizations which provide lists of stolen Mobile Equipment.
The Equipment Identity Register actually maintains three lists of International Mobile
Equipment Identities:
• The black list contains a list of all Mobile Equipment (ME) that are barred from using the
network (e.g.: stolen).
• The white list contains a list of all the serial numbers of International Mobile Equipment
Identities that have been allocated in the Global System for Mobile Communications
countries.
• The gray list contains a list of faulty Mobile Equipment. This equipment will be logged
but not barred.
The GSM Recommendations state that the service providers should decide how often they
wish to check the validity of the Mobile Equipment with the EIR.

InterWorking Function
Mobile
Switching
Center
BSS PSTN
Modem
MS
Data +
DTE signals
Rate
adaptation
Modem
DTE
signaling
IWF
Land-DTE
DTE
Because of GSM providing a wide range of data services to its subscribers, GSM interfaces
with the various public and private data networks currently available. It is the aim of the
Inter-Working Function (IWF) to provide this interfacing capability. Networks to which IWF
presently provides interface as follows:
• PSTN,
• ISDN,
• Circuit-switched public data networks (CSPDN),
• Packet-switched public data networks (PSPDN).
It provides the subscriber with access to data rate and protocol conversion facilities so that
data can be transmitted between GSM Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and a land line DTE
(the recipient).
Furthermore it allocates a suitable modem from its modem bank when required. This is the
case when a GSM DTE, a Fax machine, exchange data with a land Fax machine which
works over analog modem (V32).
The IWF also provides direct connect interfaces for customer-provided equipment such as
X.25 PADs.
Different protocol conversion may be required for signaling and traffic messages. This
includes data rate adaptation and the addition of signaling bits reformatting.
The IWF is a part of the Mobile Switching Center.

Protocol Model
MS NSS
CM CM I
M
A S
MM P U
MM P
BTS BSC
RR /
O&M O&M BSSAP BSSAP T
R B C T
D B RR D S A U
R S T S P
RR RSM R T S M P
S M A
A A
M A P P
P P
L L L L SCCP SCCP SCCP
A A A A
P P P P
D D D D MTP3 MTP3 MTP3
m m
MTP2 MTP2 MTP2
RADIO RADIO PCM PCM PCM E1/T1 MTP1
Um Abis
A-Interface
Interface Interface
Connection Management (CM) and Mobility Management (MM) messages are transparent
to the BSS, they are delivered at end-to-end users (MS and NSS) by the relaying of
underlaying protocols (LAPDm, LAPD, SS7).
To establish a connection with the MS, CM must require MM, which in turn requires RR to
open the radio connection.
The RR procedures handles set-up, re-establishment, handover, TCH mode modify and
release of calls.
The MM procedures provides registration, location and authentication of MS.
The CM procedures provides:
• Supplementary Services (SS).
• Call Control (CC).
• Short Message Service (SMS).

Radio Interface
Protocols Involved
Level 3
Connection
ConnectionManagement
Management
Mobility
MobilityManagement
Management
Radio
RadioResource
ResourceManagement
Management
Level 2 = LAPDm
Logical Channels
Multiplexing
PCH
RACH BCCH AGCH SDCCH FACCH SACCH
Level 1
TC0 TC11 SACCH TC13 TC24 IDLE
Physical Channels
(example)
This Interface located between MS and BTS (also called the Radio interface) has these
features:
• Totally normalized.
• Full inter-operability between Mobile Stations and infrastructure from different
manufacturers.
Organized in 3 levels:
• Level 1 physical support:
- Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) frame and FDMA.
- Logical channel multiplexing.
• Level 2 LAPDm Protocol (modified from LAPD):
- No flag.
- No error retransmission mechanism due to real time constraints (window = 1).
• Level 3 Radio interface layer (RIL3) Protocol involves three sub-layers:
- Radio Resource Management (RR): paging, power control, ciphering execution,
handover.
- Mobility Management (MM): security, location, IMSI attach/detach.
- Connection Management (CM): Call Control (CC), Supplementary Services (SS)
Short Message Services (SMS), Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) facilities.

Abis Interface
"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission". 1 - Presentation
Speech 1 TS = 4 channels
PCM
PCM
Data 300, 1200, 1200/75, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400 bit/s
• Radio
LAPD • O&M
Message exchanges between the BTS and the BSC:

• Traffic exchanges.
• Signaling exchanges for call set up and BTS operation and maintenance.
Physical access between BTS and BSC: PCM digital links at 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544
Mbit/s (T1), carrying 32 or 24 timeslots at 64 kbit/s.
Speech:
• Conveyed in timeslots at 4 x 16 kbit/s (remote transcoders).
Data:
• Conveyed in timeslots at 4 x 16 kbit/s.
• The initial user rate, which may be 300, 1200, 1200/75, 2400, 4800 9600 or 14400 bit/s
is adjusted to 16 kbit/s.

Abis Interface
2 - Protocols
BTS side BSC side
TRX
BCF
RSM = Radio Subsystem
Management
Level 3 RSM O&M

RSM O&M O&M layer O&M = Operation and
Maintenance
RSL = Radio Signaling

LAPD Link
Level 2 RSL OML OML = Operation and
RSL OML
layer
Maintenance
Link
Level 1 layer
This interface located between BTS and BSC has these features:
• Partly normalized.
• No inter-operability (currently) proprietary.
Organized in 3 levels:
• Level 1 PCM transmission (E1 or T1):
- Speech coded at 16 kbit/s and sub-multiplexed in 64 kbit/s time slots.
- Data which rate is adapted and synchronized.
• Level 2 LAPD protocol: Standard HDLC procedure:
- RSL = Radio Signaling Link.
- OML = Operation and Maintenance Link.
• Level 3 application protocols:
- RSM = Radio Subsystem Management.
- O&M = Operation and Maintenance procedure.

LAPD and LAPDm Frames
0 to 260 octets
F FCS Information Control Address F
LAPD
N (R) N (S) TEI SAPI
End of Start of
frame 0 to 21 octets
frame
information Control Address
LAPDm
N (R) N (S) SAPI
FCS : Frame Check Sequence

F : Flag
SAPI : Service Access Point Identifier
TEI : Terminal Equipment Identifier
For each BSC and related BTS terminal port (TEI), three types of links may be activated
depending on the SAPI parameter value:
The Radio Signaling Link:
• Radio resource management procedures SAPI = 0.
• Short messages, point to point SAPI = 3.
The Operation and Maintenance Link: O&M procedures SAPI = 62.
LAPD messages:
• downlink:
- OML: software download, channel configuration,
- RSL: paging, HO command,
• uplink: OML notification (event report), and RSL channel requirement.
LAPDm frames are derived from LAPD frames:
• no flags for synchronization,
• without TEI and FCS,
• with shorter address,
• with shorter control field.

Ater Interface
"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission". 1 - Presentation
Speech 1 TS = 4 channels
Data 300, 1200, 1200/75, 2400,

4800, 9600, 14400 bit/s
LAPD • O&M
SS7
X.25
Purpose
Handling messages between BSC and TCU (TransCoder Unit).
Characteristics
Physical access at 1.544 Mbit/s or 2.048 Mbit/s (24 or 32 time slots at 64 kbit/s) carrying:
• Reserved signaling channels according to CCITT No. 7 (CCS7).
• Speech and data channels (16 kbit/s).
• BSC - TCU signaling link (LAPD).
• O&M data to OMC-R (X.25) via MSC (through the Network only).
Ater interface links carry up to:

• 120 communications (E1).
• 92 communications (T1).

Ater Interface
2 - Traffic Channel and Signaling Links
Ater interface A interface
TCU
LAPD TS 1
O&M
SS7 TS SS7 TS MSC
BSC Speech TS Speech TS

Transcoding
Data TS Rate Data TS

Adaptation
OMC
X.25 TS 2 * X.25 TS 2 *
PCM link PCM link
* if used
Signaling messages are carried on specific timeslots (TS):

• LAPD signaling TS between the BSC and the TCU.
• SS7 TS between the BSC and the MSC.
• X.25 TS 2 reserved for specific configurations.
TS 1 carries LAPD protocol and is reserved for management messages between the BSC
and the TCU. It is used by the BSC for:
• TCU monitoring (mixer, PCM interface, transcoder and control units, LAPD signaling
terminal, etc.).
• TCU configuration (BSC-TCU signaling link, A-interface PCM, semaphore channels, A-
interface circuits, synchronization and transcoding functions).
• TCU initialization.
• TCU software downloading.
• A and Ater interfaces management.
• Synchronization management.
• Transcoding management.
SS7 TS is intended for BSC-MSC link and is dedicated for BSSAP messages transportation.
TS 2 is reserved if the O&M data are transmitted to the OMC-R via a PCM link’s TS,
managed by the A-interface.
Signaling messages on the LAPD TS 1 are processed only by the TCU. SS7 TS and TS 2, if
they are reserved, are switched by the TCU but remain transparent to it.

A Interface
1 - Presentation
BSS NSS
Speech/Data 1 TS = 1 channel
SS7
X.25
Message exchanges between the MSC and the BSS (TCU):

• Users traffic transport (speech + data).
• Signaling transport.
Physical access BSS MSC: PCM digital links.
User’s traffic transport

Each time slot corresponds to a traffic channel on the radio interface.
The 64 kbit/s speech rate adjustment (A-law or µ-law) and the 64 kbit/s data rate adaptation
are performed at the TCU.
Signaling transport
CCITT signaling system 7 (SS7).
Two parts:
• The Message Transfer Part (MTP).
• The Signaling Connection Control Part (SCCP).

A Interface
2 - Protocols
BSS A-interface NSS

To other
processes
within the BSS
Other applications,
To air
interface BSS BSS (eg call control)

DTAP MAP DTAP
transmission MAP
equipment
Distribution Distribution
function function
SCCP SCCP To other users

of the SCCP
and MTP
MTP MTP
Physical layer
DTAP: Direct Transfer Application Part SCCP: Signaling Connection Control Part BSS: Base Station Subsystem
BSSMAP: BSS Management Application Part MTP: Message Transfer Part MSC: Mobile services Switching Centre
This Interface located between TRAU and MSC has these features:
• Totally normalized to allow multivendor equipment.
• Full interoperability in most cases and after testing.
Based on CCS7 protocol (either ETSI or ANSI).
The MTP layers (2 to 3) provide the basic transport system for all CCS7 signaling messages and are
responsible for signaling network management and signaling message handling:
• Level 1: defines the physical characteristics for a 64 kbit/s signaling data link.
• Level 2: ensures secure signaling link by providing error detection and correction, signaling link
alignment and error monitoring.
• Level 3: ensures that signaling messages are routed through the network in correct sequence
and without loss or duplication even in case of link failure.
So, MTP finds the destination signaling point and SCCP will deliver the message.
The SCCP addressing allows routing to the application within the same network (through the
address) or to an external network (through Global translations) using class 0 for connection mode
and class 2 for connection oriented mode.
A distribution function is added on top of the SCCP to discriminate the BSSMAP from DTAP.
The BSSAP is a GSM CCS7 protocol and handles signaling involving MS, the BSS and the MSC.
The BSSAP is divided into two parts:
• The BSSMAP which consists of messages to be processed either by MSC or BSC (RR).
• The DTAP which consists of messages to be transmitted transparently regarding the BSS (MM,
CM).

PSTN/ISDN/PSDN Interface
GMSC Toll offices

TUP ISUP DUP Application layer TUP ISUP DUP
Message transfer
MTP MTP
Physical layer
Interface between MSC and:

• Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
• Integrated Service Data Network (ISDN).
• Packet Switched public Data Network (PSDN).
Normalization:
• Country dependent.
• Inter-operability after local adaptations.
The User part is built on services of the MTP to provide connectionless signaling for setting
up, monitoring and clearing down the voice or data trunks of GSM CCS7 calls at the PSTN
interface taking into consideration that it is connection-oriented at the A interface due to
SCCP functions.
The User part transports signaling messages associated with the connection between two
users in a network.
It supplies the trunk signaling capabilities which enable network-wide feature transparency
for some network services.
There are three main families of user part protocol depending on the application:
• The Telephone User Part (TUP) interface with PSTN network.
• The ISDN User Part (ISUP), interface with ISDN network.
• The Data User Part (DUP), interface with PAD on PSDN network.

General Packet Radio Service
GSM/ PSTN/ISDN
NSS
BSS
GGSN
PCU GPRS/ Internet

NSS or Intranets
SGSN
New standard for efficient data packet routing and transport to and
from Packet Data Networks.
Service offering includes:
– direct IP connectivity
– Point-to-Point or Point-to-Multipoint
Add-on to GSM, using existing BSS infrastructure
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) is a packet radio access technique based on GSM
radio to transfer data in an efficient manner optimizing the use of network resources. It
provides packet radio access to external Packet Data Networks, for instance to the Internet.
It offers direct IP connectivity, in a Point-To-Point (PTP) or Point-To-Multipoint (PTM) data
transmission mode.
GPRS is an add-on to existing GSM networks, i.e., it makes use of the existing GSM radio
infrastructure.
With Nortel’s GPRS core nodes, Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) and Gateway GPRS
Support Node (GGSN), the upfront investment for operators for initial deployment of GPRS
services is limited.
Nortel is currently developing the building blocks of GPRS, including:
• Packet Control Unit Support Node (PCUSN),
• Serving Gprs Support Node (SGSN),
• Gateway Gprs Support Node (GGSN).
PCUSN and SGSN entities are hosted both on Nortel Magellan Passport, and GGSN on
Contivity Extranet Switch 4500.

Check Your Learning
1- What are the three components of a GSM system?

2- What does a BSS consist of?
3- What are the external interfaces and the internal interfaces of a

BSS?
4- What are the main functions of a BTS?
1- What are the three components of a GSM system?
2- What does a BSS consist of?
3- What are the external interfaces and the internal interfaces of a BSS?
4- What are the main functions of a BTS?

5- Which technique does help saving links between BTS and BSC?
6- What are the main functions of the BSC?
7- What does the NSS contain?
8- What are the main function of a MSC?
5- Which technique does help saving links between BTS and BSC?
6- What are the main functions of the BSC?
7- What does the NSS contain?
8- What are the main function of a MSC?

9- What is the role of the HLR?
10- What is the role of the VLR?

11- What are the three entities of layer 3 involved in the radio
interface?
12- What is the layer 2 protocol involved in the Abis interface?
13- What is the Mobile Application Part?
9- What is the role of the HLR?
10- What is the role of the VLR?
11- What are the three entities of layer 3 involved in the radio interface?
12- What is the layer 2 protocol involved in the Abis interface?
13- What is the Mobile Application Part?

Student Notes:

Student Notes:

Procedures
Section 8
Procedures
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Procedures 8-1

Procedures
Objectives
Learning the basic procedures, the main call procedures,

mobility and roaming features that GSM operates.

• List the GSM procedures that can be activated
from MS switch-on until MS switch-off
• Explain the main procedures: cell selection, location update,
call set-up, call release, handover

Procedures
Contents
1- Descriptors that GSM uses.
2- GSM ’s actors
3 - Procedures:
• Cell selection
• Immediate Assignment
• Location updates
- Registration
- Intra-VLR and Inter-VLR
- IMSI attach/detach
• Authentication
• Ciphering
• Mobile Originating call
• Mobile Terminating call
- Paging
- End to end
• Call release
- MS initiated
- PSTN initiated
• Handovers

Procedures
Descriptors Stored in SIM-Card
Global GSM Mobility

Card
MNC The Smart Card to use
MCC
=
=
01 (FTM)
208 (France)
10 (SFR)
234 (G-B) GSM
20 (Bytel)
IMSI = 15 digits max
Mobile Mobile Mobile Subscriber Identification Number (MSIN)

Country Network
Code Code
8 digits: H1 H2 X X X X X X
3 digits 2/3 digits
LAI NMSI
Mobile Mobile Temporary Mobile

Country Network Location Area Code Subscriber Identity
Code Code
LAC 4 octets
3 digits 2/3 digits
These descriptors are used in different phases of call setup:

• International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) is the proprietary identifier of the
mobile subscriber within the GSM network and is permanently assigned to him; it
consists of MCC, MNC and MSIN:
- Mobile Country Code (3 digits) is allocated to the operator country,
- Mobile Network Code (2 or 3 digits) is allocated to each operator,
- Mobile Subscriber Identification Number (8 digits) is allocated by the GSM
network (HLR).
• GSM network can assign a Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity (TMSI) to identify
the mobile on a local basis (within VLR), allocated to visiting mobile subscribers and
correlated with IMSI.
• Location Area Identity (LAI) defines a part of a MSC/VLR service area in which a MS
can move freely without updating location; it consists of MCC, MNC and LAC.
• National Mobile Subscriber Identity (NMSI) consists of the MNC and the MSIN.

Procedures
Descriptors Stored in the Network

MS-ISDN
Country National Subscriber Number (SN)

Must be dialed to
Code Destination M1 M2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X make a call to
CC Code mobile subscriber
MSRN
Roaming Number (RN) Is a PSTN-like

Country National
number used to
Code Destination
reach a roaming
CC Code
MS
Is a PSTN-like
Country National number to track
Code Destination HO-number the MS which
CC Code hands over to
another MSC during
NDC = 607, 608, 604 (FTM) call-in-state
CC = 33 (France)
= 609, 603 (SFR)
= 660, 661, 618 (Bytel)
The Mobile Subscriber ISDN Number (MS-ISDN) is the number that the calling party dials
in order to reach the GSM subscriber. It is used by the land networks to route calls toward
an appropriate GSM network. MSISDN is stored in HLR.
The Mobile Subscriber Roaming Number (MSRN) is allocated on a temporary basis when
the MS roams into another numbering area. Thus the MSRN shall have the same structure
as international ISDN number in the area in which it is allocated. Visited MSC allocates a
MSRN upon the VLR request which in turn was requested by the HLR. Upon reception of
the MSRN, HLR sends it to the GMSC, which can now route the call to the MSC/VLR
exchange where the called subscriber is currently registered.
HO number is used for inter-MSC Handovers, to establish a circuit from the serving MSC to
the new MSC.

Procedures
Descriptor Embodied in the MS
IMEI enables the operator to check

the Mobile Equipment Identity
at call setup and make sure
that no stolen or unauthorized MS

is used in the GSM network
PE ED
TY OV
PR
AP
TAC FAC SNR SP
Type Approval Serial NumbeR (SPare)

Code Final Assembly
Code
Stored inside the Mobile Equipment.

Used instead of IMSI or TMSI when both are unavailable (example: Emergency calls without
SIM card) or when required by the network (for maintenance).
Can be used for EIR database updating (when it exists):
• TAC = 6 digits describing the type of equipment.
• FAC = 2 digits for identification of the factory.
• SNR = 6 digits for the serial number of the device.
IMEI may be temporary stored within MSC/VLR to minimize signaling within the Network.

Procedures
GSM ’s Actors
NSS
BSS
MSC Public
Switched
BSC Telephone
Network
BTS
VLR HLR
AUC
Fixed subscriber
Mobile subscriber
These are the GSM actors that are involved in the following procedures.

Procedures
Cell Selection
Purpose: get synchronization

with the GSM network
prior establishing any communication.
1
1
BTS-5
1 BTS-4 1
H 2
FCC
1 3
BTS-3 5 SCH
4
CH
BC BTS-1
This cell
BTS-2
1- MS scans the whole spectrum and stores the strongest level carriers (30 in GSM 900, 40
otherwise).
2- MS tunes to the frequency correction channel (FCCH) of the strongest carrier (BTS-1).
3- MS reads data from the synchronization channel (SCH).
4- MS reads data from broadcast channel (BCCH).
5- MS camps on this BCCH if it is suitable for the MS; otherwise it tries selection on the next
strongest beacon carrier.

Procedures
Immediate Assignment
MS BTS BSC MSC
CHANNEL REQUEST
1 CHANNEL REQUIRED
RACH 2
CHANNEL ACTIVATION
3 Immediate
4
CHANNEL ACTIVATION Assignment
ACK.
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT

5
5 COMMAND
AGCH
CM SERVICE REQUEST
6
SDCCH or TCH
OR
LOCATION UPDAT. REQU.
6
SDCCH or TCH
The Immediate Assignment procedure is always initiated by the MS and may be triggered by
a Paging Request or by a Mobile Originating Service request.
Procedure
1- The MS sends a CHANNEL REQUEST message (RACH).
2- The BTS decodes this message and indicates it to BSC through CHANNEL
REQUIRED message.
3- The BSC asks BTS to activate a dedicated channel: SDCCH or TCH (if no SDCCH
available).
4- Acknowledgement by BTS
5- The BSC sends an IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message to the MS (via
the BTS); the MS has to seize the indicated dedicated channel including these values:
initial Timing Advance and initial maximum transmission power.
6- Then the MS can request a service on the dedicated channel through:
• SERVICE REQUEST message including the access reason (call setup, paging
etc.),
• LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message for location.

Procedures
Registration: the Very First Location Update
1
1
BSS
IMSI 2
2 3 MSC
3 BSC TMSI
5
TMSI 6
5 BTS 2
Release
6
3 TMSI
5
LAI HLR VLR

IMSI 4 IMSI
VLR id TMSI
LAI
1- Channel allocation (Connection request procedure):

• the MS sends (on RACH) a CHANNEL REQUEST message,
• the network responds with IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT (on dedicated channel).
2- The MS sends to BSS a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message with IMSI.
3- The VLR triggers and monitors the Authentication procedure and can also activate
Ciphering procedure.
4- The VLR stores the LA of the MS and informs the HLR which:
• stores VLR identity,
• downloads the subscriber profile, if the MS is allowed to roam.
5- The VLR may assign a TMSI and sends it to the MS in the LOCATION UPDATING
ACCEPT message.
6- The MSC releases the connection.

Procedures
Intra-VLR Location Update
1 1
BSS
TMSI + old LAI 2
2 MSC
BSC
new TMSI 3
3
BTS 4
4 2
New TMSI
TMSI
3
New LAI VLR

IMSI
TMSI
LAI
IMSI not Required
1- Channel allocation (Connection request procedure).

2- The MS sends to the BSS a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message (with TMSI
and old LAI), relayed to the VLR through the MSC.
3- The VLR stores the new Location Area Identity, then if required assigns a new TMSI and
responds to the MS with LOCATION UPDATING ACCEPT message.
4- The MSC releases the connection.

Procedures
Inter-VLR Location Update
1 BSS 1
2
TMSI + old LAI
2 BSC 5 MSC
newTMSI
5
BTS 7
7 2
TMSI New TMSI
5
New LAI Old VLR New VLR
IMSI, TMSI 3 IMSI,TMSI
Old LAI LAI
RAND, SRES, 4 RAND, SRES,
Kc Kc
IMSI not Required HLR subscriber

6 data
new
VLR id
1- Channel allocation (connection request procedure).

2- The MS sends to BSS a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message, (with TMSI + old
LAI) relayed to the VLR through MSC.
3- The new VLR asks the old VLR for MS identity and ciphering items.
4- The old VLR backs new VLR IMSI, RAND, SRES, Kc.
5- The new VLR assigns a TMSI and sends it to the MS over a LOCATION UPDATING
ACCEPT message (with cipher mode if required).
6- The new VLR informs the HLR which sends subscriber data and asks the old VLR to
erase the previous MS data.
7- The MSC releases connection.

Procedures
IMSI Attach
CHANNEL
1
REQUEST BSS
IMMEDIATE
2
ASSIGNMENT
3 LOCATION UPDATING BSC

REQUEST (IMSI Attach) 3

Authentication 4
Procedure
4 BTS MSC
LOCATION UPDATING
5
5
ACCEPT (LAC, TMSI)
VLR
The IMSI attach procedure is used (if required by the network), to indicate the IMSI as
active in the network and is performed by using the Location updating procedure.
Procedure
1- MS requests (on RACH) a dedicated channel with CHANNEL REQUEST message
using a random number.
2- BSS assigns a dedicated channel (on AGCH) with IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
message using this random number.
3- MS sends (over this dedicated channel) a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST
message including its identity and the IMSI Attach cause.
4- Authentication procedure (if required by the network).
5- MSC responds by sending a LOCATION UPDATING ACCEPT message.
6- In the VLR, a flag is set to indicate that the subscriber is active.
This procedure is used only if the update status is updated and if the stored LAI is the same
as the one which is actually broadcast on the BCCH of the current serving cell.

Procedures
IMSI Detach
CHANNEL
1 BSS
REQUEST
IMMEDIATE
2
ASSIGNMENT
BSC MSC
3 IMSI DETach
IMSI DETach
3 INDication
INDication BTS
CHANNEL
4
RELEASE
VLR
The IMSI detach procedure may be invoked by a MS:

• if the MS is switched off,
• if the SIM card is detached.
Procedure
1- MS requests (on RACH) a dedicated channel with CHANNEL REQUEST message.
2- BSS assigns a dedicated channel (on AGCH) with IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
message.
3- The MS sends IMSI DETach INDication message to the VLR.
4- The VLR sets a flag to indicate that this MS is no longer available; no paging will be
done to that MS until IMSI ATTach occurs.

Procedures
Authentication
1 - Principle
Global GSM Mobility

MS BSS NSS (RAND, SRES, Kc)
Card Radio
Interface AUC
GSM
RAND (128 bits) (A3 and A8)
SIM card
Ki (128 bits) Ki (128 bits)

Ki RAND Ki
A3 A3
A3 A3
SRESm
SRES
A8 =? A8
A8 SRESm A8
(32 bits) OK
CIPHER
MODE Kc
RAND = RANDom number
SRES = Signed RESponse Kc
Kc = Ciphering Key
Ki = Identification Key
Purpose: authentication of the subscriber, to prevent access of unregistered users:

• Authentication is performed by requiring from an algorithm A3 the correct answer to a
random number input.
• Eavesdropping recording of signaling is inefficient since there is never twice the same
request.
• A3 algorithm is operator-dependent.
Principle
• The NSS transmits a non-predictable number RAND to the MS.
• The SIM card and the NSS compute the signature SRESm, using algorithm A3, from
the RAND and a secret key Ki.
• The MS transmits its signature SRESm to the NSS.
• The NSS tests the two SRES for validity.
• Each time authentication A3 algorithm runs, concurrently A8 algorithm is used to
produce a ciphering key Kc.

Procedures
Authentication
2 - Procedure
BSS RAND
RAND 4
4
SRESm SRESm MSC
BSC 6
6
Ciphering
CIPHER 7
7 BTS Command
MODE 6
RAND
SRESm
Purpose:
4 Avoid logging of lost,
6 4
stolen or HLR 7
forgery SIM-Cards.
1 VLR
Triplets SRESm = SRES ?
Ki RAND 3
1
5 A3
3
SRESm (RAND, SRES, Kc)
2 AUC
(A3 and A8)
Procedure
1- The VLR sends a Map Send Parameters message to the HLR which relays this
message to the AUC.
2- The AUC then generates some RAND numbers and applies algorithms A3 and A8 to
provide the authenticated signature SRES and the cipher key Kc.
3- The AUC returns the triplets (RAND, SRES, Kc) to HLR which relays them to the VLR.
4- The VLR now sends a Map Authenticate message to the MSC which in turn sends to
the MS an AUTHENTICATION REQUEST message containing Rand; the Kc is also
sent but stops at the BTS.
5- The SIM-Card calculates the required response SRESm, using RAND, algorithm A3
and authentication key Ki.
6- The MS returns SRESm to VLR in AUTHENTICATION RESPONSE.
7- VLR checks SRES = SRESm, then sends to the MSC a MM Service accept
message; otherwise VLR denies access: the MS will receive an AUTHENTICATION
REQUEST.
* The operator can modify the period of activation through parameters: for example, he can
authenticate every five requests (for each subscriber).

Procedures
Ciphering
1 - Principle
MS BTS
Frame Number Radio Frame Number
(22 bits) interface (22 bits)
A5 A5
Kc (64 bits) Kc (64 bits)
Block Block Block Block

(114 bits) (114 bits) (114 bits) (114 bits)
Data to transmit Received data

+ +
Ciphered
Received data data Data to transmit
+ +
+ : exclusive-or
Radio path ciphering, in particular ciphering of all subscriber information, aims to prevent
third party tapping (eavesdropping).
What is encrypted?:
• Signaling (Subscriber Id.).
• Speech or data.
The encryption of signaling and user speech or data, is performed at the MS as well as at
the BTS (symmetric encryption) using the same Kc and the A5 algorithm.
Each time a Mobile Station is authenticated, this MS and the Network also compute the
ciphering key Kc (algorithm A8) with the same inputs RAND and Ki as for the SRES
(algorithm A3). The Frame Number FN of the current TDMA frame (within a hyperframe) is
another input for the A5 besides the Kc.
The output of Encryption algorithm A5 is a ciphering sequence of 114 bits. Exclusive OR
operation is applied between data to be ciphered and the ciphering sequence in order to
produce either ciphered or deciphered data.
Algorithm A5 is not operator dependent to achieve international roaming between any
Mobile Station and BSS infrastructure whatever the operator.Two types of ciphering
algorithms are available: A5/1 et A5/2, but only one ciphering algorithm A5 is supported at a
time in a BTS.
The BSC checks the availability of the A5 algorithms in the MS. If the BSS does not support
the same ciphering algorithm as the MS, the calls will be unencrypted.
The ciphering BSS capability is an O&M parameter defined for all the BTS of the BSC.

Procedures
Ciphering
2 - Procedure
BSS
CIPHER MODE COMMAND
3
Kc
2
CIPHER MODE COMPLETE BSC
CIPHER MODE MSC
4 Kc 6 COMPLETE
Ciphered BTS
+ data
5
A5
Purpose: avoid communication to be tapped. SET CIPHER MODE
(Kc)
Kc
TDMA# ✁❁❚❅❒✟▼❃❙◆❉ 1
❐✟▲❄❒✁❆✟✝❊
▲❄❆✁✟✝❏❋❇❑❈
(Rand, SRES, Kc)
Ki Rand VLR
A8
Kc
Ciphering is normally required for all user transactions over the RF link when the subscriber
has been authenticated by the system. It is worth noting that this is an optional feature and it
is dependent of the operator.
Procedure
1- Ciphering begins with the VLR sending the MSC a SET CIPHER MODE (MAP
message) containing the value of Kc.
2- The MSC sends the ciphering key to the BSS (actually the BTS) in a CIPHER MODE
COMMAND (BSSMAP message).
3- The BSS in turn sends an CIPHERING MODE COMMAND (RR message) to the MS.
4- The MS switches to encrypted transmission and reception, then sends back to BSS an
CIPHERING MODE COMPLETE (RR message).
5- After the BSS receives this message, it switches to encrypted transmission and
reception for subsequent burst.
6- The BSS then sends a CIPHER MODE COMPLETE (BSSMAP message) to the MSC.

Procedures
Mobile Originating Call
MS BSS MSC PSTN

CHANNEL REQUEST VLR
Dialing 1
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
2
CM SERVICE REQUEST CM SERVICE REQUEST

2 2
3 Authentication procedure
3 Ciphering procedure
Sending SETUP (basic) or SETUP

4 4
Number EMERGENCY 5
IAM
CALL PROCEEDING 6 Ring
CALL PROCEEDING 7
7
Ringing
7 Assignment procedure
ACM
ALERTING 8
Ringing 9
ANM
Path CONNECT 10
11
Established
CONNECT ACKnowledge ACM = Address Complete Message
11 ANM = ANswer Message
IAM = Initial Address Message
1- The MS originates the call by sending a CHANNEL REQUEST message (on RACH).
2- Immediate assignment: channel allocation with TCH / FACCH or SDCCH.
3- The VLR launches authentication (if required) and completes ciphering.
4- The MS initiates call establishment by sending a SETUP message (called party
number) to the MSC.
5- The MSC in turn checks mobile subscriber capabilities with VLR for desired service.
6- If it agrees, the MSC relays the called number over an ISUP Initial Address Message.
7- The MSC also sends a CALL PROCEEDING message to the MS (assigning TCH /
FACCH EA in case of Early Assignment).
8- Recipient PSTN switch rings the land telephone and returns an ISUP Address
Complete Message to the MSC.
9- Upon receiving this message, the MSC alerts the MS with an ALERTING message.
10- Called party goes off hook, thus PSTN sends to the MSC an ISUP ANswer Message.
MSC then connects MS (assigning a TCH in case of OACSU).
11- Call is accepted (CONNECT/CONNECT ACK) and the conversation starts.
In case of Emergency MO Call, the SETUP message (basic call) is replaced by the
EMERGENCY one.

Procedures
Mobile Terminating Call

1 - Paging Principle
LA1
6 BSC1 4
BTS11
5
3 1
BTS12 MSC/ PSTN
6 GMSC
5 VLR
BSC2
BTS21
2
BTS22
HLR
LA2
BTS23 BSC3
BTS31
Main difference with MO Call procedure is the Paging of the Mobile Station.
When the MS is in Idle mode, the network do not knows the cell but only the Location Area
where the MS is located.
Since RR sessions are only established at the initiative of the MS, the role of the Paging
procedure is to trigger that operation.
Principle
1- A call from the fixed network (PSTN) is switched to the Gateway MSC (GMSC).
2- The GMSC reads in the HLR the identity of the MSC/VLR (or Visitor MSC) handling
the Location Area of the Mobile Station.
3- The GMSC routes the call to the VMSC.
4- The VMSC reads the LA where the MS is located, into its VLR.
5- The VMSC sends instructions to one or several BSC (BSC1 and BSC2) to page the
MS in the different cells of LA1.
6- BSC1 and BSC2 page the MS in the BTSs of the Location Area LA1. (BTS11, BTS12,
BTS21).
GMSC and VMSC are software functions.

Use of MSRN = only case of GSM where a circuit is established before is answered.

Procedures

2 - Detailed Paging Procedure
Visitor PLMN Home PLMN

International
SS7
VLR HLR
Provide Roaming Number
4
(IMSI)
Roaming Number
5 (MSRN)
9 6
Send info Send 1
PAGING PAGE Routing Routing
to I/C
REQUEST (TMSI + LA) Information Information MSISDN
(MSRN)
(TMSI) (MSRN) (MSISDN)
11 8 3
PAGING IAM (MSRN)
REQUEST VMSC IAM ISDN
BSS 10 7 GMSC 2
(TMSI + LA) (MSISDN)
PN
IMSI : International Mobile Subscriber Identity

IAM : Initial Address Message
GMSC : Gateway MSC
MSISDN : Mobile Station Integrated Services Digital network Number
VMSC : Visitor MSC
MSRN : Mobile Station Roaming Number
TMSI : Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
Procedure
1- The caller subscriber access the ISDN by dialing the called MS-ISDN number.
2- Transmission of MS-ISDN number to GMSC through IAM (Initial Address Message).
3- Transmission of MS-ISDN number to HLR through SRI (Send Routing
Information).
4- The HLR interrogates the VLR (Visitor MSC) that is currently serving the user.
5- The VLR returns a routing number (MSRN) to the HLR, which passes it back to the
GMSC.
6- The MSRN is transmitted to GMSC (address of appropriate VMSC).
7- The GMSC calls VMSC through IAM (with MSRN).
8- The MSC asks VLR to establish where the called party is located.
9- The VLR gives location information (LA) to MSC with PAGE message.
10- The VMSC alerts with PAGING REQUEST message, all BSCs in charge of cells
belonging to this LA.
11- All the BTS page the MS over PCH; depending upon the paging type message, up to
four different TMSI may be contained in the page command.
There are three types of PAGING REQUEST message:
• Type 1: sent on the PCH to up two MSs, to trigger channel by these; MSs are
identified by their TMSI or IMSI.
• Type 2: sent on the PCH to two or three MS; two of the MS are identified by their
TMSI while the third is identified either by its IMSI or its TMSI.
• Type 3: sent on the PCH to four MS which are identified by their TMSIs.

Procedures

3 - End to End Procedure
MS BSS VMSC GMSC PSTN
IAM
IAM 1 Dialing
PAGING REQUEST 2 (MSISDN)
PAGING REQUEST 3 (MSRN)
4 (TMSI or IMSI, LA)
CHANNEL REQUEST
5
(LAC, Cell ID)
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT 6
(SDCCH or TCH)
CM SERVICE REQUEST
7 PAGING RESPONSE
(Paging Response) 7
(TMSI or IMSI, LA)
8 Authentication procedure
9 Ciphering procedure
Ringing
10 Setup, Assignment, Alerting Address Complete Message
11
CONNECT ANswer Message
12 Path
12
Established
Procedure
1- PSTN sends an IAM (with the MSISDN) to the GMSC.
2- GMSC sends an IAM (with the MSRN) to the VMSC.
3- The VMSC sends a PAGING REQUEST MM message to the BSS.
4- The BSS sends a PAGING REQUEST (with IMSI or TMSI) to the MS.
5- The MS must request a channel (CHANNEL REQUEST message with paging cause)
over the RACH, within 0.5 second.
6- The BSS complies and assigns (on AGCH) a dedicated channel to the MS with
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT message.
7- The MS sends a PAGING RESPONSE to the VMSC via the BSS.
8/9- Authentication and Ciphering procedures (if required).
10- Setup, Assignment, Alerting procedures (see MS Originating Call).
11- Alerting is sent to PSTN with an ACM (ISUP message).
12- CONNECT and ANM messages are sent to the PSTN: call is completed.

Procedures
Call Release
1 - Mobile Initiated
MS BSS MSC PSTN
1 Call in progress
DISCONNECT
2 DISCONNECT
2
RELEASE RELEASE
3
3
RELEASE COMPLETE
4
Release
CHANNEL RELEASE 6 5
RELEASE INDICATION
7
RF Channel Release
procedure 8
Release
9
tone
Call release can be initiated by either the PSTN user or the mobile user.
BSC is responsible for BSS resources, MSC is responsible for NSS and PSTN connection.
Procedure
1- Call is currently in progress.
2- The MS initiates the release of a call by sending a DISCONNECT message to the
MSC.
3- The MSC returns to the MS a RELEASE message.
4- The MS acknowledges with a RELEASE COMPLETE message.
5- The MSC can send the Release message to the PSTN without waiting for the
RELEASE COMPLETE MM message from the MS.
6- The BSC requests the MS to return to Idle mode with CHANNEL RELEASE message.
7- The BTS informs the BSC with RELEASE INDICATION that signaling link is
disconnected.
8- BSC requests BTS to de-activate RF Channel (TCH): Channel Release.
9- The PSTN informs the land terminal with appropriate tone.
Abnormal termination is monitored by a set of timers (operator configurable) to ensure

resources are not unused/unavailable.

Procedures
Call Release
2 - PSTN Initiated
1
BSS 1 1
3 3 REL
MSC 2
4 BSC 4 PSTN
RLC
5 6
BTS 5
1
2
Purpose:
informs the mobile
then releases radio
and network resources.
On hook
Procedure
1- The call is in progress.
2- The release process starts with an ISUP Release message from the land network.
3- Upon receiving this message, the MSC initiates the release of the call by sending a
DISCONNECT message to the MS.
4- MS replies by sending a RELEASE CHANNEL message to the MSC.
5/6- MSC in turn, backs to the MS a RELEASE COMPLETE message and sends to the
PSTN a Release Complete message.

Procedures
Reasons for Handover
Rescue Prevention
Signal strength Distance

Quality Maintenance
Lack of resources: Power budget

Directed Retry
Micro cellular
environment
Decision criteria
• Bad quality.
• Weak signal strength.
• Cell boundaries (Distance).
• Power budget (optimization).
• Traffic constraints.

Procedures
Mobility and Handover

The Five Types of Handover
MSC-A MSC-B
BSC-C
BTS
C1
BSC-A BSC-B
BTS
B1 5
BTS
1 A2
BTS
A1
4 1- Intra-Cell HO
2- Intra-BTS HO
2 3 3- Intra-BSC HO
4- Inter-BSC HO
5- Inter-MSC HO
1- Intra-Cell Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on the same cell, under
the same BTS.
2- Intra-BTS Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on a different cell, under
the control of the same BTS.
3- Intra-BSC Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on a different cell, under
the control of a different BTS of the same BSC.
4- Inter-BSC Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on a different cell, under
the control of a different BSC of the same MSC.
5- Inter-MSC Handover: the MS is handed over to another channel on different cell, under
another MSC of the same PLMN.

Procedures
Handover Preparation
BSC MSC
r
he
s ot els
n
BTS-1
Me an an
as sc ch
u
re rem MS con BTS-2
a
su
lts ent be
Cell 1
Cell 2
To avoid losing a call in progress, when the Mobile Station leaves the radio coverage of the
cell in charge.
Procedure: Three steps:
• Handover decision (based on measurements results).
• Choice of the target cell.
• Handover execution.
Handover topology
• Intra BTS (intra and inter cell).
• Inter BSC.
• Inter MSC including (subsequent).
• Microcellular environment.

Procedures
Handover Decision
Decision criteria:
- bad quality,
- weak signal strength,
- cell boundaries,
- etc. BSC MSC
e
bl r
i ta ove
su d 6)
of han =
i st for um
L s
ll x im
ce (ma
BTS-1
BTS-2
Cell 1
Cell 2
Handover is initiated by the network based on radio subsystem criteria (RF level, quality,
distance) as well as network directed criteria (current traffic loading per cell, maintenance
requests, etc.).
In order to determine if a handover is required, due to RF criteria, the MS shall take radio
measurements from neighboring cells; these measurements are reported to the serving cell
on a regular basis.

Procedures
Handover Execution
d BSC MSC
an
m S
m
Co he M
HO to t
Co to th
mm e M
an S
ds
HO
BTS-1
BTS-2
Cell 1
Cell 2

Procedures
Intra-BSC Handover
MS BTS1 BTS2 BSC MSC

HO INDICATION
1
HO CHANNEL ACTIVATE
Initiation 2
CHANNEL ACTIVATE ACK
3
HO COMMAND
HO COMMAND 4
5
HO ACCESS *
6
HO DETECTION
7
PHYSICAL INFO **
8
HO
ESTABLISH INDICATION
Execution 9
HandOver COMPLETE
10 HO COMPLETE
11 HO COMPLETE
HO 12
Acknowledg. RF CHANNEL RELEASE
13
RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK

14
* this message may be repeated up to 4 times

** only if Handover asynchronous
1- The BTS1 triggers HandOver by sending a HandOver INDICATION message to the

BSC.
2- The BSC allocates if available a new channel from the BTS2.
3- The BTS2 establishes this channel, and responds to the BSC.
4/5- The BSC sends a HandOver COMMAND to the MS (on the FACCH) via the BTS1,
assigning a new channel, its characteristics, the power level to use, the frequency
hopping set, the Timing Advance TA if possible, and whether to use synchronous or
asynchronous HO.
6a- In synchronous mode, MS sends to the BTS2 in successive multiframe slots (on the
FACCH) four HandOver ACCESS messages. It then activates the new channel in both
directions.
6b- In asynchronous mode, MS starts sending to the BTS2 a continuous stream of

HandOver ACCESS messages, by sending access bursts on TCH until it receives the
TA to apply.
8- In asynchronous mode, MS receives the TA.
10/11- In both cases, MS replies with a HandOver COMPLETE message to the BSC over
the new FACCH.
13/14- BSC in turn directs BTS1 to release the previous channel by sending a RF
CHANNEL RELEASE message with ACKnowledgment from the BTS1.

Procedures
Inter-BSC Handover
MS BTS1 BSC1 MSC BSC2 BTS2

HO INDICATION
1 HO REQUIRED
HO 2 HO REQUEST
3 CHANNEL ACTIVATE
Initiation 4
CHANNEL ACTIVATE ACK
HO REQUEST ACK 5
6
HO COMMAND
HO COMMAND 7
HO COMMAND 8
9
HO ACCESS *
10
HO HO DETECTION
HO DETECTION
11
Execution 12
PHYSICAL INFO
13
ESTABLISH INDICATION 14
HandOver COMPLETE
15
HO HO COMPLETE
HO COMPLETE 16
Acknowledg. CLEAR COMMAND 17
RF CHANNEL RELEASE 18
19
RF CHANNEL RELEASE ACK
20 CLEAR COMPLETE
21
* this message may be repeated up to 4 times
A communication is established between the mobile subscriber and another user.

The Mobile Station moves towards another cell (BTS1 to BTS2).
The MSC controls the call, the mobility management and the radio resources, before, during
and after the HO.
1- The BTS1 triggers HO by sending a HandOver INDICATION message to the BSC1.
2/3- The BSC1 makes a channel allocation request to the BSC2, via the MSC;
HANDOVER REQUIRED shall contain a list of cells, or a single cell, to which the MS
can be handed over.
4/6- The BSC2 allocates a channel if available, and responds to the MSC.
7/9- The MSC requests the MS (via BSC1 and BTS1) to connect to the BTS2.
10- The MS requests a radio resource to BTS2: HO ACCESS.
11/12- The BTS2 informs the MSC that it accept the handover.
13- The BTS2 establishes the connection with the MS.
14- The BTS2 orders the BSC2 that the radio link with the MS is established.
15- The MSC switches the call to the MS, (via BSC2 and BTS2) and the MS
acknowledges with HO COMPLETE.
16/17- The BTS2 (via BSC2) informs the MSC that the connection is successful.
18- The MSC informs the BSC1 to release radio resource with BTS1: CLEAR
COMMAND.
19/21- The BSC1 releases BTS1 radio resource: RF CHANNEL RELEASE.

Procedures
Inter-MSC Handover
BSC 1 MSC 1
1a
BTS
1
1b Terrestrial link
BTS
BSC 2
2a
BTS PSTN
2b
2 3
BTS
BSC 3 MSC 2
BTS 3a
3b 3
A communication is established between the mobile subscriber and another user.

• The Mobile Station moves towards another cell (BTS 2b to BTS 3a).
• The BTS 2b sends an HANDOVER INDICATION to BSC2 which informs MSC1.
• The MSC1 sends a Transfer Request to MSC2.
• The MSC2 requests the BSC3 to allocate a traffic channel (TCH).
• The MSC2 informs the MSC1 that the channel has been successfully allocated.
• The MSC1 requests the BSC2 to hand over the call.
• The BSC2 requests the MS, via BTS 2b, to connect via BSC3 to BTS 3a.
• The MS establishes a connection with BTS 3a via BSC3.
• The BSC3 informs the MSC2 that the connection is successful.
• The MSC1 is informed too, via MSC2.
• The MSC1 switches the call to MSC2.
• The MSC2 routes the call to the MS, via BSC3 and BTS 3a.
• The MSC1 releases BSC2 radio resources.

Procedures
Exercise
Cite the GSM procedures successively involved in the following situations

(the IMSI Attach/Detach function is enabled).
Indicate the radio channels types used in every procedure.
1- Switch-on the MS and move in Idle mode from one LA to an other one.
2- Establish a call and move in communication from one cell to an other.
3- MS in Idle mode. Reception of a Short Message.
4- Switch-off the MS.

Procedures
Student Notes:

Base Transceiver Station Functions
Section 9
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Base Transceiver Station Functions 9-1

Objectives
After completing this lesson you will be able to :

• Cite the main functions of a BTS;
• Cite the three functional parts of one BTS and their role;
• Indicate the three different connection modes of a BTS and their
benefits/drawbacks;
• Describe the BCF module;
• Describe the TRX;
• Describe the coupling system.

BSS Architecture
MSC
Radio
TCU Interface
A Interface
S2000H&L
NSS BTS
Ater Interface

BSC Outdoor
OMC-R BTS
Radio
Interface
OMN Interface
Sun
S8000
StorEdge A5000
Indoor
BSS BTS
MS
The BSS radio subsystem contains the following units:

• one Base Station Controller (BSC),
• one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTS),
• one to seven remote transcoders, in one or more transcoder unit (TCU) cabinets,
preferably located on the MSC premises.
These different units are linked together through specific BSS interfaces:
• each BTS is linked to the BSC by an Abis interface,
• the TCUs are linked to the BSC by an Ater interface,
• the A interface links the BSC/TCU pair to the MSC.

Capabilities of a BTS
Traffic Features at the radio interface

Reception Signal processing
DDDDDDDD DDDD DD DD
12345678 1234 56 78
Transmission
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Coding Ciphering
Speech Interleaving
00 00 Q
2 2 - 90° + 90°
0 1
10 10
4 4
01 01
7 7 I
A MESSAGES IS
PENDING. PLEASE
11 11
CONTACT NBR
452 587 65
3 3 GMSK
Demodulation Modulation
Call clearing
Power
Control Measurement
preprocessing
Frequency Handover
Data hopping
Short messages Coupling system L1M (Call sustaining)
Information transmission:
• Speech.
• Data.
• Short messages.
Features at the radio interface

• Signal processing:
- Modulation/demodulation, equalization.
- Ciphering/deciphering.
- Coding/decoding, interleaving/de-interleaving.
• Frequency hopping.
• Coupling system:
- Space diversity (reception diversity).
• Layer 1 management:
- Radio measurements preprocessing
- Handover.
- Power control.
- Call clearing.

Capabilities of a BTS (continue)
Links and Sites optimization Defense

LAPD
LAPD
LAPD
Control and Control and
Switching Switching
Unit A Unit B
Multi-cell LAPD
site concentration
Synchro Synchro
A B
Duplication
(Full multi-drop) DSC

DSC
DSC + DSC
Drop and Insert techniques
COM COM COM COM

1 2 3 4 Time Slot
PCM
n+1 redundancy
Automatic reconfiguration
Links optimization
Links and sites optimization

• Management of multicell sites.
• Drop & insert techniques.
• Remote transcoders (optimization of A and Abis interface dimensioning).
• LAPD signaling channels concentration.
Defense
• The core functions of the BTS are duplicated against failures thank to duplication of
some modules.

Functional Architecture
Antenna
COUPLING SYSTEM Radio

Interface
TRX
(Transceiver Equipment)
MS
BSC
Abis interface BCF
(Base Common Functions)
The Base Transceiver Station BTS can be split into three functional parts or entities:
• one Base Common Functions module (BCF): performing all common functions of the
site,
• coupling system (one per cell),
• one or several transceivers TRX (one per TDMA frame).
These different entities are housed into one or several cabinets, their number depends on
radio channels to be implemented, the type of BTS, and the structure of the site: single-cell
or multi-cell.

Generic Architecture
BTS (site)
TRX n TRX n
Coup syst Coup syst
Coup syst Coup syst

TRX n
Coup syst Coup syst

TRX n-1 TRX n-1 TRX n-1
BSC
TRX 2 TRX 2 TRX 2
TRX 1 TRX 1 TRX 1
BCF
Base cabinet Extension cabinets

A BTS consists of one or more cabinets:

• the cabinet that contains the BCF (plus TRXs and coupling systems) is called Base
cabinet,
• the other cabinet (containing TRXs and coupling systems) is called Extension
cabinet.

BCF
Abis interface
management
Alarms management
Audible
BSC alarm
Fans
BTS GSM time
Power
Signaling supply
concentration
Tempe-
rature Warning
Operation and Maintenance Self-defense
Switch A Switch B
Out of order
In service Synchro Synchro

A B
BCF purpose is:

• Abis interface management.
• GSM time distribution.
• External Alarms.
• Operation & Maintenance.
• Self defense by redundancy of its main units.
• Signaling concentration/ de-concentration.
The BCF manages the information for a site whatever the configuration of this one (Omni or
sectorial).

TRX

Generic Architecture
TRX
TX PA
Coupling
BCF FP system
(Frame Processor)
RX
The TRX is the heart of the BTS.

One TRX is the equipment managing one TDMA, that ’s to say eight physical channels.
It includes four functional parts: TX, RX, FP and PA.
The first generation (S4000,S2000E):
• FP = five boards,
• RX = one module,
• TX + PA = one module.
The second generation (S8000, S2000H&L):
• RX + TX + FP = one module,
• PA = one module.
The third generation (e-cell): TRX = one module.

Transmission Chain
Odd TS RF
Frame TX Modul. Low power Transpos. RF Coupling
BCF Processor Logic Synchro Amplifiers
and IF IF PA system
(GMSK) Transpos. RF
Transpos.
Even TS
FH bus
The transmitter (TX or DRX Radio + PA) handles the following functions:
• Conversion of the bit stream (I and Q) to be transmitted into an Intermediate Frequency
(analogue) GMSK signal.
• Transposition of the GMSK signals onto the frequency band:
- GSM 900: 935-960 MHz,
- GSM 1800 (DCS): 1805-1880 MHz,
- GSM 1900 (PCS): 1930-1990 MHz,
• frequency hopping management, according to the coupling mode: hybrid or cavity,
• final amplification of the radio signal (PA of the TX or PA module) according to the level
of each TS.
Two transposers are necessary: when the first synthesizer processes an even TS, the other
changes the frequency of its local oscillator in order to be able to process the odd TS.
This architecture is particularly necessary when Frequency Hopping is used with hybrid
coupler.

Reception Chain
RX or
Main Path DRX Radio
Main odd TS
Amplifi- A/D Conversion

cation even TS
Frequency
Coupling Transposition Frame
Processor
Diversity system
odd TS
Diversity Path
Amplifi-
cation even TS A/D Conversion
Frequency
Transposition
According to the type of BTS the receivers we have:

• One RX module within the S2000E and S4000.
• The RX part of the DRX Radio board (DRX module) within the S8000.
Each receiver operates one radio TDMA frame and handles the following functions:
• Filtering of the RF signal coming from the RX multi-coupler (splitter) to limit the
noise level in the mixer.
• Pre-amplification of the filtered signals from the frequency band (GSM 900, GSM
1800, GSM 1900).
To allow the Frequency Hopping (at the Time Slot level), the frequency transposition
needs two identical stages (one for odd TS and one for even TS) thus avoid overlap
delay when changing the frequency.
On the other hand, whenever diversity reception is used, the second path provides the
Frame Processor with the samples and the scale factors from the other antenna.
Therefore the system can process the diversity using the Maximum Ratio Combiner
algorithm.

Coupling System
TX Coupler TX Duplexer
(Hybrid or Cavity) Downlink
- 1dB
TX band Duplex
filter shift RX band
filter RX
Uplink RX Splitter
- 1 dB
TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4
Four TRX
There are two kinds of transmission couplers but only one is used in the same BTS:
• Hybrid couplers.
• Cavity couplers.
Hybrid combiner is a broad band coupler enabling the combining of two RF signals
generated by two transmitters in one signal, with a high flexibility in frequency management.
The minimum frequency separation required between TX connected to one coupler is 200
kHz.
The receive coupling is achieved by means of two components:
• the pre-amplifier Low Noise Amplifier or LNA,
• the RX Splitter.
Reception multicoupling or RX Splitter is aimed at pre-amplifying the signal received from
the duplexer, and splitting it into several outputs to drive the receivers. For diversity
purpose, the RX Splitters are duplicated on the diversity receive path.
The duplexer allows the connection of the transmission and reception paths onto a single
antenna.
This device mainly consists of two pass band filters tuned on receive and transmit frequency
bands.
The frequency bands (and the duplex shift) depend on the system: GSM 900, GSM 1800 or
GSM 1900.
It is now generally integrated in the coupler (hybrid or cavity).

BTS Connection Modes
Air
interface
CHAIN
Abis Connection
interface
(single multi-drop)
C
BS
STAR
Connection
LOOP
Connection
MS (full multi-drop)
The BTS provides the interface between the fixed network and the MS.
Abis interface connects the BTS to its BSC:
• PCM links at 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1).
• Star, chain or loop connections.
Radio interface allows communication with MS, depending on the kind of network:
• GSM 900.
• GSM 1800.
• GSM 1900.

Student Notes:

S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families
Section 10
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 S2000/ S4000/ S8000 BTS Families 10-1

Objectives
For each BTS product covered during this lesson you should be able
to:
• Cite at least two main features;

• Indicate the maximum configuration;
• Indicate how the implementation is done for the three functional
entities: Coupling system, TRX and BCF.

Coverage Solution
Capacity
S8000
S8000 Outdoor
S8000
Indoor
S4000
S8006
S2000H
S2000E
S8002
e-cell S2000L
Coverage
For each type of environment Nortel offers a cost effective and adapted solution:
• the S4000 and S2000H, for sparsely populated areas such as rural or highway areas,
• the S4000 and S8000 for suburban and urban areas,
• the S8002 for railways companies,
• the S8006 for street installation,
• the S2000L or the e-cell for outdoor micro-cells and indoor areas with leaky cables.

DRX Based BTS Family
S8000 Outdoor
S8000 Indoor
S8002 Outdoor
S8006 Outdoor
S2000H Outdoor/Indoor
S2000L Outdoor/Indoor

BTS S8000 Outdoor

1 - Overview
■ Fully Integrated self contained cell-site:
• 8 TRXs (DRX + PA) in a Single Cabinet
• Rectifiers, battery back up, cooling and
heating
• 220 Vac main (or 2 x 110 Vac live)
■ Optimized ratio size versus capacity:

• Floorspace: 2 sqm (ie 0.25 m2/TX)
• Footprint: 0.88 sqm
• Cabinet size: 160 x 135 x 65 cm
• Pedestal size: 15 (or 26) x 135 x 112 cm
■ PA TX Power: 30 W
■ RX sensitivity: - 110 dBm
■ Operating temperature range:
- 40 °C to + 50 °C
■ Weight:
• Fully equipped = 415 kg (915 lb)
• Empty = 140 kg (310 lb)
The S8000 Outdoor BTS benefits from the technological and functional developments of the
entire product range including the SMART technology incorporated into the BTS.
This BTS offers a set of features enhancing the Quality of Service and the spectrum
efficiency of the network, such as:
• a standard -110 dBm guaranteed receive sensitivity at the BTS antenna connector
(diversity not included), thus providing a better trade-off between coverage and speech
quality,
• a typical -117 dBm (with diversity),
• full power control range (static and dynamic).

BTS S8000 Outdoor

2 - Cabinet Arrangement
Climatic Unit Battery

( DACS)
Compact BCF module

OEM
Compartment BCF/CBCF Rack
RECAL board
Main AC InterCOnnection
Power
Amplifiers
Shelf DRX Shelf
F type
Converters AC Mains box
(Power Supply)
RX Splitters
RF Combiners Battery Switch
Shelf
AC/DC
Converters
COMbiners
InterCOnnection DC Power Supply Control
The main compartment is divided into two parts: left and right.
The left part includes the RF devices located on three main shelves:
• OEM (to custom),
• Power Amplifiers (up to eight), and alarm board ALCO or RECAL (with CBCF),
• RF combiners (up to six H2D or three H4D) and F type converters (up to two).
The right part includes:

• BCF or CBCF module,
• DRX modules (up to eight),
• RX splitters (up to six),
• Power Supplies modules: AC/DC converters and DC control board,
• Main AC Power Supply module.

BCF Module (First Version)

Shelf Physical Description
CSWM
PCMI GTW DSC SYNC
Power
PCMI PCMI PCMI GTW GTW CSWM CSWM DSC DSC DSC DSC SYNC SYNC Supply
Converters
48 V DC / 5 V DC
Power
Supply
CoMmanD
Maximum configuration is the following for a stand alone S8000 BTS operating in duplex
mode:
• 2 CSWM boards (switch and O&M functions),
• 2 GTW boards (Gateway for S4000/S8000 adaptations),
• 3 PCMI boards (Abis interface),
• 4 DSC boards (concentration),
• 2 SYNC boards,
• 3 DC-DC power converters from -48 V,
• 1 PSCMD board (Power Supply CoMmanD).
This BCF is housed in a single shelf (with its own back panel), whose size is the following:
height = 270 mm (6 U), width = 520 mm, depth = 300 mm.

Compact BCF Module (Second Version)

1 - Physical view
100 mm
CMCF
boards BCFICO board
300 mm
CPCMI
board
The CBCF (Compact BCF) is composed of two parts:

• the CBCF module: one per site,
• the RECAL board (REmote Control Alarm): one per cabinet.
The CBCF module is composed of a back plane CBP (Compact Back Plane) and six
boards:
• one BCFICO board (BCF InterCOnnection),
• three CPCMI boards (Compact PCM Interface),
• two CMCF boards (Compact Main Common Function).
These six boards can be removed from the module.

Compact BCF Module (Second Version)

2 - Benefits
CBCF
BCF
Enhanced Performances
Quick installation into both S8000 Indoor and Outdoor cabinets.
The CBCF module manages:

• Abis PCMs interfacing,
• signaling (LAPD) Concentration and Routing functions,
• BTS synchronization.
The RECAL board is in charge of collecting and managing internal and external alarms,
inside main and extension cabinets.
This new BCF provides all features of the actual BCF (2G) with several improvements:
duplex, upgrade...

S8000 TRX
TRX
DRX
DRX Logic DRX Radio
PA
TX TX Driver
Logic
BCF Coupling
System
Frame Processor RX Main
(AMNU + DCU8) RX Diversity
The DRX is the module of the S8000/8002/8006 and S2000H&L BTSs, which includes:
• the Frame Processor,
• the receiver RX,
• the TX driver,
• the power supply.
The necessary amplification for transmission is achieved by a separate Power Amplifier
(PA).
The use of DRX by separating the TX Power Amplifier (PA) from the rest of the transmit
chain, allows the concept of different transmission power classes (S2000H&L).

S8000 Coupling
1 TRX 2 TRX
Duplex. Main Div. Duplex. Duplex. Main Div. Duplex. 2 antennas per cell
LNA LNA LNA LNA
PA PA PA
1 Splitter Splitter
1 Splitter Splitter
2
Combiner Insertion
Type Loss
3 TRX 4 TRX
Main Main
H2D
Div. H2D H2D
Div. H2D Dp - 1 dB
LNA LNA LNA LNA H2D - 4.5 dB
PA PA PA PA PA PA PA
Splitter Splitter H4D - 8 dB
1 2 3 1 2 Splitter Splitter 3 4
Main 5 - 8 TRX Div.

H4D H4D
LNA LNA
PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA
1 2 3 4 Splitter Splitter Splitter Splitter 5 6 7 8
In the S8000 the different coupling devices are integrated in the RF combiner module.
There are two kinds of Hybrid transmission couplers:
• two ways couplers (one stage = -3.5 dB),
• four ways couplers (two stage = -7 dB).
There are three kinds of RF Combiners:

• Hybrid couplers 2 ways and Duplexer (H2D): up to 2 TRXs (4 TRXs per cell),
• Hybrid couplers 4 ways and Duplexer (H4D): up to 4 TRXs (8 TRXs per cell),
• Duplexer only (Dp): 1 TRX (2 TRXs per cell).
Reception multicoupling is aimed at pre-amplifying the signal received from the duplexer,
and splitting it into several outputs to drive the DRX receivers.
The receive coupling is achieved by means of two components:
• the LNA Splitter, inserted into the RF Combiner,
• the RX Splitter: located into a specific shelf, below the DRX shelf.

BTS S8000 Indoor

Physical presentation
■ Compact packaging:
• 8 TRXs (DRX + PA) in each cabinet
• Compact BCF integrated in the first cabinet

■ Optimized ratio size versus capacity:
• Floorspace: 2 x 0.90 m2
• Cabinet size = 170 x 75 x 45 cm (72 l / TRX)
■ Power Supply: - 48 V DC
■ PA TX Power: 30 W
■ Extended operating temperature range:
• - 5 °C to + 45 °C
■ Cabinet weight:
• Fully equipped = 250 kg
• Empty (pre-cabled) = 110 kg
The S8000 Indoor BTS can be housed in one to three cabinets.

The number of cabinets depends on the required capacity:
For a capacity not exceeding 8 TRXs, only one cabinet is required.
For capacities of over 8 TRXs, one or two additional cabinets are required.
This Indoor BTS is designed to be operational when the external ambient air temperature is
in a range of 0 °C to +45 °C.
When switched on, it operates in an external ambient air temperature range of
-5 °C to +45 °C, with a relative humidity level of 5% to 95%.

Exercise

Draw a Coupling system for a S8000 BTS O2 and a O3

BTS S8002
1 - Overview
■ Designed for railways applications

(outdoor)
■ PA TX Power: 45 dBm
■ Standard configuration: O2
■ Dimensions:
• Height: 140 cm
• Width : 100 cm
• Depth : 54 cm
- 40 °C to + 50 °C
■ Weight: 240 kg
■ Battery back-up: 2 hours
■ User compartment: 6 U
The S8002 BTS is an optimized O2 product designed for railways applications.

Initially dedicated to the Railways companies in R-GSM band, it shall be possible to provide
the S8002 in other frequency bands.
Technical requirements:
• standard O2 configuration for outdoor deployment,
• environmental performances equal or better than current S8000,
• re-using common S8000 equipment: CBCF, DRX, PA, RX splitter, rectifiers,
• user compartment (6 U).
External temperature: -40 °C to +50 °C; Internal temperature: +5 °C to +60 °C
Coupling: duplexer only
Output power: 45 dBm
Receive sensitivity: -110 dBm
Battery backup: two hours
Cooling system by forced ventilation
All external cables shall be connected from below.

BTS S8002
2 - Description
Cooling system CDACS

RX Splitters DRX modules
Duplexers
CBCF
Power Amplifiers User compartment

6U
F type
Power Supply RECAL board
Rectifiers
C-AC Main
S8000 equipment:
• Compact BCF,
• RECAL board,
• DRX module (R-GSM),
• Power Amplifier,
• RF Combiner,
• RX splitter,
• rectifiers.
Specific S8002 equipment:
• Outdoor cabinet,
• CDACS cooling system,
• DRX-Combiner interconnection board,
• C-AC Mains (230 V AC 50/60 Hz),
• PA-type F converter interconnection module,
• cabling.

S8006 Street Deployable

1 - Overview
New from V10.4 Same modules as in S8000
■ Additional coverage (streets,

roads, highways, roof tops indoor)
■ Configurations:
• standard: O6 and S222

• optional: S42 and S33
■ PA TX Power: 45 dBm
- 40 °C to + 50 °C
■ Power Supply: 220 V AC
■ Dimensions:
• Height: 130 cm
• Width: 130 cm
• Depth: 50 cm
■ Weight: 350 kg
The S8006 BTS is a six TRXs product designed for installation along streets and roads
without asking for building permits.
Initially dedicated to the GSM 1800 band (V10.4), it shall be possible to provide the S8006
in other frequency bands.
Technical requirements:
• O6, S222, S33 and S42 configurations for outdoor deployment,
• environmental performances equal or better than current S8000,
• diversity radio path in standard,
• re-using common S8000 equipment: CBCF, DRX, PA, RX splitter, rectifiers.
External temperature:
• standard: - 20 °C to + 35 °C,
• optional: - 33 °C to + 45 °C.
Internal temperature: + 5 °C to + 60 °C
Coupling: duplexer only and hybrid duplexer
Output power = 45 dBm
Receive sensitivity = - 110 dBm
Powered by 230 V AC
Cooling system by forced ventilation
All external cables shall be connected from below.

S8006 Street Deployable

2 - Description
Cooling system
DACS
C-PA interconnection
(PA, RECAL,
Power
F power supply) interconnection
RECAL board (CBCF, RECAL, User)
Power Amplifiers
CMCF
CMCF
DRX modules
CPCMIE1
CPCMIE1
F type
Power Supply
1
0
3
2
CBCF
RX Splitters
RF Combiners C-AC Main Box
PCU
Rectifiers
Power
COMbiners Controller
InterCOnnection Unit
The S8006 BTS re-uses as much as possible S8000 BTS components.

S8000 equipment:
• Compact BCF,
• RECAL board,
• DRX module,
• Power Amplifier,
• RF Combiner,
• RX splitter,
• rectifiers 220 V AC to -48 V DC (MITRA type only),
• converters - 48 V to -15 V/+15 V for LNA splitters (F type).
Specific S8006 equipment:
• Outdoor cabinet,
• CDACS cooling system,
• Main ICO (digital interconnection board between DRX, PA, CBCF, RECAL and
Duplexers),
• C-AC Mains box (230 V AC 50/60 Hz),
• POWER ICO board (48 V distribution for CBCF, User rack and RECAL board),
• C-PA ICO module (PA-type F converters interconnection),
• cabling.

BTS S2000L (Low Power)

Physical Overview
Fully Integrated self contained cell-site

• 2 TRX (DRX+PA) in the Main Cabinet
• Rectifiers, battery back up, heating
• 220 V/110 V AC main or - 48 V DC (Indoor)

• Lightning protection and battery backup
Common package for Indoor and Outdoor
Front access for easy maintenance
PA TX Power: 2.5 W
RX Sensitivity: - 104 dBm
Operating temperature range:
• - 40 °C to + 50 °C
• no fans, natural convection
Weight = 23 kg max for each part
Optional internal antennas
This product is specially designed for micro-cellular application.

It can be installed inside a building or outside and can be easily wall mounted by a single
man.
The S2000L BTS is optimized for microcell applications where cell sizes are generally small
thereby requiring lower transmit power capability. The applications can range from small
cells inside buildings for coverage improvement to outdoor microcells for traffic capacity
enhancement.
Some examples of S2000L applications are:
• Situated in building coverage for offices or entire floors.
• Shopping centers.
• Train stations and airports.
• Pedestrian tunnels and metro platforms.
• Underlay microcells in hierarchical multi-layer networks.
To meet this wide range of application needs the S2000L is equipped with powerful
multilayer handover algorithms and features for micro-cellular applications.

BTS S2000L (Low Power)

Base Unit
Mounting Plate
DRX
Modules Power
Supply
SBCF
Unit DRX and
modules PSU
Front Cover SBCF modules Main Module
Lock S2000
IN SERVICE I&C
Terminal
I&C Terminal
Cable Cover Low Power
RF Module
Hinge
Ant 1 Ant 2
Front
The Base unit of the S2000L is composed of:

• the Main module,
• the Low Power Radio Frequency or LPRF module.
These two modules are attached to the mounting plate and protected by the two parts front
cover.
The cable cover is supported at the bottom of the mounting plate with two hinges and on
the cosmetic panel with a lock.
The mounting plate provides a security barrier by limiting access to the rear, and acts as a
sun shield for the rear and sides of housing.
The Main module incorporates all the electronics common to the High and Low power
S2000 BTS, creating a modular design for the BTS.
This module comprises:
• the Small Base Common Functions or SBCF module,
• one or two DRX modules,
• the Power Supply Unit,
• the Connector Field,
• the I&C terminal.
The connector field provides connection to the rest of the BTS, as well as connections to
extension module and to the external Battery and Interface Module or customer interface,
via T1 or E1 connections, alarms and AC/DC power.

BTS S2000H (High Power)
2 TRXs capacity
• O1 (or O1E/1900), O2, S11, expandable to O4
PA TX power: 20 W (masthead)
RX sensitivity: -109.5 dBm
Remoteable masthead RF Module

• Base Unit located for easy access
• HPRF Module remoteable to 100 m
• Up to 60 dBm EIRP
• Maximizes coverage
Operating temperature range: - 40 °C to + 50 °C
Battery and Interface Module (optional)
with battery backup and lightning protection
Base Unit: 74 x 54 x 20 cm - 34 kg
HPRF Module: 74 x 27 x 31 cm - 19.5 kg
Power Supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
DC 48 V (battery back-up)
The S2000H, with high power output transmission is ideally suited for use to provide
macrocell coverage from locations where suitable sites for larger BTSs cannot be found.
Because of the remotely High Power RF Module (HPRF) architecture it is a particularly
powerful BTS platform for providing highway coverage while minimizing the roll-out time.
Some other application examples for the S2000H include the following:
• Rural and low traffic suburban areas.
• In-building and metro tunnel coverage where high power is required to drive long
feeders.
The HPRF unit is connected to the Base Unit through a Data/DC Power cable and RF
cables. Each Data/DC Power Cable supports up to two HPRF Modules.
The same BTS package may be deployed both in indoor and outdoor environments. The
S2000H uses passive air convection cooling. This eliminates the need for mechanical
cooling fans and their associated noise issues.

Enhanced Packaging

HP RF Module and Base Unit
The Main and HP RF modules are merged into one package, eliminating internal cabling
and internal assembling.
Faster I&C phase (40% less time).
Size and weight are lower: only one cabinet version (height = 65 cm).
External D-Sub technology connectors are replaced by circular connectors for external
cables: AC, Abis/Alarms and DC.
Components suppressed:
• SBCF and UVGA heatsink,
• RF jumpers.
The ground bar is now integrated into the cabinet,
This new packaging insures backward/forward installation compatibility with First one and
allows these features:
• extension unit, to obtain O4 configuration,
• DC main -48 V.

High Power RF Module
Heatsinks
R
X
T
F X Heat Pipes
Front panel i
l P
t A
e
r
L
N
A
D
u
p
l
e
x
e
Lock r
Cable cover
Mounting
plate
Hinge
The High Power RF module consists of one Power Amplifier PA, one Low Noise Amplifier
LNA and a Duplexer, plus optional devices: an extra LNA and a RX filter (such as the RX
path of the duplexer) for supporting a single transceiver with receive diversity.
The High Power RF module is located remotely, up to 100 m cable from the Main module.
The PA module makes use of Heat Pipe technology to efficially transfer heat away from hot
areas in the design of the heatsink.
Operating Temperature: -40 °C to +50 °C.
Two types of HPRF Modules are available. A Single-Rx HPRF is used in configurations with
2 TRXs per cell, and a Dual-Rx HPRF is used in configurations with 1 TRX per cell such as
O1 and S11.
• The Single-Rx HPRF consists of 1 PA, 1 LNA and duplexer coupling. Each HPRF
Module is connected to 1 external antenna. Diversity reception is inherently provided
because there are two TRX per cell.
• The Dual-Rx HPRF consists of 1 PA, 2 LNAs, duplexer coupling and an extra receive
filter. Each HPRF Module is connected to 2 external antennas to provide reception
diversity.

S8000 Down-link
Exercise: Draw the downlink speech path through the S8000 modules.
CBCF DRX Coupling

CMCF DRX Logic
CTRL_PA System
CMCF
TX
CPCMI Switching Logic

To/ PA
from
CPCMI TX Driver
BSC RF
CPCMI Combiner
PCM S
Interface DRX Radio p
Frame l
i
Private Processor RX Main t
PCM bus
RX Diversity S
p
Control, l
Signal.Concentr. i
t
Synchronization
Management
RECAL COMICO
Alarms
Concentration COMbiner InterCOnection

S8000 Up-link
Exercise: Draw the uplink speech path through the S8000 BTS modules.
CBCF DRX Coupling

CMCF DRX Logic
CTRL_PA System
CMCF
TX
CPCMI Switching Logic

To/ PA
from
CPCMI TX Driver
BSC RF
CPCMI Combiner
PCM S
Interface DRX Radio p
Frame l
i
Private Processor RX Main t
PCM bus
RX Diversity S
p
Control, l
Signal.Concentr. i
t
Synchronization
Management
RECAL COMICO
Alarms
Concentration COMbiner InterCOnection

BTS e-cell

BTS e-cell
1 - Overview
New from V12 ■ Fully configured (Smart card configurable)

■ Easy deployment & maintenance
■ Compact outdoor cabinet:
• 62 x 26 x 19 cm (31 liters)
• 19 kg (29 kg with PSU and battery)

■ Power Supply: - 48 V DC or 110/220 V AC
■ TX Power: 1 W guaranteed (2 W max)
■ RX sensitivity: -104 dBm (GSM),
■ Integrated radio site including optional:
Battery, Lightning protection, PSU,
■ EDGE hardware compliant
■ Capacity: 2 TRXs per cabinet, extendible to
4 TRXs:
• Omni O4 in 2 cabinets
• Dualband O2_2
■ Temperature range: - 40 °C to + 50 °C
■ Integrated antenna (optional)
This new e-cell BTS is a small, compact BTS designed for outdoor micro-cellular
applications and in-building deployment.
The typical configuration is an O2, extendible to O4 using an extension cabinet.
The e-cell is easy to install and maintain and can be pole or wall mounted, hence reducing
operating and site costs.
Main characteristics:
• TX power: 1 W guaranteed (2 W max),
• RX sensitivity = - 104 dBm,
• perfectly quiet (no fan),
• four external protected alarms,
This BTS is fully compatible with existing Nortel GSM product line.

BTS e-cell
2 - Radio Cabinet: Block Diagram
Radio
Radio
Cabinet modules Hybrid
coupler Duplexer
LPA
LNA-
PA PA splitter
Radio board
(pRDRX)
External Converters and

Logic board
interface interfaces
(pLDRX)
(pPCM) (PSL)
External
Connections
Private External LED - 48 V DC Ethernet. Antenna
PCM PCM Smart card
Except the miscellaneous functions, all functional equipment is located inside a standalone
box so called Radio cabinet.
Electronic devices are made of three different subsets:
• radio board which deals with Intermediate Frequency and Radio Frequency low power
signals,
• logic boards which deals with digital signals,
• radio modules which deal with other RF signals: LPAs, LNA-diplexer, antenna.
A new electronic unit, able to process two TDMAs and the BCF function, is composed of
two boards:
• pLDRX or Logic board,
• pRDRX or Radio board.

S2000E/S4000 Family
S4000 Indoor
S4000 Outdoor
S4000 Smart Outdoor
S2000E Indoor/Outdoor

BTS S4000 Indoor

1 - Overview
■ High capacity - Dense traffic

■ Small footprint (0.045 m2 per TRX)

■ 4 TRXs modularity
■ Up to 24 TRXs / site (8 Omni, S3-888)
■ Multiple coupling options:
• Duplexer
• Integrated hybrid couplers and duplexer
• Remote Tunable Cavities
■ PA TX power: 35 W (900), 30 W (1800), 20 W
(1900)
■ Cabinet dimensions: 220 x 60 x 30 cm
The S4000 Indoor BTS consists of one or more cabinets, depending on the number of radio
channels to be implemented and the structure of the site: single-cell (omnidirectional) or
multi-cell (sectorial).
Two types of cabinet are available:
• Base: omni/sect 1 (one per site) which serves either omnidirectional functions or master
sectorial functions.
• Extension: omni, sector 2, sector 3, which serve slave sectorial functions and extension
for sector capacity.
BCF modules are only in the base cabinet:
• Redundant CSW modules (CSW1 + CSW2), DTI and DCC boards housed in the CSU
shelf.
• Redundant SYN boards.
There is one ALAT board per cabinet.
Up to four FP modules (one MNU and four DCU) are housed in the same shelf.
The different parts of a TRX module are vertically grouped: FP module, receiver Rx, power
supply PSU and transmitter Tx.
A S4000 Indoor BTS can be composed of up to six cabinets.
This configuration is reachable only in multisectorial sites, (3 or 6).
For omnisectorial site, the maximal configuration consists of two cabinets (O8 with cavity
coupling).

BTS S4000 Indoor

2 - Example of Trisectorial Site (6S888)
cell cell cell

1 2 3
ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2 ANTENNA 1 ANTENNA 2

TX1 to TX4 TX5 - 8 TX1 to TX4 TX5 - 8 TX1 to TX4 TX5 - 8

+ MAIN RX + DIVERSITY RX + MAIN RX + DIVERSITY RX + MAIN RX + DIVERSITY RX
TX coupler TX coupler TX coupler TX coupler TX coupler TX coupler
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/ PS/
TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX TRX
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
PS/CC
RX - RX - RX - RX - RX - RX -
ALAT
ALAT
ALAT
ALAT
ALAT
ALAT
SYN
SYN
RX - RX - RX - RX - RX - RX -
SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER
SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER
DIVERSITY DIVERSITY DIVERSITY DIVERSITY DIVERSITY DIVERSITY
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP FP
PS/CC
PS/CC
CSU RACK
Base cabinet
Extension cabinets
A S4000 Indoor BTS can be composed of up to six cabinets.

This configuration is reachable only in multisectorial sites, (3 or 6).
For omnisectorial site, the maximal configuration consists of two cabinets (O8 with cavity
coupling).

BTS S4000 Outdoor

1 - Overview
■ Medium capacity
■ Compact outdoor cabinet:
• 1.42 x 1.53 x 0.52 m
• 390 kg
■ Integrated radio site including:

• Rectifiers, 2 Batteries, Heat exchanger
• Optional integrated microwave terminal
■ Capacity:
• Base cabinet: 3 TRXs
• Extension cabinet: 4 TRXs
• Possible configurations:
– Omni 3 TRXs or up to 3 sectors, 1 TRX
per sector (S111) in base Cabinet
– 7 TRXs in 2 Cabinets S223
■ PA TX Power: 25 W (900), 20 W (1800/1900)
■ Operating temperature range: - 33 °C to + 45 °C
S4000 Outdoor is an outdoor BTS which supports up to three cells configurations:

• Omnidirectional BTS with one to three TRX in a single cabinet.
• Bisectorial BTS with one or two TRX in two cabinets.
• Three sectorial BTS with up to three (Base) or four (Extension) TRX in two cabinets.
S4000 Outdoor is made up of two cabinets back to wall installable and fully equipped.
Temperature range: -33 °C to +45 °C.

BTS S4000 Outdoor

2 - Example of S322 Configuration
BTS BTS
FP FP FP FP FP FP FP
S S
D D M D D D DM D D D DM D D D D MD D D DM D D D D M D D D DM D D
TX C C N C C C CN C C TX TX C CN C C
Y Y
TX TX TX C C N C C C CN C C TX
N N C C N C C C CN C C
U U U U U U UU U U U UU U U U U U U U U UU U U U U U U U U UU U U
O O
PS/B PS/B
Cooling unit Cooling unit Cooling unit Cooling unit
DUPLEXERDUPLEXER DUPLEXER ADD C CCC DD DUPLEXERDUPLEXER DUPLEXERDUPLEXER

OR OR OR L C C S SS S T T OR OR OR OR
HYBRID HYBRID HYBRID A C C W WW W I I
HYBRID HYBRID HYBRID HYBRID
DUPLEXERDUPLEXER DUPLEXER T 1 22 1
O
DUPLEXERDUPLEXER DUPLEXERDUPLEXER
PS/A PS/A PS/A PS/A PS/A PS/A PS/A
CSUC
SPLITTER RXD RXD SPLITTER SPLITTER RXD SPLITTER RXD RXD SPLITTER SPLITTER RXD RXD SPLITTER
FILLING PLATE Filling

FILLING Plate
PLATE FILLING PLATE FILLING PLATE
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER RADIO LINK EQUIPMENT

Up to 6 meters RECTIFIER RECTIFIER
REC1 REC2 RLE because of REC1
FILLING PLATE
REC2
synchro
Base Cabinet Extension Cabinet
Base cabinet contains BCF with:

• Duplicated switching module (CSW1 + CSW2).
• Two boards DCC (1+1).
• Two boards DTI (1+1 or drop and insert configuration).
• One board ALATO (Power supplies, rectifiers, cooling unit, temperature, smoke, low
battery, open door alarms).
• Two boards SYNO (duplicated).
• Up to three TRXs.
Each extension cabinet contains:
• Up to four TRXs.
Specific boards and equipment are:

• ALATO: internal alarms for Base cabinet and for Extension cabinet.
• SYNC (1+1).
• RX-Splitter (2 x 4): dual splitter two paths.
• RX-Splitter (4 + 1): mono splitter (four outputs and one extension which is not used).
• Coupling devices (Duplexer or 2 Tx Hybrid combiners with duplexer) (H2D).

BTS S2000E Indoor/Outdoor

1 - Overview
■ Rapid & low cost coverage at low capacity

■ Additional coverage (tunnels, highways,
indoor)
■ 1 TRX per cabinet up to 2 TRXs with

extension cabinet
■ High RF Power:
• GSM 900: 25 W
• GSM 1800/1900: 20 W
■ Dimensions: 78 x 63 x 30 cm
■ Weight: 50 kg including mounting elements
■ Easy maintenance & repair
(same modules as in S4000)
■ Outdoor version
The S2000E is an evolution of the S4000 Indoor BTS with only one TRX per cabinet,
designed for indoor installation, such as microcell or tunnel coverage and outdoor
installation.
Cabinet is of compact dimensions and of low mass
(0.775 m x 0.625 m x 0.3 m and 50 kg including mounting elements).
It has low acoustic noise output.
It provides wall or floor mounting.
It uses the standard modules, but:
• new modules have been designed: specific synchronization (SYNO) and alarm
concentration (ALATO) boards are used,
• CSW module (control and switching matrix boards) is not duplicated,
• new Power Supply unit AC and fan units,
• the RX-Splitter is a dual one with one RF input and two outputs,
• two DTI boards allows Drop and Insert functionality: ten S2000E (Micro) BTS on a
single PCM link.
2 TRXs configurations (2 cabinets) are available.
A retrofit procedure allows to expand already installed S2000E Indoor Base cabinet with
Extension cabinet.

BTS S2000E Indoor/Outdoor

2 - Two Cabinets Configuration
FH out PCM0 O&M PCM1 GSM Abis FH out PCM0 O&M PCM1 GSM Abis
M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M1 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M1
RF out 13MHz RF out

A A
C C
TX DCU DCUMNU DCU DCU L DCC S S DTI DTI TX
DCU DCUMNUDCUDCU L
A W W A
SYNO T
T 1 2
TX TX
ANT
O ANT O
DUPLEXER DUPLEXER
RX RX
cooling unit cooling unit

Up to 1.5 meters
Power Power Power Power Power Power Power

Power
RX supply supply supply supply RX supply supply supply supply
RX - 12V/5A -12V/2.5A 24V/5A RX - 12V/5A -12V/2.5A 24V/5A 5V/32A
Splitter 5V/12A 5V/32A Splitter 5V/12A
AC DISTRIBUTION AC DISTRIBUTION
Base Cabinet Extension Cabinet
Indoor S2000E
• The Indoor S2000E BTS can be wall mounted. It allows an easy installation with a fully-
equipped and tested package.
• In the 1 TRX configuration, all connections (electrical and RF cables, Abis and alarm
connectors) are made at the bottom of the cabinet.
• In the 2 TRXs configuration, addition inter-cabinet cabling is required. The BTS Bus extensions
are made through the top of the cabinets.
• The use of receive diversity requires two inter-cabinet RF cables for carrying the main and
diversity signals.
• Cable covers (2 per cabinet) are provided for protecting the inter-cabinet and external cable
entries.
• The two cabinets may be separated by a distance of up to 1.5 meters measured between
adjacent edges of the cabinets.
Outdoor S2000E
• The Outdoor S2000E cabinet provides the internal modules with environmental,
electromagnetic and physical protection. This makes it suitable for outdoor deployment. It uses
the same modules as the Indoor S2000E BTS, which eliminates the need to provide separate
sets of spares for maintenance purposes.
• Each Outdoor S2000E BTS consists of a radio equipment cabinet plus an environmental
control system. The environmental control system is comprised of heaters, fans, heat
exchangers, an electronic control unit and a DC power supply unit (PSU).
• The Outdoor S2000E BTS can be wall-, pole- or mast-mounted, via an "H" frame, similar to
what is used for the indoor version. When mounted side-by-side, an inter-cabinet spacing of 30
cm is required. The maximum inter-cabinet spacing is up to 1.15 meters depending on the
mounting and cabling arrangement.

Dual-Band Configurations
Integrated BSS with dual band S8000 BTS
➨ BTS manage cells of the two bands

Share common functions (BCF)
Same footprint
MSC Reduced handover duration
BSC 1 BSC 2
OMC-R 900/1800 900/1800
BTS BTS BTS BTS BTS

900 900 900 1800 900
BTS BTS BTS

900/1800 900/1800 900/1800
Dual band S8000 BTS are BTS in which the same BCF manages the two bands.
The currently supported combination, concerns P-GSM (GSM 900 Primary) and GSM 1800
bands.
It is possible to manage mono band and dual band cabinets.
Advantages of this configuration are:
• important place gain, for example:
- for a BTS S444_444, 3 cabinets are sufficient,
- 4 cabinets are necessary for the association (equivalent in capacity) of a BTS S444
900 and a BTS S444 1800,
• possibility to make synchronous handover between the two frequency bands,
• reduction of transmission costs on the Abis interface:
- a S444 900 and a S444 1800 require 3 LAPD each on the
Abis interface = 6 LAPD in total,
- a S444_444 requires only 3 LAPD in total.

BTS Configuration Table

Maximum Configurations and Transmit Power
BTS
type S4000 S4000 S4000 S2000E S2000E S8000 S8000 S8002 S8006
Indoor Outdoor Smart Indoor Outdoor Outdoor S2000L S2000H e-cell
Band Indoor Outdoor Outdoor
25 / 35 W 25 W 25 W 25 W O8 30 W O8 30 W 30 W 2.5 W 20 W 1W
2O8 2O16 2O16 O1E O2
O3 O1 O2 O2 2O4
2S323 S44 S44 2O4

900 2S222 2O2
2O2 S422 S422 O2 2O4 2O2_2 2O2_2
3S444
2S34 3S888 3S888 2O2_2 S11
6S888 6S161616 6S161616 2S22
2S2_2
20 / 30 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 30 W 30 W 30 W 2.5 W 20 W 1W
O8 O8 O1E O2
2O8 O3 O6 O2
1800 3S444
O1 2O2
2O16 2O16
S42
O2 2O4
2S222 S44 S44 2O4 2O4 2O2_2
2O2 S33 2O2_2
6S888 2S34 S422 S422 2O2_2
3S888 3S888 S222 S11
2S22
6S161616 6S161616 2S2_2
20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 30 W 30 W 2.5 W 20 W 1W
O8 O8 O1E O2
O3 O1
1900 2O8 1S111 2O16 2O16 O2 2O4
2S222 2O2 O2
3S444 2S222 2O2 S44 S44 S11
2S34 S422 S422
3S888 3S888
6S161616 6S161616
Nominal power at TX (PA) output

O1E = O1 Extendible with two DRX
2O2_2 = dual band 900_1800
6S161616 = From V14
Each type of BTS product consists of one or several TRX modules and one BCF module
housed in one or more cabinets.
The name of the BTS, such as 3S444, means:
• 3 = three cabinets per site,
• S = Sectorial (O = Omnidirectional),
• 444 = three sectors of four TRXs each.
When more than one cabinet is necessary, the first cabinet, so called Base cabinet houses
the BCF entity.
The typical TX power depends on the type of BTS, the frequency band and the coupling:
• S4000 Indoor: 35 W (900), 30 W (1800) or 20 W (1900).
• S4000 Outdoor and S2000E: 25 W (900) or 20 W (1800 and 1900),
• S8000 Outdoor and Indoor, S8002, and S8006: 30 W,
• S2000L: 2.5 W, and S2000H: 20 W,
• e-cell: 1 W.

Student Notes:

Student Notes:

Base Station Controller Functions
Section 11
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Base Station Controller Functions 11-1

Objectives

• Show the generic architecture of the BSC.
• Relate the functions that BSC performs.

BSC in the GSM Network
MSC
Radio
TCU Interface
A Interface
S2000H&L
NSS BTS
Ater Interface

BSC Outdoor
OMC-R BTS
Radio
Interface
OMN Interface
Sun
S8000
StorEdge A5000
Indoor
BSS BTS
MS
The BSS radio subsystem contains the following units:

• one Base Station Controller (BSC),
• one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTS),
• one to seven remote transcoders, in one or more transcoder unit (TCU) cabinets,
preferably located on the MSC premises.
These different units are linked together through specific BSS interfaces:
• each BTS is linked to the BSC by an Abis interface,
• the TCUs are linked to the BSC by an Ater interface,
• the A interface links the BSC/TCU pair to the MSC.

BSC Functions
1 - Basic Functions
Radio Call Processing
BTS
MSC
BTS
Routing
BTS
BTS
Traffic Concentration SMS-CB

Management
Radio CAUTION: CRASH

ON E12 HIGHWAY
Resources
Management
The basic functions of the BSC are the followings:

• radio call processing:
- set-up/release of terrestrial & radio links,
- channel switching between MSC and BTS,
• radio resources management:

- radio access processing,
- radio channel allocation (traffic and signaling),
- radio channel operational states monitoring,
• traffic concentration management for reducing of transmission costs which allows to

concentrate and reduce the number of links by using the "chain" (drop and insert) or
"loop" configuration instead of the "star" configuration,
• Short Message Service - Cell Broadcast management:

- broadcasts short messages defined at OMC-R towards target cell.

BSC Functions
2 - O&M Functions
OMC-R Interface Management
Data +
Software
X.25
BTS and TCU Management BSC Self- Defence
Shut down Control and Control and

Switching Switching
Chain A Chain B
Active Passive
Start up
Supervision Observation
The main O&M functions of the BSC are the following:

• OSS Interface management which consists of:
- the link management with OMC-R,
- providing the services requested by the OMC-R,
- storing the BSS configuration data: software storage and distribution among the
various entities of BSS,
• BTS and TCU management:
- initialization,
- configuration and reconfiguration,
- software downloading,
- supervision,
- observations,
• BSC self-defence through redundancy and restart mechanisms.

Signaling in the BSS
OMC-R
X.25
Abis Ater A
BTS BSC TCU MSC
LAPD LAPD
OML OML
LAPD
RSL
CCS7
Signaling messages are exchanged between the different Network entities:

• LAPD-OML between BTS and BSC,
• LAPD-OML between BSC and TCU,
• LAPD-RSL between BTS and BSC,
• CCS7 messages between BSC and MSC are switched by the TCU, but remain
transparent to it.

Generic Architecture of the BSC
Central Processing Unit

BSC
X.25
Controller To OMC-R
Hard
Disk
=
Processors X.25
Control BTS TCU MSC

bus Signaling Signaling Signaling
TCU
BTS Signaling
Signaling
To BTSs TS
TS
PCM MSC PCM To TCU
Signaling
Controller TS Controller and MSC
Switching
Traffic Matrix Traffic
TS TS
The generic BSC architecture mainly consists of a switching matrix, a processing unit, and
trunk controllers (PCM and X.25).
The BSC performs Radio Resource through switching matrix, and trunk controllers.
Here the main functions are to establish and release radio resource in response to mobiles
and MSC requests, and also the intra-BSC handover of the mobiles.
Three types of signaling can be transported on the Ater interface:
• the LAPD signaling for the control of the remote transcoders TCU,
• the CCITT #7 signaling with the MSC,
• the X.25 signaling with the OMC-R.
The BSC downloads new software releases from the OMC-R throughout the X.25 interface.
Previous software code and other parameters from BTSs are backed up in the hard disk of
the BSC.

BSC OMC-R Connection Options
X.25
Modem OMC-R
X.25 Server
Modem
X.25 Switch
X.25 Network DPN 100
OMN
Interface
X.25 X.25
Modem Modem MSC
BSC A Interface
TCU
Or
Ater Interface
TCU
The BSC can be connected to the Radio Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC-R)
through an X.25 packet data network (1) or through the A interface (2).
When connecting the BSC to the OMC-R via the A interface, an X.25 packet switch with
multiple PCM and RS 449 ports has to be used.
In both types of connections the X.25 connection with the OMC-R is duplicated for
redundancy.

Student Notes:

Student Notes:

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Section 12
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family 12-1

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Objectives

• Draw the two BSC cabinets and the main modules they contain;
• Indicate the essential differences between BSC 12000 and BSC

6000 and its consequences;
• Explain how the maximum number of radio sites can be
reached.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC
Equipment Control
Cabinet Cabinet
BSC always consists of two cabinets equipped :

• the Control cabinet,
• the Equipment cabinet.
Each cabinet is equipped according to the needed capacity.
The Control cabinet contains the processing core which manages the overall BSC
operations, including the equipment cabinet operations, and insures the communication with
the Radio Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC-R).
There are two identical processing cores, running in duplex mode (active/standby).
The Equipment cabinet contains:
• the switching matrix,
• several interface modules,
• the PCM links interfaces.
There are two identical switching matrix, running in duplex mode (active/standby).

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC
Characteristics
Dimensions and weight
Height: 200 cm (6’7” ap.)
Width: 78 cm (2’7” ap.)
Depth: 60 cm (2’ ap.)

Weight: < 270 kg (595 lbs)
Point loading: maximum 100 kg/cm2 (1.420 lbs per square inch)
Power supply
- 48 V / - 60 V (tolerance from - 40 V to - 72 V)
Operating temperature: - 5 °C, + 45 °C
Consumption
Control cabinet: 1 kW (max 2 kW), 35 A
Equipment cabinet: 220 W (max 550 W), 10 A
Above are the dimensions and weight given for Control or Equipment fully-equipped
cabinets.
The maximum power consumption is given for a fully-equipped BSC with maximum ratings
of board consumptions.
The designated current is the fuse value protecting the cabinet.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC
Cabinets Organization
Control Equipment
Cabinet Cabinet
PCM
Main Processing Unit Interface DDTI
CPU: OMU, MPU, BIFP
Disk: MMU/MMU_IDE MPU

Protocol: A PCM
DDTI
SS7: CCS7, Interface
LAPD: SICD,
X.25: SICX, SLS/SLS2 Chain RCB RCB TSCB,
A A B RCB, ALA
Switching Switching SWC,

MPU Chain MSW-SWE
Unit A Unit B
B + ECI
B
BTS Signaling BSCB
Concentration
The BSC is composed of two types of boards:

• control boards for management,
• equipment boards for external interfaces and switching units.
For safety and defense reasons:
• control chains (MPUA and B) are duplicated and operate normally in the duplex mode
(active/hot standby mode),
• one switching unit (SWU A or B) is dedicated to one MPU (A or B).
Common equipment boards (DDTI, ALA, BSCB, TSCB) work with the active chain.
External PCM links may be type E1 or T1.
The Main Processing Unit (MPU) is composed of: CPU-OMU, CPU-MPU, CPU-BIFP,
SUP/SUP2, MMU/MMU_IDE, SICX, CCS7, SLS/SLS2, and SICD/SICD8V.
The Equipment Unit is composed of: ECI, ALA, DDTI, RCB, TSCB, BSCB.
The SWitching Unit is composed of: SWC, MSW, SWE.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Functional Architecture
BSC 12000HC
To/From
To OMC-R
OMC-R
C OMN Link
O Hard Disk
Chain A Switch SLS2 Chain B
N MMU-IDE
T Ethernet
O&M Control Switching Control BTSs Control
R Inter SUP
CPU-OMU CPU-MPU CPU-BIFP
O Supervision
L Multibus II
SUP2
X.25 SS7 MPUA LAPD
SICX CCS7 SICD8V
SWitching Unit
2 Mb <-> 64kb
E Switching Matrix RCB
O&M and MSW Switch
Q
Synchro ECI Control
U V11/TTL SWE SWC
I
P
O&M/A bus
O&M/B bus
M
E Chain status (MPU Status)
N
External Alarms TCU LAPD BTS LAPD PCM Interface
T ALA Concentration BSCB DDTI
Concentration TSCB
External Loops BTS TCU/MSC

The processing chain or MPU is duplicated for reliability and operates in matched pairs (MPU-A
and MPU-B). Each of these units includes:
• an Operation and Management Unit (CPU-OMU) for O&M control,
• a Main Processing Unit board (CPU-MPU) for switching control,
• one or two Base Interface Front-end Processor (CPU-BIFP) for BTSs control,
• a Mass Memory Unit (MMU/MMU_IDE),
• a X25 interface Controller (SICX),
• a LAPD interface Controller (SICD/SICD8V),
• a CCITT SS7 interface controller(s) (CCS7),
• a SUPervision board (SUP/SUP2),
• Serial Link Switching unit (SLS/SLS2).
The Equipment cabinet shelves contain:

• a duplicated Equipment Cabinet Interface unit (ECI),
• an external ALArm regrouping board (ALA),
• Dual Digital Trunk Interfaces boards (DDTI),
• TCU Signaling link Concentration Boards (TSCB),
• BTS Signaling link Concentration Boards (BSCB).
The SWitching Unit or SWU is duplicated for reliability and accommodates:

• a Switching Control board (SWC),
• one or two Main SWitching boards (MSW),
• one or two SWitching Extension boards (SWE) controlling 16 additional links,
• duplicated Rate Converter Boards (RCB).

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Physical Layout
Boards Layout
Power
supplies
PSUC ++ 12
5 V / - 100 A
V / -4 A
- 12 V / - 3 A 5V 5V
12 A 12 A PCM
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
shelf
5V
12 A EQPD1
5V 5V
MPUA-
12 A 12 A PCM
CPU-OMU
CPU-BIFP
CPU-MPU
CPU-BIFP
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
DDTI
shelf shelf
CCS7
CCS7
CCS7
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
MMU
SICX
SUP
SLS
5V
12 A EQPD0
5V 5V
12 A 12 A Mixed
TSCB
TSCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
RCB
ALA
5V
shelf
Power
supplies 12 A EQP1
PSUC + 5 V / - 100 A
+ 12 V / -4 A
- 12 V / - 3 A
Fans
5V 5V Switching
12 A 12 A matrix
MSW
MSW
MSW
MSW
SWC
SWC
SWE
SWE
SWE
SWE
MPUB-
ECI
ECI
shelf
CPU-OMU
CPU-BIFP
CPU-MPU
CPU-BIFP
5V
shelf
CCS7
CCS7
CCS7
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
SICD
MMU
SICX
12 A SWG
SUP
SLS
5V 5V
12 A 12 A BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
BSCB
shelf
5V
12 A
EQPT
Fans
Ethernet
Connector
Control Cabinet Equipment Cabinet

The BSC equipment is held in two cabinets:

• The Control cabinet contains the processing unit that directs the overall BSC
operations, including the equipment cabinet operations and insures the communications
with the OMC-R.
• The Equipment cabinet contains the switching matrix, different interface modules and
the equipment for the management of the PCM links. Duplication or redundancy of the
boards ensures service continuity in the event of a failure.
The BSC 6000/12000 exists in five different basic configurations, depending on the number of
SICD/SICD8V boards.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Duplex Operation
12000HC Architecture
To/From OMC-R
MMU SLS2 MPU MMU

C Chain A MPU SLS2
O
IDE Status Ethernet Status Chain B IDE
N
CPU- CPU- CPU- CPU- CPU- CPU-
T OMU MPU BIFP Inter SUP

BIFP MPU OMU
R SUP2 SUP2
Multibus II Multibus II
O
MPUA SICD
L SICX CCS7 SICD MPUB
8V 8V CCS7 SICX
V11 64 kb/s V11 64 kb/s
E
ECI A SWC RCB RCB ECI B
Q SWC
U MSW-SWE MSW-SWE
I
Internal PCM/A Internal PCM/B
P
M
E Chain status (MPU Status) MPU
N Status
T ALA TSCB BSCB DDTI
O&M/A bus O&M/B bus
External Loops To/From BTS To/From TCU/MSC

In the duplex operating mode, the software and data are loaded onto both processing
chains. The active processor directs the BSC activities and the passive processor is
updated by the active one.
Furthermore the hard disks of the two BSC processing chains are mirrored.
The passive processor is updated by the active one each time a call reaches or leaves a
stable state. Stable calls are recovered when there is a failure on the active chain and the
passive chain turns active.
The standby chain performs the operations needed to ensure the lowest impact on traffic
handling in case of switch over:
• maintaining active/standby data integrity on its disk,
• running tests to detect standby components faults,
• sending its operational status to the active side to determine which chain is in the best
condition.
Moreover, the standby chain receives from the active one all the information needed to
sustain calls in case of switch-over (radio channel information, terrestrial and SCCP circuit
used, ...).
An audit is performed upon operator request on both chains to ensure disk data integrity.
The audit is performed on the active side and the data consistency on the passive is
ensured by the mirror mechanism.
A switch-over is performed in case of major hardware or software anomaly. The switch-
over condition is detected by the supervision entity and initiated by the SUP board after
comparison with the other chain.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 12000
12000 Versus 6000
CPU /MPU CPU /BIFP Up to:
• 1200 Erlangs
Mandatory • 48000 BHCAs
for BSC 12000 • 320 TDMA
Flash EPROM
=
Fast Restart
1 SICD8V
2
Processor
= 3 Up to 64 TRXs
Pentium 120
4
Only for
5 BSC 12000
6
Processor
= LAPD
7
Pentium 75 Management
8
Although the BSC 6000 can be equipped with the new CPU-MPU and CPU-BIFP within the
V8 release, the BSC 12000 mandatory comes with these enhanced boards.
The BSC 12000 also comes with a new SICD8V boards along. This board features eight
LAPD input-ports.
The SICD8V is able to handle up to 64 TRX-signaling.
According to the Nortel traffic model, the BSC 1205 (delivered with 5 SICD8V boards)
reaches 1200 Erlangs and a 48000 BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts) throughput.
The BSC 6000 can be upgraded to a BSC 12000 on site.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC
BSC Family Life
6000 6000
CPU 66 CPU 120
V11
V11 V11
V9
V9
12000HC
V11 HC 100 = YES V11 12000HC
12000 CPU 120 HC 100 = YES
HC 100 = NO
V11 CPU 133
CPU 120 (or 133)
The BSC product line consists of the BSC 6000 and the BSC 12000 products.
These two products are based on the same platform, making it possible to upgrade a BSC
6000 to a BSC 12000 in the field.
Both the 6000 and the 12000 exist in five configurations to match the specific capacity
required on the BSC site.
The production of the BSC 2000 stopped in 1994 with the V5 release, and is no longer
supported after the V9 release.
The production of the BSC 6000 has stopped in December 1998. The product hardware and
software will be maintained after this date but will no longer be supported after the V14
release.
For potential unforeseen BSC extensions after March 1999, an upgrade to BSC 12000 can
be offered: only a few boards have to be changed and all of them are proposed as upgrade
kits.
The BSC 12000HC (High Capacity) is the name of the BSC12000 equipped with the new
HC100 kit (from V11.3).
The BSC 12000 has CPU120 or CPU133 boards without mixing:
• from release V10, the CPU133 will replace the CPU120 after the end of production with
same performance and capacity,
• for release V11, the CPU133 can replace the CPU120 only for 12000HC.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
GPRS Support
GPRS
6000 12000 12000HC

GPRS GPRS GPRS
V12 only From V12
GPRS is not supported on BSC 6000.

GPRS shall be supported in V12 on a BSC12000 (i.e. the HC100 kit is not mandatory), but
there can be a high risk for future releases due to the limited RAM memory of the
CPU66SE.
GPRS in V14 will require both HC100 kit and either:
• CPU120 with memory extension,
• CPU133.
For releases beyond V14, the HC100 is mandatory.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 12000 Upgrade to BSC 12000HC
• CPU-OMU: CPU 133 IE

disk interface change: SCSI to IDE
more processing capability: x2 or 3

• MMU: MMU-IDE disk interface change
• SUP: SUP2: more processing power
• SLS: SLS2 improved defense mechanism
+
Optional
CPU-MPU and CPU-BIFP = CPU133
more processing capability
standardization of boards inside the BSC
IDE = Integrated Disk Electronic

BSC 12000 capacity is limited by its processing capability and different traffic profiles
require different processing capability. The purpose of the upgrade kit HC100 is to increase
the performance of the BSC, in order to support some hard call profiles.
This High Capacity kit available for the BSC 12000, contains per chain:
• a new CPU-OMU board, based on Pentium 133 MHz: CPU133IE,
• a new MMU board with IDE disk: MMU-IDE,
• a new SUP board: SUP2,
• a new SLS board: SLS2.
A new optional CPU-MPU/BIFP board, more powerful, is available: CPU133 (CPU133IE
without IDE and Ethernet interfaces).
If the CPU120 are kept, those boards must be upgraded with RAM from 16 Mb to 32 Mb. In
other terms, RAM extension will be systematically associated to HC100 kit option only if
CPU133 is not ordered.
All HC100 kits must be changed at the same time. No dialogue is possible between two
chains equipped with different CPU-OMU board.
A new partitioning of BSC disk is needed.
From V11.3, all new BSC 12000 are delivered including the HC100 kit: 12000HC.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC Provisioning
Hardware Software Load

limits limits limits
Nbr of BTS
Nbr of Cells
Nbr of PCM/site BSC BSC
product
Nbr of LAPD channels range model
Nbr of TRX
The entry data are classified according to their weight in BSC dimensioning procedure:
1. Number of LAPD channels.
2. Number of TRX.
3. Number of external PCM.
4. Then, the other data: number of BTS (number of sites), and of cells.
The different limits to be taken into account within the provisioning model are classified into
hardware, software and load.
Main hardware limits come from:

• Number of SICD boards (there is a direct relationship between this limit and the number
of radio sites).
• Number of DDTI boards.
• Number of CCS7 boards.
Main software limits are given by:

• Number of cells, number of TRX, number of TCU.
Main load limits are:

• The number of TRXs per SICD board: up to 16 TRXs can be managed by a SICD
board (6000) and up to 64 TRXs by a SICD8V board (12000/12000HC).
• The number of TRXs per LAPD port.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 12000 Product Configuration
BSC 12000 product portfolio 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205

BSC type 1 2 3 4 5
Maximum sites (with BSCB) 28 60 92 124 138

Maximum number of TDMA 64 128 192 256 320
Numb. of LAPD ports 8 16 24 32 40
Number of PCM (E1 or T1) 48 48 48 48 48
CCS7 links 2 4 4 4 6
TCU (with E1) 12 12 12 12 12
TCU (with T1) 14 14 14 14 14

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 12000 Configuration

1 - Control Cabinet

BSC type 1 2 3 4 5
CPU-OMU 1 1 1 1 1
CPU-MPU 1 1 1 1 1
CPU-BIFP 1 1 2 2 2
SICX 1 1 1 1 1 x2
SICD8V 1 2 3 4 5
SS7 1 2 2 2 3
SUP/SUP2 1 1 1 1 1
MMU/MMU-IDE 1 1 1 1 1
SLS/SLS2 1 1 1 1 1
From BSC type 3 (606) to type 5 (610), a CPU-BIFP board is still added but the CCS7
board is added in BSC type 2 and another in type 5 to raise the capacity of 1200 E.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 12000 Configuration

2 - Equipment Cabinet

BSC type 1 2 3 4 5
Switching shelf (SWG)
SWC 1 1 1 1 1 x2
MSW 2 2 2 2 2
SWE 2 2 2 2 2
ECI 1 1 1 1 1
RCB 1 2 3 4 5
TSCB 2 2 2 2 2
BSCB 12 12 12 12 12
DDTI 10/24 10/24 10/24 10/24 10/24
ALA 1 1 1 1 1
In BSC 12000, two MSW and two SWE are provided for each type. This allows to use
BSCB boards directly from type 1. The number of DDTI boards no longer depends on the
BSC type (24 boards are provided).

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
BSC 6000/12000/12000HC
Capacity Comparison
BSC product 610 610 1205 1205HC

CPU MPU/BIFP type CPU66 CPU120 CPU120 CPU133

Nortel standard (Erlangs) 600 600 1200 1200
Nortel standard (BHCA) 24000 24000 48000 48000
High mobility (Erlangs) 360 600 700 1200
High mobility (BHCA) 13650 24000 26000 48000
Short call duration (Erlangs) 240 440 640 1100
Short call duration (BHCA) 23000 42000 60750 107000
Capacity is the capability of the BSC to handle subscriber activities such as:
• calls,
• location updates,
• handovers.
The capacity of the BSC is limited by two types of bottlenecks:
• the real-time capacity limit of certain BSC processor boards such as SUP (i.e. OMU-
SUP-SWC), SICD/SICD8V, BSCB and CPU-MPU/BIFP,
• the connectivity limit such as the configurable number of TRX; PCMs depending on the
BTS configuration and of the BTS load.
As Erlang values describes resource utilization, the BSC capacity can not only be described
in terms of Erlang but must be associated to a subscriber profile.
To reach its optimal capacity the BSC 12000HC (with HC100 kit) needs also the Capacity
improvement package (mandatory patch):
• software optimization of OMU-SUP-SWC slave mechanism, BSC-TMG contexts and
BSC-SCCP contexts,
• firmware optimization: new PROM for SWC, BSCB and TSCB boards.
These capacities are given regardless of the Quality of Service.
To maintain the BSC robustness during traffic overload periods, the overload control
mechanism, by filtering messages, can reduce the QoS.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Exercise
1 - Indication Path in Case of TCU Warning
Active Chain To/From OMC-R Standby Chain
MMU SLS2 MPU MMU

C MPU SLS2
IDE Chain A Status Ethernet Status Chain B IDE
O
N

BIFP MPU OMU
R SUP2 SUP2
O
MPUA SICD
L SICX CCS7 SICD MPUB SICX
8V 8V CCS7
V11 64 kb/s V11 64 kb/s
E
Q SWC
U MSW-SWE MSW-SWE
I
P
M
N Status
O&M/A bus O&M/B bus

Draw the indication path when the TCU is warning.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Exercise
2 - Signaling Path When Call Is Setting Up
MMU SLS2 MPU MMU

C MPU SLS2
O
N

BIFP MPU OMU
R SUP2 SUP2
O
MPUA SICD
8V 8V CCS7
V11 64 kb/s V11 64 kb/s
E
Q SWC
U MSW-SWE MSW-SWE
I
P
M
N Status
O&M/A bus O&M/B bus

Draw the signaling path when the call is setting up.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Exercise
3 - Speech Path When Call-in-state
MMU SLS2 MPU MMU

C MPU SLS2
O
N

BIFP MPU OMU
R SUP2 SUP2
O
MPUA SICD
8V 8V CCS7
V11 64 kb/s V11 64 kb/s
E
Q SWC
U MSW-SWE MSW-SWE
I
P
M
N Status
O&M/A bus O&M/B bus

Draw the speech path when the call is in state.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Number of Sites That a BSC Can Handle
138 sites BSC Equipment cabinet BSC Control cabinet
1 SICD
Here’s a BSC 6000
1
BTS (BCF)
BSCB 4
1
Site #1 2
8 TRXs DCC
1 3
+ BCF or
DSC 10
11
#137
#138 TSCB
First, the signaling base load of a site is one LAPD from a maximum of 8 TRXs with the
BCF signaling along.
Second, 11 BSCB boards (located is the BSC Equipment cabinet) can concentrate up to 4
input -ports x 3 out-ports x 11 boards = 132 sites.
Third, 10 SICD boards (located in the Control cabinet of the BSC 6000) provide 40 input
signaling ports. In turn, 5 SICD8V (BSC 12000) boards provide 40 input-ports (5 x 8 input-
ports) too.
Fourth, 11 BSCB boards provide 3 x 11= 33 output-ports.
Thus there are 7 SICD input-ports free out of either the SICD or the SICD8V. One input-
port of either SICD or SICD8V must be assigned to the LAPD stream from the TSCB board.
The six remainder input-ports on the SICDs can be directly assigned to other sites (#133,
#134, #135, #136, #137, #138).
We conclude that the BSC 6000 and the BSC12000 can handle 132+6= 138 sites.

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Check Your Learning
1- What main functions does the BSC perform?

2- What does the SICD/SICD8V board perform?
3- What does the CCS7 board perform?
4- What do the BSCB and TSCB boards perform?
1- What main functions does the BSC perform?
2- What does the SICD/SIC8V board perform?
3- What does the CCS7 board perform?
4- What do the BSCB and the TSCB boards perform?

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Check Your Learning
6- Where are located the O&M functions in the BSC?

7- How can we distinguish a BSC 6000 from a BSC 12000?
8- How many BTSs and TRX can handle a BSC 12000 model 1205?
6- Where are located the O&M functions in the BSC?
7- How can we distinguish a BSC 6000 from a BSC 12000?
8- How many BTSs and TRX can handle a BSC 12000 model 1205?

BSC 6000/12000/12000HC Family
Student Notes:

TransCoder Unit: Functional Description
Section 13
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 TransCoder Unit: Functional Description 13-1

Objectives

• Relate what must perform the TCU;

• Identify benefit having remote TCUs.

TCU Functions
Converts the GSM speech frames into Adapts the user’s data frames from BSS
1 PSTN / ISDN A-Law or µ-Law speech. 2 to V110 ISDN 64 kbps ISDN format.
BSS
MSC
BSC TCU
BTS
A
Interface
Ater
Interface
TCU is the Nortel name for the Transcoder Rate Adapter Unit
TCU (TransCoder Units) are designed to reduce the amount of PCM links needed to convey
radio speech and data channels between BTS, BSC and MSC.
The concept of remote transcoders permit to convey 4 multiplexed channels at 16
kbit/s onto a single 64 kbit/s PCM channel.
Multiplexing is implemented within the BTS, thus the number of PCM links needed on the Abis
interface is reduced.
The TCU enables code conversion of 16 kbit/s channels from the BSC into 64 kbit/s channels
for MSC in both directions.
TCU is the product designation of Nortel for the TRAU (Transcoder and Rate Adapter Unit)
specified in the GSM recommendations.

Benefit Having Remote TCUs
BTS MSC
TCU
TS 1 TS 2 TS 3 TS 4
Four PCM time-slots between BTS and MSC when TCU is close to the BTSs.
BTS MSC
TCU
TS 1
One PCM time-slot between BTSs and MSC when TCU is close to the MSC.
= Save three PCM time-slots !

The TCU has been designed to be collocated with the MSC in order to save PCM resources
between the BSCs and the MSC.
The speech and data traffic (full-rate, enhanced full-rate or 14.4 kbps data rate) will be
transported into circuits at 16 kbit/s until it reaches the TCU allowing four traffic channels to be
carried at 64 kbit/s by each PCM Time-Slot .
Without remote TCU:
• Poor use of experience transmission resource.
• Transmission of information in a time slot of 64 kbps.
• Limitation of the number of speech channels.
With TCU located at the MSC premises:
• Multiplexing of 4 speech channels into one time slot.
• Optimization of the physical resources.
• Capacities on Abis and Ater interfaces multiplied per four.

Functional Detail
Time Slot Processing
Ater interface A interface

LAPD TS 1
O&M
SS7 TS SS7 TS
MSC
BSC X.25 TS 2 * X.25 TS 2 * OMC

PCM link PCM link
Speech TS Speech TS
Transcoding MSC
Data TS Rate Data TS

MSC
Adaptation
* if used
LAPD time slot is used for internal TCU purpose to the BSC.
SS7 and X.25 time slots are simply switched through the switching matrix without transcoding
process.
Speech blocks are transcoded by vocal transcoders.
Data blocks are rate adapted by V110/PCM converters.

Signaling on the BTS - TCU Interface
OMC
PSTN
TCU
BSS
MSC
A interface
BSC Ater Interface NSS
BTS
13 kbps + 3 kbps of remote control
(Half-rate, full-rate, DTX or not DTX, SID)
• The Mobile informs the MSC of the supported transcoders

• The MSC in turn sends this information to the BSC
• The BSC establishes the links from the Mobile to the TCU
• The BTS controls the TCU transcoders using in-band signalisation
• The communication starts
The 16 kbit/s bit stream contains the encoded speech (13 kbit/s) and in-band signalisation to
allow the control of the remote transcoders by the BTS.
In-band signalisation allows the transcoders to know what kind of information is received and
then what type of adaptation it must apply both for the uplink and the downlink transmission.
Each block conveyed between the BTS and the remote transcoders contains 316 bits:
• 260 for speech,
• 35 for frame synchronization,
• 5 for discrimination between speech and data, full rate and half rate,
• 6 for time alignment,
• 1 for Bad Frame Indicator (uplink),
• 1 for DTX mode.

Speech on the BTS-TCU Interface
TCU
Speech handler
and DTX
BTS
Frame
Processor GSM speech
decoder
BSC
13 bit linear
Speech to
8 bit A or µ Law
handler
To MSC
Speech blocks
(260 bits/20 ms)
The speech is carried between BTS and TCU using blocks of 260 bits/20 ms (=
13 kbps).
TCU converts the 13 kbps speech blocks into 64 kbps T1 (µ-law) or E1 (A-law) PCM time
slots.
Furthermore, the Frame Processor of the BTS warns the TCU whether a speech frame is
generated correctly or not (Bad Frame Indicator).
The speech transcoder also need to be told whether transmission in the uplink is on DTX
mode or not.
In turn, the TCU informs the BTS whenever it generates SID (SIlent Descriptor) frames.

User’s Data Rate Treatment
Abis Ater A
BTS
Frame
TCU
processor
FEC DTX handling
RA’1 / RA1 RAA

FEC
BSC
RA’1
RAA
TAF RA2
RA0
64 Kbps
RA0: asynchronous -> synchronous To MSC

RA’1: Air Interface V110 frame RAA: BSS (Abis-Ater) V110 frame.
RA1: ISDN V110 8 or 16 kbps frame RA2: ISDN V110 64 kbps frame
RA0 function perform asynchronous to synchronous conversion by providing start and stop bit
when necessary.
RA1’ features the synchronous user’s data stream into special GSM frame V110 shape (36
bits every 10 ms, 60 bits every either 5 ms or 10 ms).
FEC, in turn, performs the channel coding.
RA1 brings up the user’s data into either 8 or 16 kbps V110 frame (every 10 ms or 5 ms).
RAA convert the V110 CCITT frame of 80 bits to an TRAU (said TCU in Nortel’s products)
frame format in order to transmit four channel over an 64 kbps PCM link. This frame contains
72 bits because of one does not take care of the V110 frame-flag-start-byte when transmitting
over the BSS.
RA2 output an 80 bits V110 frame into a 64 kbps DS0 link.

Check Your Learning
1- What are the two functions of the TCU?

2- What is the benefit having remote TCUs?
3- Why do we need rate adaptation of user’s data?
4- How many TDTI boards do we need per TCU? Why?
1- What are the two functions of the TCU?
2- What is the benefit having remote TCUs?
3- Why do we need rate adaptation of user’s data?

Student Notes:

TCU: Physical Description
Section 14
TCU: Physical Presentation
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 TCU: Physical Presentation 14-1

Objectives

• List the different boards of a TCU shelf;

• Briefly explain their role.

Hardware Layout
O&M Bus (9600 b/s asynchronous)

Control
TUC
PCM bus (2048 kb/s)
64 kbps
switching
matrix 0 TCB 0
TDTI1 TCB
TCB 1
TDTI2 TCB
TCB 2 T1
TDTI TCB3
TCB4
TCB5
1 0, 2, 3, 4 TCB6
TCB7
BSC E1 TCB8
TCB9
TCB
MSC
Each TCU module (one per shelf) is composed of three kinds of boards.
Transcoder Unit Controller or TUC board:
• O&M processor,
• Provision of a Switching Matrix of 16 x 16 PCM:
• insert/extract 64 kbit/s LAPD channel (link to BSC), SS7 (links to MSC) and X.25 (link to
OMC-R).
Either TransCoder Board TCB 1:
• speech coding/decoding for 12 full rate traffic channels,
• data rate adaptation (RAA – RA2),
• includes 6 Digital Signal Processors (processing two channel each), and a general
purpose processor.
Or TransCoder Board TCB2:
• supports FR and the new vocoder for Enhanced Full Rate EFR,
• 12 DSP per board instead of 6,
• 40 Mips per call instead of 20 Mips,
• automatic switching between vocoders.
Transcoder Digital Trunk Interface or TDTI board:
• similar to BSC DDTI,
• each board manages 2 external PCM links.

External Communications
Internal PCM Link Allocation in the TCU
10
1
TCB1/
TCB2
PCM 6 to PCM 15
PCM 3 2
TUC
TDTI 1 3
Switching PCM 4
matrix
PCM0 for
PCM 5 4
internal use
TDTI 2
MSC
1 PCM 1 PCM 2 0
BSC TDTI 0 TDTI 0
1/2 2/2
Each TCU is linked to one Ater PCM to the BSC and up to four PCMA to the MSC.
Board Board Number Internal PCM Number

TUC 0 0 to 15
TDTI 0 1 (BSC) & 2
TDTI 1 3&4
TDTI 2 5
TCB or TCB2 0 6
TCB or TCB2 1 7
TCB or TCB2 2 8
TCB or TCB2 3 9
TCB or TCB2 4 10
TCB or TCB2 5 11
TCB or TCB2 6 12
TCB or TCB2 7 13
TCB or TCB2 8 14
TCB or TCB2 9 15

TCU Cabinet
P P P
S S S
TTT U U U
TTTTTTTTTT T
DDD E E E
- Up to 120 speech channels when

CCCC C CC C CC U
BBBBB BBBBB
TTT
I I I
C
P
S
P
S TCU shelf boards
U U
using PCM E1. E E
DS0 # 0 assigned to PCM

Fans TCU shelf fans

handling. P
S
P
S
P
S
One DS0 assigned to LAPD. TTTT TT T TT T

CCCC C C C C C C
TTT
D DD
TTT
T
U
U
E
U
E
U
E TCU shelf boards
B BBB B B B B B B C P P
I I I S S
U U
E E
Fans TCU shelf fans

P P P
S S S
TTTT T TT TT T
TTT
DDD
T
U
E
U
E
U
E
TCU shelf boards
CCCC C C C C C C U
TTT
C P P
- Up to 92 speech channels when BBBB B B B B B B
I I I S
U
S
U
using PCM T1. E E
TCU shelf fans

One DS0 assigned to LAPD. Fans
P P P
S S S
TTT U U U
TTTTTTTTTT
CCCC CC C C CC
DDD
TTT
T
U
E E E TCU shelf boards
P P
BBBBBBBBBB C
I I I S S
U U
E E
Fans TCU shelf fans
Per TCU shelf:

• Eight or ten TCB boards, 12 speech channels per board = up to 92 or 120 speech
channels per shelf,
• One TUC board.
• Up to three TDTI boards, two PCM links per board.
One link to BSC: second PCM of the first TDTI.
• Up to four links to MSC,
• One link unused: second PCM of the third TDTI,
• Per PCM link: 30 TS (E1) or 24 TS (T1),
• For the four links: up to 120 (E1) or 92 (T1) speech channels.
Per TCU cabinet: up to four TCU shelves.
Note
One have to assign one DS0 for the CCS7 link and one DS0 for the LAPD link (maintenance
purposes).

Check Your Learning

2- How many speech channels can a TCU shelf drive to the MSC?
3- What is the maximum number of TCU shelves in one TCU cabinet?
4- Can you connect TCU shelves of a TCU cabinet to different BSCs?
2- How many speech channels can a TCU shelf drive to the MSC?
3- What is the maximum number of TCU shelves in one TCU cabinet?
4- Can you connect TCU shelves of a TCU cabinet to different BSCs?

Student Notes:

Student Notes:

NSS Functions
Section 15
NSS Functions
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 NSS Functions 15-1

NSS Functions
Objectives

• Know all the MSC external interfaces in the NSS
• Relate the functions that a GMSC and a VMSC perform

• Understand the PCM-30 and the CCS7 signaling devices

NSS Functions
NSS Architecture
Site 1 Site 2
HLR
VLR VLR
BSS D D BSS
G-interface
H C-
B-interface interface B-interface
A-interface MSC A-interface
AUC GMSC
Other GSM, Other GSM,

PSTN, ISDN E-interface PSTN, ISDN
F F
E EIR
E
IWF IWF
Billing SMS-SC Billing

Server Server
The distributed architecture of the NSS is organized with MSCs, servers and data bases, linked by
interfaces normalized (B to G).
There are two types of MSC to provide switching services to a defined part of the PLMN:
• MSC, used to establish traffic channels and to switch signaling messages between PLMN
entities and other GSM networks or fixed networks,
• Gateway MSC (GMSC), is a specialized MSC managing the central data base HLR, containing
permanent and dynamic subscriber data.
All the information requested by the different functions is stored in four types of data bases
connected to (or included in) the MSCs:
• HLR or Home Location Register: permanent data specific to each subscriber, including service
profile, location and billing options,
• VLR or Visitor Location Register: in order to minimize access to the HLR, MSC uses this data
base, which contains working data for subscribers moving within its coverage area (LAs),
• Network security and access control are provided by the Authentication Center (AUC) and by
the Equipment Identity Register (EIR):
- AUC: to ensure that only authorized users have access to the network,
- EIR: to maintain a list of stolen, faulty and valid equipment identities.
NSS includes also specific equipment such as:
• Inter-working Function (IWF): to provide the different bearer services offered by the network,
• Short Message Services-Service Center (SMS-SC): used to store and forward point-to-point
short messages,
• Billing Server.
This equipment or software elements are running applications more or less operator dependent.

NSS Functions
Mobile Switching Center Interfaces
BSS To PSTN
A
BSC GMSC C
BTS
VLR
D HLR
B
EIR
G
AUC
BSS F
VLR
A Nortel HLR/AuC is
BSC MSC housed in the DMS-
BTS HLR
B
Nortel VLR is housed
in the DMS-MSC
Interface A
• Provides connections to BSSs onto PCM links.
• Handles user’s voice and data circuits.
• Handles the CCS7-SCCP signaling.
• Handles BSSAP, MM, and CM message transfer.
Interface B
• Provides CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links to VLR.
• Handles MAP-VLR communications.
Interface C
• Provides CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links.
• Handles MAP- HLR communications.
Interface D
• Provides CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links between HLR and VLR.
• Handles MAP-HLR/ VLR communications.
Interface E
• Handles CCS7 circuit related connection between two MSCs.
• Provides ISUP call command communications.
Interface F
• Handles CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling links to EIR.
• Provides communication between MSC and the EIR.
Interface G
• Handles CCS7-SCCP-TCAP signaling link between two VLRs.
• Provides MAP-VLR to MAP-VLR communications.
PSTN / ISDN interface
• Handles PCM trunks.
• Handles various PSTN / ISDN signaling links (MF R2, CCS7, etc.).
• Provide ISUP and country featured Call Command communications.

NSS Functions
Gateway MSC Functions
- Processes translations.
- Routes calls to appropriate VMSC.
Handles the calls from the PSTN

GMSC
Retrieves roamer routing information
HLR
AUC
VMSC
Any MSC in a GSM PLMN that acts as an interface between the land and the mobile
networks is a GMSC.
A GMSC provides an entry point into the PLMN from another network or service.
A GMSC is also a routing center for incoming PLMN calls.
When an incoming call reaches the GSM PLMN, it is routed through a GMSC, which
requests the HLR and routes the call to the appropriate MSC.

NSS Functions
Visitor MSC Functions

- Requests BSSs for paging.
- Processes update location.
- Sets up and tears down the calls to PSTN.
- Processes translations.
- Receives calls from the gateway MSCs.
- Requests for roamer and MS availability.
- Handles echo-canceler and IWF.
BSS
VMSC Provides ticketing.
BSC
BTS
VLR - Informs VLR of

Handles inter-MSC new location.
handovers. - Gets roamer
access grant for
services.
BSS
BSC MSC Check

BTS EIR MS
available

NSS Functions
MSC Architecture and Functions
MSC Timing
generator
Common bus
X.25
Switch Command Unit Computer
couplers
- Coordinates of call set up. and
peripherals
- Location registration.
module
- Hand-over management.
CCS7 Inter-Working - Ticketing and billing.
couplers modules - Interworking functions.
- Synchronizes with the BSS.
- Gateway to SMS-SC.
- Handles operation on
E1/T1 E1/T1 echo-cancelers.
trunks trunks Echo
Canceler
To other MSC
BSS To PSTN / ISDN
The Mobile Switching Center (MSC) has mainly to provide basic switching functionality as
known from ISDN or toll exchanges but with additional capabilities for handling mobile
subscribers.
MSC coordinates the setup of calls to and from all GSM subscribers operating in its area.
Specifically, the MSC controls the paging function (incoming calls).
The dynamic allocation of access resources is done in coordination with the Base Station
SubSystem (BSS). More specially, the MSC decides when and which types of channels
should be assigned to which mobile. However the channel identity and related radio
parameters are the responsibility of the BSS.
The MSC supervises the connection transfer between different BSSs for MSs, with an active
call, moving from one cell to another. This is ensured if two BSSs are connected to the same
MSC but also when they are not. In this later case, the procedure is more complex, since
more than one MSC is involved.
Besides, the MSC performs ticketing on calls for all subscribers based in its area. While the
subscriber’s call in state, the MSC obtains data for the call billing from the hand-over
recipient MSC.
Furthermore the MSC transfers encryption parameters from Visitors Location Registers
(VLRs) to BSSs to enable ciphering on the radio interface.
Last, the MSC serves as a SMS gateway to forward SMS messages from Short Message
Service Centers (SMSCs) to the subscribers and from the subscribers to the SMSCs.

NSS Functions
InterWorking Function
Mobile
Switching
Center
BSS PSTN
Modem
MS
Data +
DTE signals
Rate
adaptation
Modem
DTE
signaling
IWF
Land-DTE
DTE
Because of GSM providing a wide range of data services to its subscribers, GSM interfaces
with the various public and private data networks currently available. It is the job of the
Interworking Function (IWF) to provide this interfacing capability. Networks to which IWF
presently provides interface as follows:
• PSTN,
• ISDN,
• Circuit-switched public data networks (CSPDN),
• Packet-switched public data networks (PSPDN).
It provides the subscriber with access to data rate and protocol conversion facilities so that
data can be transmitted between GSM Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and a land line DTE
(the recipient).
Furthermore it allocates a suitable modem from its modem bank when required. This is the
case when a GSM DTE, a Fax machine, exchange data with a land Fax machine which
works over analog modem (V.32).
The IWF also provides direct connect interfaces for customers provided equipment such as
X.25 PADs.
Different protocols conversion may be required for signaling and traffic messages. This
includes data rate adaptation and the addition of signaling bits reformatting.
The IWF is a part of the Mobile Switching Center.

NSS Functions
Echo Canceler
GSM network 4 wire
4 wire circuit circuit
(PCM) PSTN
Base Mobile
Echo
Station Switching Switch

SubSystem Center Canceler
Talker Echo
Talker Echo
4 wire
circuit
4w to 2w
transformer
Two wire circuit

Local
loop
Land telephone
When the mobile establishes a circuit to the PSTN, an Echo Canceler (EC) is used at the
MSC-PSTN interface to reduce the effect of the GSM delay.
GSM introduces a round-trip delay (which results of speech encoding, decoding, and signal
processing) of the order of 180 ms. Normally this delay would not be an annoying factor to
the mobile, except when communicating with PSTN as it requires a two wires to four-wire
transformer in the circuit.
This transformer is required at the toll office because the standard loop is a two wire circuit.
Some of energy at its four-wire receive side re-transmitted to the mobile causes the echo,
which does not affect the land subscriber but is annoying factor to the mobile.
Note that during a normal PSTN call, no echo is apparent because the delay is too short and
the land user is unable to distinguish between the echo and the normal telephone side tones.

NSS Functions
Short Message Service Center
Send Routing Information

Alert-SC
HLR Set MW Data VMS
Voice trunks:
R2, ETSI ISUP... Voice Mail alerts

SS7 MAP
Note MS
SMPP
Present SS7 MAP (X.25 or TCP/IP)
MF SME
DT
MSC X.25
Voice trunks:
PSTN R2, ETSI ISUP...
SS7 MAP SME
SMSC
SME
SS7 DTAP
Forward Short Message
Delivery Report
Various applications
BSC
submitting
Short Messages
The Short Message Service is performed by a specific network element called Short
Message Service Center (SMSC) which is commonly implemented on a computer platform.
This SMSC is functionally separated from the GSM network although this does not preclude
an integrated implementation.
More than one SMSC may be connected to the GSM network.
For both MO and MT services the SMSC acts as store and forward center; all GSM point to
point Short Messages are either to or from the SMSC.
A message from one Mobile Station to another must pass through a SMSC.
Messages may be input to the SMSC from a fixed network customer by means of a suitable
telecommunication service either from the fixed network or from a mobile network customer.
The SMSC shall then reformat the message into that provided by the short message service,
for delivery to the mobile telephone.

NSS Functions
Voice Mail System
MS
TX Mail RX Mail
User 1 User 2
User Mail
Virtual FAX
TUES 11:46
Urgent Messages: 1
Voice Mail
SMS-SC Normal Messages: 3
Played Messages: 2
System Call 123# to retrieve
A PLMN
Call answering Notification/automatic

Numeric messaging delivery of messages
Voice Mail System provides following functionality:

• call answering: due to a large percentage of inbound traffic not completed, this function
allows operator to recapture the traffic and subscribers to be informed by traffic diversion
to mail boxes,
• virtual fax: this fax allows mobile subscriber to be confident that no fax will be missed
while roaming,
• numeric messaging: rather than to leave a voice message a caller will be able to enter a
numeric message (tel. number to re-call) that will be spoken to the subscriber,
• notification/automatic delivery of messages: either through pager or outcalling,
• SMSC integration: due to this function it will be possible to display more than a simple
indication: “empty/not empty”. A typical message would be “XX messages YY new”.

NSS Functions
Intelligent Network Platform
SDF
Service Service Data
Control
Point Service
Creation
SCF Service Environment

Service Control Management
System
SRF Intelligent
Specialized Peripheral
HLR Resource
SSF
Service Switching GMSC
Service
Switching
CCF Point
Call Control
IN platform provides the service logic which can be developed by the service providers,
independently from the GSM network vendor, and interworks with the GSM network using
standardized signaling.
As an open standard solution, it allows operators to offer the same services to their
subscribers while roaming to other PLMNs.
The GMSC/SSP handles SSF and CCF:
• Service Switching Function provides functions required for interaction between the CCF
and an SCF, and between the SRF and an SCF for non-call associated service
handling.
• Call Control Function provides call and service processing and control.
The Service Control Point handles:
• Service Data Function provides customer and network data for real time access by the
SCF in the execution of an IN provided service.
• Service Control Function commands call control functions in the processing of IN service
requests; may interact with other Functional Element to access additional logic or data
as needed.
The IP platform handles the Specialized Resource Function which provides resources for
user interaction as part of an IN service (digit receivers, announcements, automatic speech
recognition, text to speech, etc.).
Intelligent Network can be configured as on-board or off-board networks, according to the
location of the Service Switching Point (SSP) functionality:
• on-board: SSP function is housed into the MSC,
• off-board: SSP function is housed in a unit separated from the MSC.

NSS Functions
Student Notes:

NSS Functions
Student Notes:

NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP
Section 16
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 NSS Nortel: DMS and GPP 16-1

Objectives

• Draw the DMS architecture and its internal main interfaces;
• Explain the principle of the Nortel's time-switch and recognize its

configurations;
• Understand how a time slot comes into the dual panel switching
network and how it goes out;
• Understand the PCM-30 and the CCS7 signaling devices;
• Identify the Super Node, the Size Enhanced and Micro-Node
hardware layout;
• Describe the Gsm Passport Platform hardware layout.

NSS Nortel: DMS Family and PicoNode
Nortel MSC = Digital Multiplex System (DMS)

SuperNode
(SN) SuperNode
Size MicroNode
Enhanced
(SNSE)
PicoNode for remote and

campus applications of 500-
Proven DMS SuperNode MSC and HLR Platform 5000 subscribers
Low - High Capacity Systems - Scalable/Modular
Best Reliability Track Record on DMS-100 Platform PicoNode

SuperNode (SN)
FSP FSP FSP FSP FSP FSP FSP FSP
MTD
P P P P P P P P PP PP PP PP PP PP Billing Server PP PP
PP Maintenance PP PP PP
S S S S S S S S SS SS SS SS SS MS 1 SS SS SS S S SS SS ENET 0.0 S S
LMS 0 LMS1 UU UU UU UU File Processor
U U U U U U U U UU UU Trunk Module UU UU UU UU UU UU
PCM30 Digital
Trunk Controller
PDTC 1 POWER
LOAD
ON LINE
REWIND
P P P P P P P P PP P P PP PP PP P P FORWARD
PP Maintenance PP PP PP PP P P P REVERSE
WRITE
S S S S S S S S SS LIS S S SS SS SS MS 0 SS SS SS SS ENET 0.1 S S ENABLE
UU Trunk Module UU UU UU SS S
S S S
U U U U U U U U UU U U UU UU UUU U U UU UU
P P P P P P P P PP P P PP PP Storage
16 PCM30s PP P P
PP Maintenance PP SS SS PP PP PP PP PP PP
S S S S S S S S SS LIS S S SS SS CM 1 CM 0 SS SS SS Devices S S SS ENET 1.0 S S SS IOC SS
UU Trunk Module UU UU UU UU UU UU UU
U U U U U U U U UU U U UU UU UU UU
PCM30 Digital
Trunk Controller
PDTC 0
P P P P P P P P PP P P PP PP Storage PP PP
PP Maintenance PP PP PP PP PP PP PP
S S S S S S S S SS LIS S S SS SS SS SLM 0 SLM 1 SS SS SS SS ENET 1.1 SS SS DDU SS
UU UU UU UU S S Devices SS
U U U U U U U U UU UU Trunk Module UU UU UU UU
UU UU
UU 16 PCM30s UU
COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT
Cabinetized Link Peripheral Cabinetized Dual-plane Cabinetized Applications File Enhanced Cabinetized
Power Processor (LPP) Trunk Combined Core Digital Trunk Processor Network Input/Output
Distribution Module Controller for cabinet (ENET) Equipment
Center Equipment Offshore equipment
ISDN
Equipment
The SuperNode consists of the following cabinets:

• The Cabinetized Power Distribution Center (CPDC) which provides the power for the
DMS SuperNode (row by row).
• The SuperNode (SN) cabinet, or DPCC, which contains two Message Switch (MS)
shelves, a dual plane Computing Module (CM) shelf, and a dual plane System Load
Module (SLM) shelf.
• The Cabinetized Trunk Module Equipment (CTME) which contains up to four
Maintenance Trunk Modules (MTM).
• The Cabinetized Input/Output Equipment (CIOE) cabinet which contains the
Input/Output Controller and suitable devices (DDU, MTD).
• The ENET Cabinet (ENC) which contains the Enhanced NETwork (ENET).
• The Cabinetized Digital Trunk Equipment (CDTE) which may contain two PCM-30
Digital Trunk Controllers (PDTC).
• Applications File Processor cabinet (AFP) which may house storage devices.
• The Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) cabinet which contains SS7 and Ethernet coupling
devices.

Digital Multiplex System (DMS) Architecture
DMS-Core
DMS-Core File Processor
(Billing) IOM
ISM
DS512
DS30
DMS - Bus
CLK 0 Message switch 0
0
1
DS30 DS512
DS512
DS30 or DS30
LPP ENET PDTCs
ENET
To
V.35
interface To HLR, VLR, To BSSs PCMs PSTN
EIR, SMSC, etc. /ISDN
DSx channels access message
DSx channels (voice, data, and signaling)
Nortel’s Digital Multiplex System (DMS) is a basic made up of the following:

• DMS-core, the control component,
• DMS-bus, the messaging component,
• ENET, the switching matrix,
• the Link Peripheral Processor (LPP), the PCM Digital E1/T1 Trunk Controller (PDTC),
• the Input/Output Controllers, IOC.
For reliability, the DMS-Bus features two Message Switch (MS) that route messages and
allow direct communication between the different modules of the DMS-Super-Node
(Switching Matrix ENET, Link Peripheral Processor, PCM Digital Trunk controller).
The DMS-Bus also houses the system clock, used by both the Bus and the Core Module to
carry out general timing functions. The system clock, which receives the network
synchronization from PSTN, provides synchronization for the DMS and can serve, in turn, as
a master clock source to allow the entire network (the different BSSs) to run the same
frequency.
DMS-Bus access port can be configured as either DS30 copper interfaces or DS512 fiber-
optic interfaces:
• DS30 consists of 32 channels (2.56 Mbit/s).
• DS512 consists of 512 channels (49.15 Mbit/s) equivalent to 16 DS30.

DMS Core Modules
Duplex macro synchronous features

To the
DMS-Bus
RTIF 0 RTIF 1
Computing
CPU MEB CPU
Module
Memory 0 1 Memory
SLM SLM System

Load
Module
0 1
Crossover
Busses
MEB: Mate Exchange Bus (redundancy communications), RTIF: Reset Terminal Interface
Features:
• The DMS Core Module is a dual macro synchronized module working in duplex mode
(both the CPU are on-line and running simultaneously, one is designed active and the
other is hot-standby). Thus Both CPU are in-step, executing the same sequence of
instructions. If an inequality is detected, a mismatch interrupt is generated and the faulty
CPU is isolated. The standby CPU become active.
• Coordinates call processing activities of system components.
• Serves as control component for the DMS-MSC.
• Can house some application process like the MSC, the VLR, the HLR, the STP
(Signaling Transfer Point), and combinations MSC/HLR.
It consists of:
• The Computing Module (CM), which manages high-level call processing functions with
up to 256 Mbytes (SR70 processor) of memory per plane.
• The System Load Module (SLM), which stores and loads system images from hard disk
and tapes. Each SLM is made of one cartridge tape drive of 525 Mbytes and
one disk of 1 Gbyte.
• The Mate Exchange Bus (MEB), which ensures operations of duplication. This medium
allows the two Computing Modules to routinely check each other’s mode of operation.

SuperNode Configuration
DPCC Cabinet
FSP
PP P P
SS MS 1 S S
UU UU
PP P P
SS MS 0 S S
UU UU
Dual Plane Combined Core

PP P P
SS CM 1 CM 0 S S
UU UU
PP PP
SS SLM 0 SLM 1 SS
UU UU
COOLING UNIT
The standard SuperNode platform is used for large GSM networks.

The DMS-Core is housed in the DPCC (Dual Plane Combined Core Cabinet).
In this cabinet, there are three shelves:
• one shelf per MS,
• one shelf for the CMs,
• one shelf for the SLMs.
There is up to 960 Mbytes memory per CPU Plane.

Nortel's Enhanced NETwork (ENET)
X8 TSIU: Time Slot Interchange Unit,

also known as a crosspoint card
Fiber Time Slot

V Interchange Unit X 64
IN interface
#0 e
r
t
Fiber i
IN interface c
#7 Fiber
a interface OUT
l #7
X8 B
u Horizontal Bus
s
Fiber
interface OUT
#0
ENET (Enhanced NETwork) is a single stage, non blocking, time switch capable of switching
131,072 one-way digital circuits or 65,536 two-way digital circuits (2048 PCM 30).
The switching network, consists of eight Horizontal buses for input, and eight Vertical buses
for output.
A Time Slot Interchange Unit (TSIU) is located at each of the 64 crosspoints:
• unswitched channels entering onto the Vertical bus are written into a double-buffered
memory in each cross-point card (TSIU),
• the appropriate cross-point circuit takes unswitched channels from the Vertical Bus and
feeds them to the suitable Horizontal Bus in the right time-slot,
• from the H-bus, the time-slot goes back through the V-bus, where it is transmitted to the
appropriate terminating peripheral,
• each TSIU (16K x 16K time-switch) store 16,384 time slots in a double-buffered
configuration so that the delay through the TSIU is always a fixed 125 micro seconds.
The connection-memory control is updated by the DMS-Core (through the DMS-Bus and the
ENET processor).
Nortel’s ENET time-switch is available up to 128K (2 cabinet of 128K, one plane in each
cabinet) channels configuration.
SuperNode DMS currently uses an ENET up to 64K channels (one cabinet of 2 planes, each
of 64K).

Link Peripheral Processor (LPP)
DMS-Core I/O
equipment ENET PDTC
frame
Channelized
CCS7 from PSTN
DMS-Bus
ISDN
LPP LPP
LMS unit LMS unit
LIU7 NIU NIU LIU7 LIU7 LIU7 EIU EIU
Ethernet LAN
CSS7 MTP V.35

4215 /MR P
treatment
HLR EIR
LMS = Local Message Switch
The Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) equipment provides the following functions:
• Terminates a number of link types and implements a number of protocols, to connect
the DMS to external operating and signaling networks (PCM, Ethernet, V.35).
• Receives and transmits all CCS7 messages to/from switch into PLMN and PSTN either
in direct (V.35) or channeled access (PCM30 link).
• Interfaces DMS-Core and CCS7 through DMS-Bus.
• Allows for increased message handling by connecting the CCS7 network to the DMS-
Core (through the switching matrix).
It consists of several units:

• LMS: Local Message Switch, controls the messaging between LPP’s equipment and
DMS-Bus.
• NIU: Network Interface Unit, acts as a switch for channeled access and manages CCS7
signaling coming through PCM30 trunks from BSS. A NIU handles up to 10 LIU7s.
• LIU7: Link Interface Unit, performs the necessary routing functions on the signaling
messages thereby relieving DMS-Core of this function or coming from other nodes such
as VLR, HLR, (V.35).
• EIU: Ethernet Interface Unit, interface between DMS-bus and any Ethernet LAN.

LPP Cabinet
FSP
Local Message PP P P
SS LMS 0 LMS1 S S
Switch UU UU
One LIS contains

Link Interface PP P P
either 12 LIUs or
SS LIS S S
Shelf UU UU 10 LIUs + 2 NIU
PP P P
SS LIS S S
UU UU
PP PP
Super Node Hardware SS LIS SS
UU UU
COOLING UNIT
LPP = Link Peripheral Processor

The LPP Cabinet is currently featured with either 24 LIUs or 36 LIUs.
On the other hand, one can replace two LIU in each shelf by two NIU to provide channelized
signaling access.
The LPPs can be also shipped within the SNSE hardware. In that case one can use 12
expansion slots for the LIUs (12 LIUs or 10 LIUs + 2 NIUs) plus 2 additional slots for 2 LIUs
close to the ENET.

PCM-30 Digital Trunk Controller (PDTC)
PCM-30
#0
Shelf 0 DS512
Processor Fiber
Interface
PCM-30
#7
PCM-30
#8
Shelf 1
DS512
Processor Fiber
Interface
PCM-30
# 15
PDTC are designed to provide the necessary functions for supporting trunk termination to
the outside world.
The Dual-shelf Digital Trunk Access (DTA0, DTA1) processor operate in hot standby mode.
One shelf's processor is active, providing the necessary processing and control functions,
while the adjacent shelf's processor is in a standby mode that is able to takeover if a fault
occurs on the active shelf's processor.

Peripherals: ISM
ISM = Integrated Service Module

FSP
•• The
The ISM
ISM Shelf
Shelf contains
contains
P P
Not Used
P P
S S S S
U U U U
✓
✓ Maintenance
Maintenance and
and service
service circuits:
circuits:
–– Enhanced
Enhanced Digital
Digital Recorded
Recorded
Announcement
Announcement Machine
Machine (EDRAM)
(EDRAM) PP P
P P P
S 2
–– Conference
Conference Trunk
Trunk Module
Module (CTM)
(CTM)
SS
UU
S
U
U
S S
U U
✓
✓ Special circuit packs for:
Special circuit packs for:
–– alarm
alarm cross-connect
cross-connect shelf
shelf P P P P
–– Office
Office Alarm
Alarm Unit
Unit S S 1 S S
U U
U U
✓
✓ IOM
IOM pack
pack
•• ISM
ISM Dimensioning
Dimensioning P P P P
✓
✓ 33 shelves
shelves per
per cabinet
cabinet
S S
U U
0 S S
U U
✓
✓ Up
Up to
to 18
18 test
test and
and service
service circuits
circuits
The ISM accommodates up to 18 test and service circuit packs used in switch and facility
maintenance like the Enhanced Digital Recorded Announcement Machine (EDRAM),
Conference Trunk Module (CTM) and, with special circuit packs, an alarm cross-connect
shelf and an Office Alarm Unit.

Peripherals: IOM
IOM = Input Output Module

ISM Shelf
•• I/O
I/O Functionality
Functionality
✓
✓ Disk
Disk drive
drive
✓
✓ Tape
Tape drive
drive units
units
✓
✓ Enhanced
Enhanced Multi-protocol
Multi-protocol controller
controller (EMPC)
(EMPC) P
O
R
✓ V.32, V.FAST and V.42 and Asynchronous
✓ V.32, V.FAST and V.42 and Asynchronous T
+
D
DAT
communications
communications up
up to
to 28.8
28.8 kb/s
kb/s
D
U
IOM Packs
✓
✓ Optional
Optional Digital
Digital Audio
Audio Tape
Tape (DAT)
(DAT) drive
drive for
for P
O
removable
removable storage
storage up
up to
to 1.3
1.3 Gbytes
Gbytes
R
T
+
D
D
U
The Input/Output Module (IOM) is a new DMS pack that replaces the functionality of the
Input Output Controller (IOC), disk drive, tape drive units and Enhanced Multi-Protocol
Controller (EMPC), which were provided by various cards in the Input/Output Controller
shelf.
In addition, the IOM provides new functionality through the support of V.32, V.FAST, V.42
and asynchronous communications of up to 28.8 kb/s and will also support an optional
Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive for removable storage of up to 1.3 Gbytes.
The IOM is housed in the new Integrated Services Module (ISM) shelf.
When the DAT option is implemented, the DAT card is located in slot 4 of the ISM, to the
right of the IOM DDU card. In this case, slot 5 is not available, because of the width of the
DAT. For the same reason, slot 3 is not recommended for DAT.
A second IOM can be provisioned in a different ISM shelf, for redundancy.

Billing Server
FSP
Local storage P P Billing Server P P
and transfer of Billing Data S S

U U File Processor
S S
U U
P P
P P P
•• Billing
Billing server
server Processor
Processor
S S
S
U
S
U U
U
S
U
S
U
✓
✓ Duplicated
Duplicated processor
processor
✓ SCSI Interface
✓ SCSI Interface P P Storage
16 PCM30s P P
•• Mass
Mass Storage
Storage Devices
Devices
S S
U U Devices
S S
U U
✓
✓ 66 shadowed
shadowed Disks
Disks (12
(12 disks
disks Max)
Max)
✓
✓ 1.3 Gbyte shadowed DAT Storage Unit
1.3 Gbyte shadowed DAT Storage Unit P P Storage P P
✓
✓ 55 ** 2.1GB
2.1GB shadowed
shadowed disks
disks == 10GB
10GB
S S
U U
Devices S S
U U
16 PCM30s
•• Provides
Provides OSI
OSI FTAM
FTAM interface
interface
COOLING UNIT
AFP Applications File Processor cabinet
Billing Server uses the Application File Processor cabinet (AFP).

The Billing Server capacity is DISK 6 shadowed: 12 disk Maximum of which one Disk has
2.1GB capacity.
Usually it is equipped with one shadowed DAT (1.3GB on each side).
This means that there remains five Disks slots per side: 10GB capacity.

SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE)

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission". 1 - Overview
FSP FSP FSP FSP FSP FSP
MTD
P P P P P P P P Billing Server
PP Maintenance PP PP PP P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S SS SS SS SS S S MS0 MS1 S S S S S S
UU UU UU UU File Processor
U U U U U U U U Trunk Module U U U U U U U U
PCM30 Digital
Trunk Controller
PDTC 1 POWER
LOAD
ON LINE
REWIND
P P P P P P P P FORWARD
PP Maintenance PP PP PP P P P P P P
REVERSE
SS SS SS SS Optional LIS P P P WRITE
ENABLE
S S S S S S S S S S S S
UU Trunk Module UU UU UU (up to 12 LIUs) SS S
S S S
U U U U U U U U U U U U
UUUU U U
P P P P P P P P Storage
16 PCM30s
PP Maintenance PP PP PP P P 16K ENET P P PP P P P P PP
S S
S S S S S S S S SS SS SS SS S S S S S S Devices S S S S IOC
UU
UU Trunk Module UU UU UU UU
U U U U U U U U U U U U UU U U
PCM30 Digital
Trunk Controller
PDTC 0
P P P P P P P P S Storage
PP PP PP PP P P S P P PP PP
S S S S S S S S SS Maintenance SS SS SS L CPU 0 CPU 1 L
P P P P S S DDU S S
UU UU S S S S S S Devices S S UU UU
UU Trunk Module UU U U M M U U
U U U U U U U U U U U U
16 PCM30s
COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT
Cabinetized Cabinetized Cabinetized SuperNode SE Applications File Cabinetized

Power Trunk Module Digital Trunk SCC cabinet Processor cabinet Input/Output
Distribution Equipment Controller for Equipment
Center Offshore ISDN
Equipment
As an alternative option, the DMS SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE) gives network
providers greater flexibility (footprint) in deploying advanced capabilities in small offices.
The new Supernode Combined Core (SCC) cabinet contains:
• the DMS SuperNode processing and messaging platform,
• the Enhanced Network (ENET),
• the Link Peripheral Processor (LPP) platform.
In the SuperNode version, this equipment requires three or four cabinets.
Nevertheless we have much less capacity in term of LIU7 and PDTCs than the Super Node
(SN).
If more than 16K switching capacity is required on an SNSE configuration, the SNSE ENI
shelf can be replaced by a full ENET cabinet which allows for 64K with a single cabinet and
is expandable to a 128K configuration.

SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE)

2 - The SCC Cabinet FSP
P P P P
S S LMS 0 LMS1 S S
Supernode Combined Core cabinet

UU UU
replaces 3 cabinets P P
S S
UU
LIS
P P
S S
U U
FSP P P P P
S S LIS S S
UU U U
FSP PP PP
SS SS P P P P
PP
SS MS 1
P P
S S UU MS0 MS1 UU S S
UU
LIS S S
U U
UU UU
COOLING UNIT
PP P P
SS MS 0 S S
UU UU
PP PP Link Peripheral
SS Optional LIS SS Processor (LPP)
PP
SS CM 1 CM 0
P P
S S UU (up to 12 LIUs) UU
UU UU
FSP
PP PP
SS SS PP P P
SLM 0 SLM 1
UU UU
PP PP SS
UU
ENET 0.0 S S
U U
SS 16K ENET SS
COOLING UNIT UU UU PP P P
SS ENET 0.1 S S
UU U U
Dual-plane
Combined Core PP S S PP PP
SS ENET 1.0
P P
S S
(DPCC) SS L CPU 0 CPU 1 L SS UU U U
UU M M UU
PP P P
S S ENET 1.1 S S
UU U U
COOLING UNIT
Enhanced Network
(ENET) equipment
The different components in the SCC cabinet are:

• DMS Bus: which is a fully redundant, high speed transaction switch, is the hub joining all
peripheral modules, devices and processors that are connected to its ports. It is located
on either the SNSE or SuperNode cabinet.
• Link Interface Shelf: LIUs process SS7 signaling messages between the DMS-Core, the
DMS-Bus and the SS7 signaling Network. The LPP is a stand-alone cabinet. This
functionality is also provided by the LIS (Link Interface Shelf) shelf, which is located in
the SNSE cabinet.
• Max NB V.35-LIU/EIU = 12; Max NB LIU Channelized Access = 10.
• ENET and Interface Shelf: provide voice and data connections between peripheral
modules and message paths to the DMS Bus. It is fully redundant, non-blocking
switching matrix. It is located on either the SNSE or as a stand-alone cabinet. The ENET
Shelf can also support 2 standard LIU7s for CCS7 links.
• DMS-Core: is a fully redundant Central Processing Unit (CPU) and memory reserve.
PSU = Power Supply Unit

MicroNode
1 - Overview
FSP MSP MSP
PP PP
SS MS 0 MS 1 SS PDTC 0 unit 1 DSX
UU UU
PP PP
SS LIS SS PDTC 0 unit 0 Echo Cancellor
UU UU
ENET
PP PP
SS SS ISM 1 AC/DC Rectifier
Plane 0 Plane 1
UU UU
PP PP
S S SLM CPU 0 CPU 1 SLM S S SDM/FT
ISM 0 Battery Backup
UU 0 1 UU
COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT
SCC SuperNode Size Enhanced (SNSE) MCGS Meridian Cabinet MCIP Meridian Cabinet
Combined Core Global Switch Interface & Power
The MicroNode is based on the DMS platform and benefits from all the DMS advantages in
terms of reliability and scalability.
All critical functionality is fully duplicated working in a "hot standby", "loadsharing" or "warm
standby" mode of operation which means that in the event of a failure, takeover by the
replacement element is automatic.
The front end of the MicroNode switch is the SCC cabinet (same as SuperNode Size
Enhanced cabinet).
The second cabinet, is the MCGS (Meridian Cabinet Global Switch) which is configured with
a DTC or PDTC.
The third cabinet, is the MCIP (Meridian Cabinet Interface Power) which contains rectifiers,
battery backup, echo cancellers, and DSX panels.

MicroNode
2 - MCGS and MCIP Cabinets
Meridian Cabinet Global Switch Meridian Cabinet Interface Power

MSP MSP
PDTC 0 unit 1 DSX
PDTC 0 unit 0 Echo Cancellor
ISM 1 AC/DC Rectifier
SDM/FT
ISM 0 Battery Backup
COOLING UNIT COOLING UNIT
MCGS Cabinet MCIP Cabinet

The MCGS (Meridian Cabinet Global Switch) cabinet merges two existing cabinets into one,
providing a cabinet that fits the technical needs without the footprint and power requirements
needed by larger systems. It comprises of the following:
• 16E1/20T1 port Digital Trunk Controller,
• 2 Integrated Service Module (ISM) shelves each containing the following circuit packs,
• 1 Gigabyte Disk Drive,
• 1 DAT Drive,
• Minimal MAP ports,
• Modems.
The MCIP (Meridian Cabinet Interface Power) cabinet, designed to provide power, gathers
all power assets required to operate a small switch into one cabinet. It comprises of the
following:
• Power Distribution Shelf, provides power distribution to MCIP and MCGS cabinets.
• Battery Backup system, provides 53 Amps, -48 V DC for 4 hours.
• AC/DC Rectifiers, provides 220 V AC to -48 V DC.
• Echo Cancellers, provides echo cancellation for PSTN spans, either T1 or E1. 8 of the
16 slots are populated for the pre-engineered configuration.
• DSX provides cross-connectivity between the switch and the outside world. There are 2
such DSX cross connect panels in the MicroNode.

Incoming Call from the PSTN to the GMSC
Core Module
GMSC
premises
3 4 2
DMS-Bus
4 3 2 5
2 2
3 3 Peripheral
LIU7 NIU ENET
ENET
Modules
4 4
1
1- Call to the MS.
2- ISUP messages are treated in the DMS
core through signaling devices
(NIU & LIU7).
3- DMS cannot route further, therefore
interrogates HLR for an MSRN. 3 4
4- HLR complies with the routing number.
5- Now DMS can route the call. Telephone
HLR network
MSRN 3
VLR
n° VLR
MSRN 1
4

A Call Goes to the VMSC that Pages the MS
Core Module VMSC

premises
3 4 2
DMS-Bus
2 4
3 5
2 5
2
3 3 Peripheral
LIU7 NIU ENET
ENET
Modules
4 4
4 1
3
BSS
4 3
1- Call comes from the GMSC.
2- VMSC treats the ISUP messages in
BSC DMS core through the signaling
BTS
devices NIU & LIU7. Gateway
3- DMS requests BSS for paging MSC
Ring ! 4- MS complies.
5
5- DMS now can establish the voice
circuit.
Roamer

Nortel IWF: Gsm PassPort Node
The Magellan cabinet

can host 2 GPP nodes
The IWF function is situated in a Gsm PassPort (GPP) node.

The Magellan cabinet can contain two GPP nodes.
This node is used in the PassPort family of data switches: i.e. PassPort 160.

GPP Node
"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission". 1 - Physical Presentation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
L D E 1 1
A S 1 p p
N 1 or C • • • D or E • • •
C S 1
C C
1 M
P P
M v
v p
p
Each GPP node is composed of:

• a node shelf assembly (function and control processor cards),
• the DC power convertors,
• a cooling unit,
• a cable management assembly.
The GPP shelf can contain up to 16 cards:

• slots 0 and 15 are reserved for CPs cards (one redundant CP card may be optionally
provisioned),
• slot 1 is reserved for Ethernet card,
• slots 2 to 14 can contain Function Processor Cards (E1C and E1MVP).

GPP Node
2 - Functional Architecture
Function Processors (FP)

Control
Processor (CP)
Control LAN Function DS1C/E1C Munich MVP Interface

32 DSPs
Processor Processor LAN Processor Chip Processor Module
Interface (IM)
i960 32M i960 32M i960 32M i960 32M Processor

Bus Bus Bus Bus Bus Bus Bus Bus
Module
Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller (PM)
Dual 800 Mbit/s Cell Buses
Each GPP node is composed of four blocks:

• Control Processors (CP) and Function Processors (FP) are the processing elements for
performing and managing Magellan PassPort functions.
In most cases, the software providing a service is split into Control and Function parts:
the Control part runs on the CP and the Function part, on the FP.
• Function Processors (FP) provide interface ports that physically connect network
communications facilities and PassPort switches. They switch data from external
sources through the bus and out of the switch through other FPs. FPs have been
designed specifically to accommodate high data throughput. Their computational
resources support and execute only those real-time processes critical to rapidly
delivering a service. These processes include protocol handling, call routing, and packet
forwarding.
• Ethernet card is a specific FP that handles IP connectivity (signaling MIP link).
• PassPort bus is the bridge which allows data to be switched across different types of
processor cards. It is fully redundant and consists of two synchronous 32 bit 25 MHz cell
buses, operating in a load-sharing capacity, which can communicate with up to 16
function and control processors.
Each bus operates at 800 Mbit/s for an aggregate speed of 1.6 Gbit/s. When both buses are active, traffic is
distributed across both buses (dual-bus mode); should one bus fail, the other continues, although capacity is
reduced to 800 Mbit/s (single-bus mode).

GPP Node
3 - Connections
VLR
CPDC
E E E
1 1 T C
C M H P
V
P
PCM Termination Panels
VT420 Local Console
PCM 30
Ethernet
Terminal Panel
IP Network PC
VLR VLR
PDTC EIU
DTCO LIM
This drawing shows the different connections between GPP and other equipment.
• The Cabinetized Power Distribution Center feeds GPP with -48 V power supply.
• Several cables make the link between cards and «terminal panels» where PCM and
Ethernet links are connected. The termination panel is a cable distribution system which
can reside in the PassPort cabinet or be mounted in another cabinet or rack.
• A local console can be connected directly on CP card for direct access.

Nortel’s IN Platform: ServiceBuilder
Service Creation and

ServiceBuilderTM Management Environment
Intelligent Network
Internet
MAP SMS
SCP
HLR
SMS-C
CS1-R
CAP+ CAP+
MAP CS1-R Intranets
PRI IP
MSC
SSP DMS-100
SSP
Voice
Signaling
GSM Network Fixed Network
Service Management
Nortel's IN architecture is made of a Service Control Point (SCP) which is connected via
standard open interfaces (Core INAP) to the wireline and GSM switches; these have been
enhanced to support IN via the integrated Service Switching Point (SSP) functionality.
Nortel's IN architecture also comprises an Intelligent Peripheral (IP) used to provide voice
interaction between the subscriber and the IN service.
The IP is connected both to the SCP and to the SSPs.
Finally, Nortel's IN architecture comprises all the elements required to support service
creation in the IN.
This includes a Service Creation Environment (SCE) and a Service Management System
(SMS).

Check Your Learning
1- What is the function of the DMS-Core?
2- What is the purpose of the DMS-Bus?

3- What is the purpose of the ENET?
4- What are the functions of the V-Bus and the H-Bus?
5- What is the maximum number of channels that a single ENET

cabinet configuration can support?
1- What is the function of the DMS-Core?
2- What is the purpose of the DMS-Bus?
3- What is the purpose of the ENET?
4- What are the functions of the V-Bus and the H-Bus?
5- What is the maximum number of channels that a single ENET cabinet configuration can
support?

Check Your Learning
6- What is the purpose of the PDTC?

7- What is the purpose of the LPP?
8- List four elements of the DMS Super Node.
9- Cite the modules which are combined into a compact, single cabinet
of the SNSE configuration.
6- What is the purpose of the PDTC?
7- What is the purpose of the LPP?
8- List three elements of the DMS Super Node.
9- Cite the modules which are combined into a compact, single cabinet of the SNSE
configuration?

Student Notes:

OSS Functions
Section 17
OSS Functions
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 OSS Functions 17-1

OSS Functions
Objectives
Provides an introduction to the Operation and

maintenance Sub-System (OMC-R and OMC-S)

• Explain why we need an OMC-R and an OMC-S.
• Relate the main O&M functions devoted to the BSS and NSS.
• Show what elements are operated by an OMC.
• Explain the OMC-R architecture and locate the Q3 interface.
• Show the various solution for the implementation of the OMC-R
network.
• Show the hierarchy of the OMC-R objects.

OSS Functions
OSS Presentation
Stage 1 Stage 2
WS WS WS WS WS WS
SERVER SERVER SERVER
OMC/R OMC/S NMC
OMN
Q.3
Q.x Q.x Q.x Q.x
BSS BSS BSS NSS NSS NSS

MD MD MD
Q.x OMN Q.x

Q.x : Proprietary interface
WS : Work Station
MD : Mediation Device Transmission
NMC : Network Management Center BSS BSS BSS NSS NSS
Network
NE : Network Element
NE NE NE NE NE NE
The Operation SubSystem is in charge of the control and management of the GSM Network.
One distinguishes two types of OMC:
• the OMC-R, which is able to manage several BSS,
• the OMC-S, which is able to manage several NSS components.
One OMC mainly consists of a Server and WorkStations connected through a Local Area
Network such as Ethernet.
The link between the Server and the BSS or NSS named OMN Interface (Operation and
Maintenance Network), is a X.25 public or private Network.
In a first stage, the operation and maintenance functions for the different equipment of BSS
or NSS, are carried out through dedicated OMC.
Each OMC dialogues with managed entities through Q.x interface which is a proprietary
interface.
In a second stage, it is possible to manage the BSS or NSS from different suppliers via
specific Mediation Devices at a central position: the Network Management Center (NMC).
The interface between the NMC and the different MD is named Q.3 and is normalized.

OSS Functions
Network Management
1 - Telecommunication Management Network
BTS Site
Coupling device
Operation
System Hybrid coupling device
Functions
Cavity coupling device
Data TRX
Communication
Functions TRX A
TRX B
Mediation TRX C
Functions
BCF
NSS TMN Functions

BTS Object Classes
The operation, maintenance and administration functions follows standard telecom

management principles.
The GSM Recommendations use object management similar to the Telecommunication
Management Network TMN developed by CCITT.
Dialogues between management entities pertain to modeled abstract representations of the
network to manage which is defined and stored in a management data base.
This model must lists the different components of the network (objects), their relationships
and their attributes.
Examples of managed objects are:
• sites,
• machines (MSC/VLR, BSC, HLR),
• hardware modules,
• transmission links,
• software,
• observations, tests.
The detailed specifications of the GSM architecture give the ability to identify object classes
which will apply to all GSM networks.

OSS Functions
Network Management
2 - Network Object Tree Example
OMC-R
BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC

Radio Radio Radio TCU TCU TCU

Site Site Site
TUC TCB TCB

Cell Cell board board board
BCF TRX TRX
DRX PA
Channel Channel
0 7
Each entity has a software representation. One entity can be a piece of hardware, like for
example an electronic board (PCMI board), a cabinet, a functional entity (cell, TCU) or a
piece of software.
This software representation is an object model representation known as the Management
Information Base (MIB) or Management Information Tree (MIT).
To manipulate these objects, we use UNIX commands, not directly but through a Graphical
User Interface on an OMC-R WorkStation.
For example, to access a specific objet, we double-click on its representation on the screen.

OSS Functions
Network Management
3 - Objects, Attributes and Parameters
Nortel Networks Nortel Networks
Ref: Date:
Attributes: Ref:1999/026 Date: 06/10/99
• Reference
• date
Number of pages: Number of pages: 1/1

• Number of pages
From: To: From: Me To: You
TEXT TEXT
This is my new number
FAX FAX
FAX Object Class Instance of FAX Object Class
Parameters = values given to the attribute

Example: Reference = 1999/026
There is an object class per entity.

We have for example the object class of BSC. And in each class, there are instances of the
object.
To well understand this, let ’s make an analogy with FAX.
What are the attributes of an object class?
In this example we may cite reference, date, Nb of pages,….
What are the parameters?
They are the values given to the attributes: reference = 1999/026.
What is the state of an object instance?
It ’s an indication to its current situation: a channel may be BUSY, FREE, UNAVAILABLE. A
change of state could be the transition FREE --> BUSY

OSS Functions
Network Management
4 - OMC-R Object Definition
State Interaction
Administrative Operational Availability

State State Status
LOCKED DISABLED
UNLOCKED ENABLED
DISABLED DEPENDENCY
FAILED
Attribute
State
Administrative Operational Availability Usage

State State State State
Specific to xtp object
Unlocked
Enabled Dependency
Locked Idle
Disabled Failed
Shutting Down Busy
Objects are characterized by state attributes: administrative, operational and availability.

Administrative state, describe the passive state of an instance, which can be modified by an
operator; there are three states:
• Unlocked (in service).
• Locked (out of service).
• Shutting down.
Operational state, describe the operational state of an object:
• Disabled.
• Enabled.
Availability status, describe the reason for an objects unavailability:
• Dependency, due to another object being disabled.
• Failed, problem with the object.

OSS Functions
Network Management
5 - Notifications
Event
Notification
Object Level: Critical,

Type Notification itself……...
Identif. Major, Minor
Each change of state generates a notification. A notification is a message that will be sent or
not to the top of the tree, according to what the operator decides.
Not every notification will arrive at the OMC-R, because it could overload the OMC-R CPU.
For example, we don’t send a notification to the OMC-R, each time a channel changes state;
to know the situation about that there are counters which are regularly reported. Example:
average number of busy TCH during the latest 15 ’, the latest hour, the latest day, ….
Filter is mandatory; so that not all the notification are sent to the OMC-R. Log files contain all
notifications arriving at the OMC-R.

OSS Functions
Network Management
6 - Handling Notifications
LOG Performance Alarm Handler Configuration Fault

OMC-R
BSC BSC BSC BSC BSC
Radio Radio Radio TCU TCU TCU

Site Site Site
TUC TCB TCB

Cell Cell board board board
BCF TRX TRX
DRX PA
Channel Channel
0 7
Notifications arriving at the OMC-R are distributed to different handling functions.

These functions can be part of the OMC-R or on separate platforms.
It is possible for notifications to be sent to more than one function: for example, it is normal
for all notifications to be sent to a log handler function.
These same notifications could be sent to other handling functions as well.
A notification from a mal functioning TRX would possibly be sent to:
• a log handler, to keep a record and possibly for later analysis,
• an alarm handler, to ensure any automate handling procedures were initiated,
• a fault handler, to ensure the operator is alerted and fault management procedures can
be started.

OSS Functions
Configuration Management
1 - OMC-R Data Bases
OMC-R OMC-R
User MMI User view
Objects Q.3 Manager Q.3 view

MIB
Part
Q.3
Q.3 Agent Part
Software Mediation
MD-R BDE view
OMN Interface
Dynamic
Attributes BSS
BDA BSC view
Managed objects are spread on three data bases stored on hard disks:
• MIB (Management Information Base) located in the OMC-R (Q.3 level),
• BDE (Exploitation Data Base) located in the OMC-R (MD-R level),
• BDA (Application Data Base) located in the BSC.
MIB:
• Is under OMC-R management control and is progressively built as long as objects are
created.
• Is automatically updated whenever a relevant operation is performed.
• Contains BSC related objects and other specific OMC-R objects (in Q.3 format).
BDE:
• Is under OMC-R management control and is progressively built as long as objects are
created.
• Is automatically updated whenever a relevant operation is performed.
• Contains BSC related objects and other specific OMC-R objects (unknown to the BSCs).
BDA Data base building is not automatic and is controlled by user.
In order to operate correctly, these two data bases must remain consistent:
• Audit transactions check the state of the BDA compared to the BDE.
• Users are warned when discrepancies occur.

OSS Functions
Configuration Management
2 - BSS Software Management
OMC BSC BTS
BCF
TRX
TCU
BDE BDA TCB
OMC software BSC software
BTS software TCU software

The main functionality of this sub-function are:

• Management of the software on the OMC-R disks.
• Downloading management (MD-R level).
• Software version change.
The downloading operation consists of sending a set of files correctly identified on the target
BSC disk, these files are stored in specific partitions of the disk, according to the type of the
concerned entities:
• BSC.
• BTS: btsSiteManager (BCF) or transceiver Equipment (TRX).
• TCU: Transcoder board.
Software management is also in charge of MD and OMC software.

OSS Functions
Fault Management
Failure
detection
Alarm
reception Fault
recovery
Days/
Nights Week-ends
Manufacturer Day off
S
E Immediate
intervention
V
E Deferred Alarms Alarms
R intervention Configuration Acknowledg.
I No
T intervention
Y
Fault Management enables the network operator to maximize the availability of the GSM
network, through rapid response to failure conditions by performing fault isolation and fault
recovery.
Alarms should be acknowledged and may be configured differently in terms of severity,
according to alarm criterion configurations.
Severity configurations are:
• Immediate intervention,
• Deferred intervention,
• No intervention outside normal working hours.
Alarm criterion configurations are:
• Manufacturer,
• Days/Nights,
• Special (week-ends and holidays).

OSS Functions
Performance Management
Counter's value
Start of high
threshold crossing
End of high
threshold crossing
End of low
threshold crossing
Start of low
threshold crossing Time
Alarm start Alarm end

Threshold crossing detection for preventive maintenance
Performance data monitoring allows network usage patterns and trends to be identified,
enabling informed network design and engineering decisions to be made to optimize network
resource utilization.
Performance Management relies on counters collected by the OMC-R and OMC-S
(observations), followed by the analysis and subsequent storage of resultant data.
Main functions are:
• Reception of measurements (counters) transmitted by BSS or NSS.
• Report building, to be displayed or printed in a readable format, for the end user.
• Reporting the crossing of thresholds counters.

OSS Functions
Security Management
Command Classes:
• Configuration
• Fault Commands:
• Performance • Create
• Password • Delete
• BDE/BDA • Set
• FTAM and EFT • Display

• Command files and jobs • Modify
• SMS/CB • Lock
• Inter-user message
Users profile e of
Z o n rest
In t e
The Security Management aims to manage user profiles in order to control the access users
to functions provided by the OMCs.
Security Management handles authorization and control of access of the users to the OMC
functionality.
A user profile file is created for each OMC user.
User’s profile:
• user name and password (and password validity duration),
• user work timetable (inactivity time out and scheduled access time),
• a set of command classes,
• a zone of interest.

OSS Functions
Why an OMC-R?
To control and monitor the BSS equipment
OMC-R
Network’s quality of service
BSS Operation cost
BSC
BTS
BTS
BTS
BTS
The OMC-R permits a centralized and remote operation and maintenance of BSS network
elements (BSC, TCU and BTS).
Remote and centralized operation activity provides the following advantages:
• The operation information related to different network elements is managed consistently
ensuring effective maintenance and thus a high quality of service to the network's
subscribers.
• The operation costs can be minimized (for example the OMC-R provides a remote and
centralized downloading and activation of software releases, as well as a centralized
and remote management of the BSS configuration parameters).

OSS Functions
OMC-R Functions
BSS Internal
Management Functionality
Configuration
File Transfer
Management
Fault
Man
Machine Common Functions
Interface
Performance
Server Administration
Security
The OMC-R is made up of server and stations. Each station or X-terminal provides the
operating staff with a Graphical User Interface. The server centralizes the O&M functions
dedicated to the BSS network elements and thus allows to manage the BSS network
elements consistently.
The following O&M functions are provided:
• Configuration management: to manage the resources to be supervised. Examples of
resources that can be managed : PCM links, SS7 and traffic channels on A-interface, cells, list
of frequencies allocated in each cell, list of adjacent cells of a given cell, frequency hopping laws
implemented in the cells, TDMA frames.
• Fault management: OMC-R handles event reports received from the network elements and
related to anomalies. Alarm messages can be generated with a severity from these reports by
using criteria defined by the user.
• Performance management: values of counters are collected from the BSS network elements
and reports are generated and displayed to the users. Thresholds can be defined and
associated with the counters to generate alarms for maintenance purposes.
• Security management: to manage user profiles in order to control the access users to functions
provided by the OMC-R.
The following internal functions are provided:
• File transfer management: downloading and activation of the software releases dedicated to
TCU, BSC, BCF and TRX is centralized via the OMC-R.
• Common functions: inter-user mail (running within an SMS-C server), management and
execution of commands file, calendar for the deferred or periodic execution of a command or a
commands file, on-line help.
• Server administration: supervision, switch-over and defense of the servers an stations.

OSS Functions
Common Functions
Reference
Command Time
Files Consulting Data Archival
Management
Documentation
Calendar Management
?
HELP
1 2 3 4 On-Line
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
TX Mail RX Mail
User 1 User 2
User Mail
This functional area provides the user with the following services:
• Command files management that enables the edition recording and the execution of
sequences of user commands.
• The archiving and restoring of notifications and observations.
• A job scheduler that enables requests for deferred and/or periodical execution of a user
command or a commands file.
• The data & time provides services to read data/time of MD functions and update.
• A user mail facility enabling the exchanges of messages between users.
• An on-line help.
• The display of product documentation stored on CD-ROM.

OSS Functions
Server Administration
Shut down
Start up
Supervision
OMC
OMC OMC
Switch-over
Active Back-up
Server Server
The following services are provided to the user:

• The powering-up and the shutting down of the OMC servers.
• The automatic purging of files deletes old data files in order to avoid overfilling of the
disks.
• The automatic switch over of the active server.
• Defense accomplishes a monitoring and supervision task as well as management of its
own tasks.
Supervision includes software and machine operations monitoring.
Defense management can send event messages to Fault management.
It can also restart, reboot or switchover to the backup server if necessary.

OSS Functions
OMC-S Functions
NSS OMC-S
Configuration
MSC/VLR
Fault
HLR/AUC Security
Facilities
Performance
The Operation and Maintenance Center of the NSS part (OMC-S) may be able to achieve
different kinds of function.
NSS configuration management:
• BSCs, Location Areas, Cells.
• Terrestrial links, etc..
• Software configuration (downloading, file transfer).
• MSRN and handover number management.
Fault management:
• Detection.
• Presentation.
• Re-configuration.
Performance management:
• Traffic control.
• Service quality monitoring.
Security management:
• User profiles.
• Session monitoring.
OMC-S operation:
• System management.
• OMN management.
• File transfer operations.

OSS Functions
Hierarchical Arrangement of NMC and OMC

X-terminal
Network
Level 4 Commercial
Management
GSM network
Center (NMC)
Management
Q3 Q3
Level 3
X-terminal
OMC-S OMC-R OMC-R OMC-S OMC-R OMC-R
O & M communication network

Level 2
X.25
HLR MSC
Level 1
BSS BSS
The Network Managment Center (NMC) has a view of the entire Network GSM and is
responsible for the network management as a whole. The NMC resides at the top of the
hierarchy. It receives its information from the network equipment via the Operation and
Maintenance Centers (OMC) which have previously filtered the suitable data.
The NMC can thus focus on issues requiring national coordination regarding interconnects to
others networks, such as the PSTN / ISDN.
The features of the NMC are as follows:
• Single NMC by network.
• Provides traffic management for the whole network.
• Monitors high-level alarms such as failed or overloads nodes.
• Performs responsibilities of an Operation and Maintenance Center when it is not staffed.
• Provides network planners with essential data for network performance.
The Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC), in turn, is considered as a "regional
manager" for the network hardware and software. It supports the day-to-day operations as
well as provides a database for long-run network engineering and planning tools. OMC
handles a certain area of the GSM network, thus providing regional network management.

OSS Functions
Check Your Learning
1- Cite the four main functions that perform an OMC.

2- What are the network elements operated by an OMC-R?
3- What is the open interface used in the OMC-R?
4- Give an example of hierarchy between OMC-R objects.
1- Cite the four main functions that perform the OMC.
3- What is the open interface used in the OMC-R?
4- Give an example of hierarchy between OMC-R objects.

OSS Functions
Student Notes:

OMC-R, TML and OMC-S
Section 18
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 OMC-R, TML and OMC-S 18-1

Objectives
Provides an introduction to the Operation and

maintenance of Radio Subsystem (OMC-R)

• Explain why we need an OMC-R.
• Show what elements are controlled by an OMC-R.
• Relate the main O&M functions devoted to the BSS.
• Explain the OMC-R architecture and locate the Q.3 interface.
• Show the various solution for the implementation of the OMC-R
network.
• Show the hierarchy of the OMC-R objects.

OMC-R

OMC-R Architecture
Configurations
TML/ROT
X.25 Network BSS ROT
BSS
BSC-MD Interface BSS PSTN
BSS
BSS BSS TML/ROT
Monitoring link ROT
Server Sun
Monitor Enterprise Monitor
4000
Terminals Server
Sun 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ETHERNET
Sun SPARCstorage Array

SSA Sun SPARCstorage Array
LAN
Ethernet AUI SERIAL SERIAL CONSOLE AUX
I
O
Router
I
O
AUI SERIAL SERIAL CONSOLE AUX
I
O
AUI SERIAL SERIAL CONSOLE AUX
X Terminal Local WorkStations (SUN Sparc 5)
Router X.25 Network Router

I I
O O
AUI SERIAL SERIAL CONSOLE AUX AUI SERIAL SERIAL CONSOLE AUX
Remote LAN Remote LAN

CD Rom Ethernet Ethernet CD ROM
Unit Unit
Remote WorkStations (SUN Sparc 5)

The central OMC-R site is composed of the OMC-R servers, the WorkStations (WS), the
Terminal Server and the printers. All these platforms are interconnected via an Ethernet
LAN.
• The OMC-R server (duplicated for redundancy purposes) centralizes the O&M function
as well as the database. It is connected to the BSC via X.25 links. An automatic switch-
over is undertaken between the servers when needed.
• The WorkStations (up to 16) supporting a Graphical User Interface called Man Machine
Interface (MMI).
• X terminals: physically connected to the LAN and communicates with one WS.
• One or many printers can be shared between the WSs and X terminals.
• The Terminal Server concentrates the PSTN connections from BSS Local Maintenance
Terminals used in the field in ROT mode (Remote OMC-R Terminal) during
maintenance interventions.
• At least one local OMC-R WorkStation is to be provisioned in order to support the
connections from the ROTs used in the field and to support X terminals.
• Routers that support X.25 links to OMC-R remote sites if such sites exist in the OMC-R
configuration.
A remote OMC-R site is composed of WSs and printers only, and is connected to the OMC-
R server of the central site via an X.25 link.
Therefore, routers are to be used in the remote OMC-R site as well as in the central OMC-R
site in order to concentrate the connections from a remote site to the central site.

Hardware Architecture
New Storage Unit (From V12 only)
Enterprise 4500
(Agent +
Manager)
StorEDGE A5000
Active Storage Unit
StorEDGE
Sun
Enterprise 4500 A5000
(Agent +
Manager)
Passive
Two types of server are available, according to the network configuration:

• SPARCserver 1000 with 16.8 Go disk (less than 800 cells),
• Enterprise 4000 (less than 1600 cells).
The high capacity OMC product is achieved with the Enterprise 4000 platform and its
associated storage unit SPARCstorage Array.
This high capacity OMC-R will be able to manage a great number of cells allowing its use
for:
• micro-cell networks,
• networks with numerous but small sites.
From V12, for the new OMC-R configurations, the new StorEdge A5000 storage unit is
suggested to take the place of the two SSA112 disks.
Each server is a SUN Enterprise 4xxx. The nominal V11 configuration is based on the
E4500 device.

Remote Operation Terminal Application
OMC-R
Site ROT Terminals ETHERNET
OMC-R Task 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Server
Server
Modem Modem Modem
2 links X.25 48 kbit/s

PSTN
X25
BSC Site TML/ROT
ROT
BSC
19.2 kbit/s Modem
BTS Site BTS BTS

TML/ROT
BTS S4000/ S2000
S8000 ROT Modem
S2000E H&L
TML/ROT
TML/ROT
ROT
ROT
ROT Application is a software which runs beside Local Maintenance function

implemented in the Local Maintenance Terminal (TML) or a standalone PC/DOS
located in a remote site (TCU, BSC or BTS).
It is connected to an OMC-R work-stations either through PSTN links via modems or a dedicated
LAPD connection through the BSC. In case of PSTN connection the ROT function requires standard
Hayes command protocol and a suitable modem.
The ROT can be connected directly to these BTS: S2000E/S4000 (with AMNU+DCU4 only), and
S8000.
Not all the functionality offered through WS are available (Alarm criterion management, UNIX
access, log consultation, ...) with ROT access. For security purposes, all the Security Management
commands are not available.
After connection with the terminal server, a UNIX session is automatically established with an OMC-
R /WS which dynamically creates the ROT task on this WS. This feature is available since the
relevant BTS has been configured by the BSC.
ROT application capabilities
From the ROT menus and sub-menus the operator can:
• Access the appropriate object (or object characteristic).
• Perform the needed action on this object.
Thus he can perform the following functions:
• BSS configuration management and OMN access management.
• Security management, (limited to commands for password change and machine list).
• Performance management.
• Fault management.
• OMC-R administration.
• File transfer.
• Communication management.

Network Elements Operated by OMC-R
Normal capacity
OMC-R =
1600 cells, 6400 DRXs and 20 BSCs
High capacity
=
2400 cells, 9600 DRXs and 30 BSCs
20 (30) BSCs
BSC TCU
138
BTS
BTS
1600 (2400) cells

6400 (9600) TRXs
The OMC-R manages the BSCs, TCUs and BTSs.

TCUs and BTSs communicate with the OMC-R via their respective BSC.
The OMC-R interfaces with the BSC via X.25 links.
OMC-R operating capacity depends on the number of objects it manages but not on the
traffic it monitors:
• Maximum number of BSC = 20 (30).
• Maximum number of cells = 1600 (2400).
• Maximum number of TRX = 6400 (9600).
The physical OMC-R equipment limitations and software requirements are:
• Two servers to enable data redundancy.
• Sixteen WS with no more than thirteen Remote WS.
• One router per group of three Remote WS.
• No more than 10 ROT, connected at the same time to OMC-R.

Implementation of the OMC-R Network

The Three Solutions
1 2 3
WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS
OMC-R Server OMC-R Server

OMC-R Server
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
0 1 2 3
48 kbit/s V.35
X.25 Switch X.25 Switch

48 kbit/s
Automatic or
V.35-PCM conversion
Manual
X.25 network Leased Lines PCM

PSPDN 19.2 kbits
NSS
BSC
19.2 kbit/s
A-interface
BSC BSC
BSC BSC
BSC BSC
The OMC-R/BSC link can be based on various communication supports:

• X.25 PSPDN,
• X.25 switches and dedicated lines,
• or the use of PCM timeslots of the A-interface.
The use of the A-interface is interesting:
• if there is no reliable X.25 network in a given country,
• if the operator wants to be independent from a third party carrier,
• if he wishes to reduce the leased line cost,
• if he wishes to establish OMC-R and OMC-S units in the same location.
The main advantage of that solution is that the OMC-R/BSC connections are supported by
PCM links of the managed GSM network itself.

New Man-Machine Interface

V11 versus V9-V10
V9-V10 V11
New objects
overall view
Allows to display more objects

in the network views
Starting from the V11 release, a new Man-Machine Interface takes the place of the V9-V10
one.
The major MMI changes are introduced to increase operator efficiency through:
• separation of the physical and the logical view,
• clearer network logical view,
• better separation between alarms and object status,
• mapping of the physical view of the network on a geographical map,
• new graphical views of real time counters.

New MMI: Logical View
TCU Level
Full Network
BSC Level
Site Level
A-Interface
Each type of display of the logical mode shows different objects:

• the first logical view (Full Network) shows all the Network Elements, from the MSC down
to the sites,
• the BSC level includes the BSS objects (Signaling Point, Signaling Link) for one BSC,
• the Site level describes the BTSs belonging to one site as well as the TDMA frames,
• the TCU level displays the LAPD Link and the TCBs belonging to one TCU; this level is
the only way to access the A-Interface level,
• the A-Interface level mainly shows the XTPs used for MSC-BSC exchanges.

New MMI: Topological View
Full Network Sub Network

BSS
All the topological views show the geographical backgrounds of the network:
• in the Full Network view, all the sub networks are shown,
• in the Sub Network view, all the BSSs of the different sub networks are displayed,
• in the BSS view, all pieces of equipment belonging to one single BSS are shown on the
map.
Note
There is always a relationship between the logical / physical display level and, on the other
side, the topological level.

Alarm Window
Customizable
columns
organization
Sort
& filter
display
Alarm list
management
Complete
alarm
description
Access to
notifications
windows
On-line help
The alarm monitor has the following features:

• The alarms in the list are sorted according to the column order, which may be modified by the
user.
• The user may select the type of columns (i.e. of information) he wants to be displayed in the
minimized alarm summary.
• More than 30 criteria are available to filter the alarm list.
A current alarm carries the following information:
• A serial record number for the alarm message identification.
• A serial record number of the notification that triggered the alarm and prompted the alarm
message.
• The date and time on which the notification was sent.
• The type of spontaneous event.
• The fault number which identifies its type and therefore its cause.
• The priority of alarm: immediate (IM), deferred (ID), no action (SI).
• The alarm title.
• The identity and the location of the object and/or equipment from where the alarm is originated.
• The alarm acknowledge state, if the alarm is acknowledged and the identity of the user or the
OMC-R.
• If the alarm is cleared, the date and time the original notification was sent and the identity of the
user.
• The notification is also included apart from the additional information.

BSS on Site Maintenance with TML

Terminal Maintenance Local

BTS on Site Maintenance with TML

1 - TIB (Testing the BCF)
TIB VXX_YYZZ
+5 V
TIB STANDALONE MODE MENU
TEST
+5 V
RDY A: Starting Installation Tests
ON
B: Board Status
REQ
WD
L0 C: Prom Marking
L1
D: Shelf Number
RESET
CSW2 E: ALAT Alarms
F: ALAT Output
L G: DCC External Test
O
C
T
H: TX Configuration
REF.CLK
E
R I: FHBUS Configuration
M 0
1
J: Switching Matrix Configuration
2 K: Reset Board
CSW1 3
L L: DTI Board Tests -> External PCM
T M: Switching Matrix (Connection)
E
S J N: Board Alarms
T 6
4 O: CCT test
MAINT. P: Masthead test
NORM Q: TX state
R: End of TIB Application
MAINT
PC + HDLC board
Maintenance operations are performed on-site via a special terminal called TML (Local
Maintenance Terminal).
On-site maintenance provides a set of functions that give the operator information on the
state of BSS elements that is not always available at the OMC-R level.
This terminal is a PC-like computer including one standard Ethernet board and TCP/IP
protocol, running TML tools (under Windows 95 environment).
A special cable: cross Ethernet (cross RJ45-RJ45) connected to the Ethernet connector
allows dialog with the BCF or a DRX module.
TIB is the application part of the TIL (Terminal for Local Intervention) dedicated to the testing
and checking of the BCF. TIB operates with BCF through O&M Bus.


2 - TIF (Testing One Particular TRX)
FP 1 G FP 1.5 G
ACT1 +5V ALA +5V

VXX_YYZZ
ACT ACT ACT2 ACT ACT BIST TLC

TEMP DCU4 SPU
Asw Ahw
LI
TX
CL
RX
TIF STANDALONE MODE MENU
DCU DCU MNU DCU DCU
RESET A: Starting Installation Tests
J4 B: Board Status and BISTS
C: Prom Marking
T
E D: SDA Test
S
T RESET
E: RX Test
F: End of TIF Application
AMNU DCU4
INTERCARD INTERCARD
J5 J5
V.11
HDLC TML/TIL
64 kbit/s (PC 486 + PCMC525 board)
TIF is the application part for the TIL (terminal for local Intervention) dedicated to the testing
and checking of one particular TRX.
It may run in Standalone mode or in Connected mode.
The TML/TIL terminal must be connected to the TEST connector of the MNU or the AMNU
board.


BIST 3 - S8000 BTSs
+5 V
RDY
ON TIL S8000
O&M
ABIS
WDG DRX
MRQ
SERV
TIL
RESET Stand-alone
mode
CSWM Private PCM bus
T
E
S TIL
T Connected Gateway
mode
0 TX
1 RX TIL Internal PCM bus
2 LNK
LC COL
E
T
BCF
H
J
6 10 Mbit/s
4
Ethernet link
TML/TIL
CKI
GND PC 486 +
CKO Ethernet board
GND /PCMCIA
BCF CBCF
The TIL S8000 software of the TML is designed to:

• validate the BTS in factory,
• install BTS site,
• diagnose hardware problem,
• check equipment substitution or extension.
On the screen, a color button resumes the BIST status of each device.
For each device (or main function), a popup menu proposes a list of tests; each performable
in its specific window.
This tool can be used with BTS, in On-line or in Standalone mode.


4 - S2000H/L
TIL COAM /Window
DRX SBCF
S2000
IN SERVICE
Ethernet
TML
(PC/Windows 95
+ Ethernet board)

BSC on Site Maintenance with TML
MODE
BIST Option NORMAL MAINTENANCE
RUN R B
SCSI U
N
I
S
Partition contents
T Software markers
Board slot numbers
J5 Acces to MB II boards
PROM markers
Logical disk check
CPU
66SE Physical disk check
Disk initialisation
J4 J3
J3 CPU COM1
120
J2
J2
J1
J1
Serial port
asynchronous link
19.2 kbit/s
TML/BSC is an “on site” BSC maintenance tool which is connected to CPU – OMU through
an asynchronous serial link at a rate of 19.2 kbit/s.
Different tests are available on a given chain depending the selected mode:
• Normal mode is used when the BSC runs.
• Maintenance mode is used to isolate the chain from the system.
• Logical disk, physical disk check and disk initialization are not authorized in normal
mode.

TCU on Site Maintenance with TML
Audit
BIST Complete automatic
+5V
RDY Clock
R1
R2 TDTI boards number
R3
RL PC 486 TCB boards number
EXT
Markers
All boards
RESET
TUC
TUC TDTI
TCB
T BIST
E
S All boards
T
Serial port COM1: TUC
asynchronous link TDTI
TCB
J Alarms
6
4 Straps configuration
TEI configuration
TDTI boards configuration
Continuity test
All boards
TDTI
TML/TCU TCB
test tree structure Internal PCM states
External PCM states
TUC Board All boards
TDTI
TML/TCU is the TCU maintenance tool which runs on the local tool TML.
It is connected to the TCU board through an asynchronous serial link at a rate of 9.6
kbit/s.
All tests are performed in a standalone mode.

OMC-S

OMC-S
Q3
FM agent FM agent
PM agent PM agent
NES
The OMC-S are associated with Fault Management and Performance Management agents
running on the SDM/FT.
These agents interact with the network element’s internal operations and maintenance
functions, receiving and storing fault and performance data which are transferred to the
OMC-S or external NMC/OSS when required.
The Open Q3 interface requires interoperability testing and is between the SDM/FT and
external OSS for Fault Management application. Open Q3 interface for Performance
Management application will be available in GEM09 release.
This separation of management and agent functionality, allows the O&M processing to be
efficiently deployed by minimizing the amount of information required to be transferred to the
management system.
The OMC-S applications may be run on both PCs.
The OMC-S Man Machine Interface provides the user access to:
• Configuration management.
• Fault management.
• Performance management

SDM-FT Platform
1 - Architecture
SuperNode Data Manager- Fault Tolerant
- 48 V dc Maintenance and Power Bus A

A Feed
I/O Domain 0
Computing Core
Disk Comm & I/O
Subsystem
CPU 0
Dual Fault Tolerant I/O Buses
CPU 1
Disk Comm & I/O
Subsystem
I/O Domain 1
- 48 V dc
B Feed
Maintenance and Power Bus B

The SDM/FT (SuperNode Data Manager/Fault Tolerant) platform, introduced in GEM08

release, is based on Motorola FX open system Series and is housed into a standard DMS-
MC or DMS-HLR cabinet (C28).
This platform is fully integrated into the DMS power (-48 V) and alarm subsystems:
• up to 512 M RAM and 22 GB Disks on each I/O domain,
• high speed DS-512 optical connections to CM cabinet.
This platform collects and processes data to/from the managed MSC and HLR.
The SDM/FT is necessary to support all OAMP applications, apart from Billing Management
which is supported by GSM Billing Mediation Device (GBMD):
• FM and PM agents,
• provisioning server,
• service quality.

SDM-FT Platform
2 - Cabinet
MSP
Shelf 2
I/O Expansion Chassis
(Optional)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213141516
Shelf 1
Main Chassis
1 2 3 4 56 78 10
9 11
1213 141516
Cooling Unit

SDM-FT Platform
3 - Software Components
DMS

OMC-S Element Manager Main Window
Menu Bar
Tool Bar
Fault Management
Area
Configuration &
Performance
Area

Network Configuration Window

OMC-S Configuration Management covers:

• Displaying Configuration Management Window in List or Graphic mode.
• Displaying Information on Elements.
• Displaying Log files.

Fault Management
Fault Management enables the network operator to maximize the availability of the GSM
network, through rapid response to failure conditions by performing fault isolation and fault
recovery.
The OMC-S FM provides control of all fault management alarm information for the monitored
Network Elements (NE) including:
• Displaying of received alarms where each alarm contains the name, date, event that occurred,
and the affected components. The alarms displayed can be filtered, depending on user-defined
criteria.
• Alarms alert, enabling alarm changes on each NE to be received by the current alarm list. New
alarms are added to the list. If the change signifies that a previous alarm has been cleared for, it
is removed from the list.
• Advanced fault filtering, allowing the operator to define the alarm criteria and create any alerting
actions. The alerting actions can be programmed by the operator to trigger external alarm
systems or more sophisticated procedures such as paging or e-mailing the support staff.
The Fault Management Agent monitors the state of the resources in its associated Network
Element (NE), providing two main functions:
• Resource Discovery allows the agent to retrieve and maintain information about the NE
resources, e.g. signaling links, traffic circuits within the associated NE.
• Event Notification controls the updating of the NE resources from fault logs received for the NEs.
The logs are converted into standardized TMN operations, and the relevant notification message
indicates the event is transmitted to the OMC-S and/or NMC via Open Q.3 Interface.

Performance Management
Performance data monitoring allows network usage patterns and trends to be identified,
enabling informed network design and engineering decisions to be made to optimize network
resource utilization.
The OMC-S PM contains two main components:
• Data Selection allows the user to control performance data retrieval. The user can define studies
by selecting measurements to be retrieved, as well as using pre-defined measurements. The
user can also define the start and stop time when measurement data is to be retrieved along
with the retrieval frequency.
• Data Display allows the user to view the performance data either as a graph, which can have
several measurements superimposed, or in raw data format. As well as displaying current data,
the user can access archived data for historical performance analysis. The user can even
export the raw data selected, for use with external processing packages.
The Performance Management Agent running on SDM/FT supports the collection,
processing and delivery of operational measurement data for its associated network element
to the OMC-S by providing the following capabilities:
• Reception of the Operational Measurements (OM)s from the Network Element at the end of
each transfer period (every 15, 30, 60 minutes, daily, weekly or monthly).
• Filtering and correlation of the Operational Measurements.
• Accumulation of OMs allowing the user to create new OMs by summing or processing existing
ones, e.g. generating a summary measurement.
• Storage of raw and processed OMs which can be used directly by the manager or exported for
use by other applications.
• Notification to the management layer of the arrival of new OMs data.

Check Your Learning

2- What is the maximum number of WorkStations possible for an OMC-R?
3- What are the maximum numbers of BSC, BTS, cells, and TRXs handled by
an OMC-R?
4- What are the three solutions for the implementation of the OMC network?
6- What is the maximum number of WorkStations possible for an OMC-R?
5- What are the maximum numbers of BSC, BTS, cells, and TRXs handled by an
OMC-R?
8- What are the three solution for the implementation of the OMC network?

Student Notes:

PicoNode Family
Section 19
PicoNode Family
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 PicoNode Family 19-1

PicoNode Family
PicoNode: A Very Small GSM System

What For?
PicoNode
One Product
Two Applications
➠Communities ➠Corporate
➠ Rural communities ➠ Small cells
➠ Large cells ➠ In-building, campus
➠ Highways, rural ➠ Distributed Wireless Access
➠ Low cost sites for low traffic
Two primary applications are addressed with PicoNode.
Community Application
With local switching, PicoNode offers a cost effective solution for small and rural
communities.
With its small size, PicoNode can be deployed almost anywhere.
Corporate Application
Installed behind a wired PBX, PicoNode becomes a wireless PBX, working in conjunction
with the wired PBX.

PicoNode Family
Rural and Community
Small Remote Rural Community
•• Remote
Remote Switching
Switching
Reduced
Reduced Backhaul
Backhaul
PMSC •• Scaleable
PBSC Solution
Scaleable Solution
Up
Up to
to 3000
3000 Subscribers
Subscribers
PSTN Low
Low Cost
Cost Entry
Entry System
System
Community
Community Services
Services
Support
Support of
of Fixed
Fixed Mobile
Mobile
PLMN
Competitive
Competitive Features
Features
PBTS PBTS
PBTS
As telecommunications technology edges its way into smaller communities, operators are
often forced to provide wired service by using expensive copper local loops over long
distances.
These long drops not only degrade the quality of service, they are expensive. “Local” calls in
these cases are actually backhauled over some distance to the switch and then back to the
same community.
The PicoNode offers a remote switching alternative to this expensive technique of providing
local telecommunications services.
The PicoNode has been designed to scale from an everything-in-one-box solution to a
multiple BSC/BTS network.
The PicoNode has the capability to deliver an MSC, BSC, and BTS all in one box that is
slightly larger than a computer tower. However, if there is a different requirement, the
PicoNode can be expanded into individual components: one box will be used for each
function (i.e. one for MSC, one for BSC, and a given number for BTS as required for
coverage).

PicoNode Family
Corporate/In-building: CorporateNET™
Office Zone
•• In-Building
In-Building Coverage
Coverage
✓
✓ Wall-Mountable
Wall-Mountable BTS
BTS OFFICE
✓
✓ Distributed
Distributed Antenna
Antenna option
option
SEND
1
C
2
END
3
4 5 6
✓
✓ Leaky
Leaky Feeder
Feeder option
option 7 8 9
PBX
•• PBX
PBX Interworking
Interworking Corporate
NET
✓
✓ Dial
Dial Plan
Plan Support
Support
–– Abbreviated
Abbreviated Dialing
Dialing
✓
✓ PSTN
PSTN Interworking
Interworking
✓
✓ PRI/QSIG Trunks
PRI/QSIG Trunks Operator Network
✓
✓ PBX
PBX Features
Features
–– Dual
Dual Ringing
Ringing
–– Single
Single VMS
VMS DMS MSC
Network
•• Single
Single Cabinet
Cabinet Solution
Solution SEND C END
1 2 3
✓
✓ Combined
Combined MSC,BSC,BTS
MSC,BSC,BTS
4 5 6
Mobile Network 7 8 9
✓
✓ Proconfigured
Proconfigured Installation
Installation
Although personal subscribers have begun to outnumber corporate subscribers in terms of

sheer numbers, the corporate subscriber is valued the most because they generate more
revenue per subscriber for the operator. For this reason they are highly prized. Operators
must have solutions that not only attract new corporate users but also help in retaining
existing ones.
One method for operators to make their GSM offering more appealing to corporate
subscribers is to provide better coverage within the user’s office building. However, improved
coverage is not the entire solution.
Corporate subscribers use their handsets in-building because they are not near their PBX
telephone. If some PBX services could be extended to the GSM handset while the
corporate user was in-building, the service offering would become much more valuable.
Nortel’s PicoNode for the corporate market is focused on providing such an in-building
“private” GSM network for corporations interested in a mobility solution that is tied to their
PBX. Delivering a corporate, high tier solution will be best suited for corporations and
campus environments with 100 or more GSM subscribers.

PicoNode Family
PicoNode Architecture
Small Company Large Corporation
Growth &
Evolution
MSC
BSC
PBX PBX
Combo
MSC/BSC/BTS
BTS BTS BTS

Nortel’s PicoNode family is composed of four devices:

• the PMSC (PicoNode Mobile Switching Center),
• the PBSC (PicoNode Base Station Controller),
• the BTS (PicoNode Base Transceiver Subsystem),
• the POMC (PicoNode Operations and Maintenance Center).
The MSC, BSC and the BTS can be either:
• incorporated in a single cabinet not much larger than a standard PC tower or
• housed in their own separate cabinets
The OMC is a Sun Sparc based Operations and Maintenance Center that offers a graphical
user interface combined with a topographical representation of the network.
The PicoNode product also comprises of the HLR (Home Location Register) which is a
centralized database used to manage subscribers and services.
The HLR is co-resident with the MSC.
Other components that can be networked with the PicoNode include a Billing System, a Pre-
paid system and a Voice Mail System.

PicoNode Family
CommunityNet
PicoNode
ISDN or R2 PSTN
A-Interface
POMC-R-S PMSC
HLR/
VLR
PLMN/
Public MSC
PBSC
Public
Public
Private Hybrid
Hybrid
PBTS
PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN 19-6 January, 2000 28

PicoNode Family
CommunityNet
PBX Inter-Operability
HLR/
ISDN or R2
VLR
PBX
PicoNode PSTN
Network
A-Interface
PLMN HLR/
VLR
PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN 19-7 January, 2000 38

PicoNode Family
PicoNode™ BTS
✓
✓Output
Output Power
Power after
after Combining
Combining == 22 Watts
Watts
✓
✓External
External Amplifier
Amplifier for
for Greater
Greater Power
Power (on
(on
this
this drawing):
drawing): 4,
4, 8,
8, 16
16 Watts
Watts
✓
✓Receive
Receive Sensitivity
Sensitivity == -104
-104 oror -110
-110 dBm
dBm
✓
✓Receive
Receive Diversity
Diversity available
available
✓
✓1-2
1-2 TRXs
TRXs per
per BTS
BTS (Omni
(Omni configuration)
configuration)
✓
✓Power
Power Consumption
Consumption 150 150 W W
✓
✓Weight
Weight 20
20 kg
kg
✓
✓Temperature
Temperature range
range == 00 °° to
to 45
45 °C°C
Slot:
1 - MPM w/o Disk Drive
2 - E1-Abis
3-8 - TRX
9 - RF Distribution
The PBTS 3x08 can be used to provide cost-effective communication solution in rural
communities, where in conjunction with a PBSC and a PMSC/PCSN a local switching
alternative can be more economical than stretching a PLMN to provide coverage.
Upto 2 TRXs can be installed per PBTS 3x08 allowing upto 15 simultaneous wireless
connections.
Specifically designed and configured for the rural market the PBTS 3x08 has the following
attributes:
• Receiver Sensitivity -110 dBm +- 1dB
• All GSM Frequencies: 900/1800/1900 MHz available.
• Redundant Power Supplies: Available
• Connection to BSC: The drop and insert capability is used to reduce the number of
E1/T1s to connect to the BSC. This is implemented through Chain connection. Upto 4
PBTS from PBSC E1-Abis card can be connected. Trunk Interface is G.703 compliant.
• Interface: Air interface is the standard GSM air interface.
• Capacity:
- 8 channels per TRX, maximum 2 TRXs per cell,
- 7-15 voice channels,
- 2.9- 8.2 Erlangs at PO2 GOS,
- Equivalent to 117 - 328 subscribers at 25 mE per sub.

PicoNode Family
PicoNode™ BSC
CPU/Power
CPU/Power Supply
Supply Redundant
Redundant (Opt.)
(Opt.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2-14
2-14 E1 per BSC
E1 per BSC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1-15
1-15 BTSs
BTSs per
per BSC
BSC
1-30
1-30 TRXs
TRXs per
per BSC
BSC
RS T
GSM Full Rate

SC N
PWR
ON
L INE
PWR
ON
PWR
ON
L INE
PWR
ON
L INE
GSM Full Rate
Weight
Weight 20
20 kg
FL T FL T FL T FL T
kg
CDN
EN ET EN ET
RS -2 3 2
E1 -1 -
RX
RS -2 3 2
E1 -1 -
RX
Power
Power Consumption
Consumption 150
150 W
W
TX TX
E1 -2 - E1 -2 -
RX RX
EXT
TX TX
XREF
Services
Services
•• ETSI
ETSI GSM
GSM Phase
Phase 22
TES T RF DIS T
•• Power
Power Management
Management
•• Data
Data &
& Fax
Fax Services
Services (no
(no IWF)
IWF)
•• SMS
SMS Service
Service
1 3 MHz
•• GSM
GSM Phase
Phase 1,
1, 2,
2, 2+
2+ mobiles
mobiles
PBSC
Slot1 Processor
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
1
1
0
Slot2-9 E1
The PicoNode BSC is deployed in a similar compact package as the PicoNode MSC and
serves as the connection from the MSC to the BTS(s).
The BSC is responsible for allocating and releasing radio channels to the mobile stations by
way of the BTSs.
In addition to managing channels on a radio interface, it is also responsible for managing
mobile station handovers to other radio channels.
The BSC is comprised of a processor, and two to eight dual port E1 modules. It is directly
connected to the MSC through the A interface and to the BTS through the Abis interface.
An important feature of the BSC structure is the transcoder unit or TCU. The TCU is
responsible for the GSM specific speech encoding and decoding as well as rate adaptation
in the case of data. In the PicoNode system, the TCU is co-located with the BSC. The
PicoNode BSC can be configured with redundant power.
The PBSC supports inter-connection with a mixture of 900 and 1800 MHz PBTS.

PicoNode Family
PicoNode™ MSC
200
200 Non-Blocking
Non-Blocking Voice
Voice Connections
Connections
14 E-1
14 E-1
GSM900/GSM1800
GSM900/GSM1800
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Redundant
Redundant Power
Power Supplies
Supplies (Opt.)
(Opt.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
100
100 Erlangs
Erlangs // 8000
8000 BHCA
BHCA
RS T
SC N
Integrated
Integrated HLR/VLR
HLR/VLR
Inter/Intra
Inter/Intra BSC Handover
BSC
PWR PWR PWR PWR
Handover
ON ON ON ON
L INE L INE L INE
FL T FL T FL T FL T
CDN RS -2 3 2 RS -2 3 2
E1 -1 - E1 -1 -
EN ET EN ET RX RX
TX TX
Services
Services
•• Call
Call Establishment
Establishment & & Switching
Switching
E1 -2 - E1 -2 -
RX RX
EXT
TX TX
•• Channel
Channel Allocation
Allocation
XREF
•• Channel
Channel Switching
Switching
•• Mobility
Mobility Management
Management
TES T RF DIS T •• Voice
Voice or
or Data
Data Network
Network Switching
Switching
•• HLR/VLR
HLR/VLR Maintenance
Maintenance
•• User
User Administration
Administration and
1 3 MHz
and
Authentication
Authentication
PMSC
Slot1 - Processor •• Wireless
Wireless PBX
PBX Adjunct
Adjunct
ON
ON
OFF
1
OFF
1
0
Slot2-9 - E1 •• no
no Echo
Echo Canceler
Canceler
The PicoNode MSC serves as a standard GSM Mobile Switching Center (MSC). The
PicoNode MSC is capable of handling call establishment and switching, mobility
management, and channel allocation.
The PicoNode MSC is deployed in a compact package (55 x 23 x 41 cm) that can easily be
maneuvered into remote areas.
The benefit of the compact size and light weight (20 kg) is that delivery to remote areas is
effortless as compared to a full size switching platform.
The PicoNode MSC is expandable to accommodate multiple E1 ports and 160 simultaneous
full-rate voice connections (non-blocking) to meet the various capacity requirements. The
PicoNode MSC is always configured with redundant power.

PicoNode Family
PicoNode™ OMC
Sun
Sun Workstation
Workstation Platform
Platform
TMN
TMN Architecture
Architecture
Multiple
Multiple Windows
Windows Supported
Supported
Context
Context Sensitive Help
Sensitive Help
88 Clients
Clients per
per Server
Server
High
High Level
Level of
of Security
Security
11 OMC
OMC per
per MSC
MSC
Services
Services
•• Region-wide
Region-wide configuration
configuration database
database
•• Remote
Remote Download
Download of of Software
Software
•• Audit
Audit Functions
Functions
•• Regional
Regional Map Map ofof Network
Network Elements
Elements
•• Real
Real Time
Time Monitoring
Monitoring
•• Audio
Audio and
and Visual
Visual Indications
Indications ofof Alarms
Alarms
•• Measures
Measures Network
Network Performance
Performance (to (to export)
export)
•• Imports
Imports from
from Existing
Existing Cell
Cell Planning
Planning Tools
Tools
•• Export
Export Data
Data & & Statistics
Statistics
•• CDR
CDR (to
(to aa billing
billing server)
server)
PicoNode OMC provides the operations and management center functions for the PicoNode.
It has a client-server architecture. In this architecture, the radio network is partitioned into
multiple management regions with each region containing one or more MSCs, as well as all
of the PicoNode hardware platforms managed by the MSCs.
A PicoNode OMC server is then responsible for the management of all the BSCs and BTSs
contained in this region.
PicoNode OMC provides a number of management functions for the PicoNode hardware
which include:
• Communication interface to the PicoNode products
• Security and Access control
• Event and Alarm management
• Network configuration management
• Software upgrade management.
Interface: E1 to the MSC running TCP/IP.
Hardware: Sun Sparc with 128 MB memory and 4G Hard Disk.

PicoNode Family
PicoNode™ Combo
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2W
RS T RS T RS T RS T TX
8W
TX TX TX PA TH
SC N SC N -1- SC N SC N
PWR PWR PWR
Slot
PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR 13 MHZ TX-1
Slot
ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON TX1 ON ON ON ON LINE
LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE
FLT FLT 6.7 FLT

FLT FLT FLT FLT FLT FLT FLT FLT
1- Processor 1- Processor
RX 3
2,3
PA TH-1
2- Processor
RX 2
4,5
2- Processor
3- E1
RX 1 PA TH-2
CD N CD N RS -232 RS -232 RS -2 32 RS -2 32
3- E1
CDN CDN
E1-1- E1-1- E1 -1- E1 -1-
ENET ENET RX RX 6,7 EN ET EN ET RX RX
-3- AN T-1
4- E1
RX -1
4- E1
TX TX TX TX
TX3
E1-2- E1-2- 2,3 E1 -2- E1 -2-

5-6- TRX
5-6- TRX
RX RX RX RX RX RX
EXT EXT -2- EX T EX T RX
AN T-2
7-9- RF Distribution
RX -2
TX TX TX TX
TX2
XR EF XR EF
CLK
4,5
7-8- TRX XR EF XR EF
9- RF Distribution
TX-2
TEST RF DIST TES T RF DIST
13M Hz 13 MHz
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Corporate/In-Building Rural/Community
The PicoNode PCSN is a ‘combo’ switch meaning it has the MSC, BSC and BTS
functionality all included in one single box of the size not much bigger than a PC tower. It is
available in two configurations depending on the BTS output power.
These modules comprise all the basic components of the system for either the PMSC,
PCSN, PBSC, or PBTS.

PicoNode Family
PicoNode™ Scalable GSM Solutions
Configuration Supports (max) Capacity
NSS
NSS 22 BSCs
BSCs 2000
2000 Subs
Subs @
@ 0.05E
0.05E (VLR)
(VLR)
4000
4000 Subs
Subs (HLR)
(HLR)
BSC 15
15 BTSs
BSC BTSs
30
30 TRXs
TRXs
BTS
BTS 33 TRXs
TRXs 180
180 Subs
Subs @
@ 0.05E
0.05E
Combined
Combined Node
Node
MSC/HLR/VLR
MSC/HLR/VLR
BSC/BTS
BSC/BTS 22 TRXs
TRXs 120
120 Subs
Subs @
@ 0.05E
0.05E (VLR)
(VLR)
2000
2000 Subs
Subs (HLR)
(HLR)
add-on
add-on BTSs
BTSs 44
max
max number
number of
of TRXs
TRXs for
for the
the combo:
combo: 88

PicoNode Family
Student Notes:

Solutions of Exercises
Section 20
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Solutions of Exercises 20-1


Solution: Provisioning the Frequency Band Spectrum
A1 A1
C1 B1 A2 C1 B1 A2
A3 C2 B2 A3 C2 B2
C3 B3 A4 C3 B3
C4 B4
Due to assumptions ==> 1 MHz carries 5 radio frequencies (radio channels), each radio frequency
carries 8 channels ==> 40 channels/MHz.
Number of available channels in each pattern = 9.6 x 40 = 384 (all spectrum may be used in each
pattern).
1. With reuse pattern of 12 cells, 3 frequencies per cell are available: number of channels = 384 x
3 = 1152.
2. With reuse pattern of 9 cells, 4 frequencies per cell are available: number of channels = 384 x
4 = 1536.
For the same bandwidth, if the number of cells in the pattern is reduced, the number of channels is
increased.

BTS S8000: Coupling System

Coupling for Two TRX with Diversity
Antenna Antenna
TX+RX Main TX+RX Diversity
RF Combiner (Main) RF Combiner (Diversity)

Duplexer Duplexer
LNA LNA
Splitter Ext Splitter Ext
RX Splitter RX Splitter
Main Diversity
PA1 PA2
M D M D
RX1 RX2

TCU Warning: Information Path (1)
To/From
To OMC-R
OMC-R
C OMN Link
O Hard Disk
N MMU-IDE
T Ethernet
R Inter SUP
O Supervision
L Multibus II
SUP2
X.25 SS7 MPUA LAPD
SICX CCS7 SICD8V
SWitching Unit
2 Mb <-> 64kb
O&M and Switch
Q MSW
Synchro ECI Control
U V11/TTL SWE SWC
I
P
O&M/A bus
O&M/B bus
M
N
Concentration TSCB

Information path when the TCU is warning: OMC-R link through X.25 interface.

TCU Warning: Information Path (2)
To/From OMC-R
C OMN Link
O Hard Disk
N MMU-IDE
T Ethernet
R O&M Control Switching Control BTSs Control
CPU-OMU CPU-MPU CPU-BIFP Inter SUP

O Supervision
L Multibus II
SUP2
X.25 SS7 MPUA LAPD
SICX CCS7 SICD8V
SWitching Unit
2 Mb <-> 64kb
O&M and Switch
Q MSW
Synchro ECI Control
U V11/TTL SWE SWC
I
P
O&M/A bus
O&M/B bus
M
N
Concentration TSCB

To OMC
Information path when the TCU is warning: OMC-R link through Ater interface.

Incoming Call: Information Path
To/From OMC-R
C OMN Link
O Hard Disk
N MMU-IDE
T Ethernet
R Inter SUP
O Supervision
L Multibus II
SUP2
X.25 SS7 MPUA LAPD
SICX CCS7 SICD8V
SWitching Unit
2 Mb <-> 64kb
O&M and Switch
Q MSW
Synchro ECI Control
U V11/TTL SWE SWC
I
P
O&M/A bus
O&M/B bus
M
N
Concentration TSCB

Information path for incoming call.

Call-Established: Traffic Path
To/From OMC-R
C OMN Link
O Hard Disk
N MMU-IDE
T Ethernet
R Inter SUP
O Supervision
L Multibus II
SUP2
X.25 SS7 MPUA LAPD
SICX CCS7 SICD8V
SWitching Unit
2 Mb <-> 64kb
O&M and Switch
Q MSW
Synchro ECI Control
U V11/TTL SWE SWC
I
P
O&M/A bus
O&M/B bus
M
N
Concentration TSCB
External Loops BTS

BTS TCU/MSC
Traffic path for established call.

Student Notes:

Glossary
Section 21
Glossary
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Glossary 21-1

Glossary
Section 21
Glossary
PE/TRD/GR/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000 Glossary 21-1
PE/TRD/CN/0101 12 01/EN 21-1 January, 2000

Glossary
A Interface between MSC and TCU

Abis Interface between BTS and BSC
ACCH Associated Control CHannel: dedicated Slow (SACCH) or Fast (FACCH) radio
signaling channel
ACSE Association Control Service Element: service element providing the exclusive ability
to set up and terminate application associations
ACU Air Conditioning Unit (S8000 outdoor)
ACM Address Complete Message
ADM ADMinistration function enabled by OMC-R
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line: network access technology on copper pair
AGCH Access Grant CHannel: common mobile radio channel used exclusively for assign
commands sent over the network in response to mobile access requests
Air interface See “Radio interface”
AIS Alarm Indication Signal: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)
ALA ALArms collecting board, housed in the equipment cabinet supporting the alarm
loops management (BSC 6000/12000)
ALAT ALArm(s) collecting board, supporting BTS alarm management (BTS S4000
Indoor)
ALATO ALArm(s) ouTdOor collecting board, supporting BTS alarm management (S4000
Outdoor BTS, S4000 Smart BTS and S2000 Indoor)
ALCO ALarm COllecting board of the BTS S8000 first version (before CBCF)
ALPRO ALarm PROtection board for external alarms and remote controls of the
ALCO/RECAL board (BTS S8000)
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion: bipolar coding standard in which 1 is alternatively positive
or negative
AMNU Advanced MaNagment Unit of the DRX: unit of the DRX processing AMRT frames
AMPS Advanced Mobile Phone System: first analogue radio cellular telephone (800 MHz)
standard in USA (1978)
ANM ANswer Message
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AoC Advice of Charge
AoCC Advice of Charge Charging
AoCI Advice of Charge Information

Glossary
APC Application Processor Cabinet: (DMS)
ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number: corresponding to frequency value of
the carrier
ASCI Advanced Speech Call Items: three services standardized by ETSI in GSM Phase
2+ (eMLPP, VBS and VGCS)
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit: device customized for a specific application
Ater Interface between BSC and TCU
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode: cell based data transfer technique using switching
mode
AuC Authentication Center: management of security data (Ki) for authentication of
subscribers (NSS function)
A3 Authentication algorithm
A5 Ciphering algorithm
A8 Ciphering key computation

Glossary
B
B Interface between MSC and associated VLR
BAIC Barring of All Incoming Calls
BAOC Barring of All Outgoing Calls
BCC Base station Color Code: Network cell color code = 3 last three BSIC code bits.
The BCC is used to identify one of the cells sharing the same BCCH frequency.
Neighboring cells may, or may not, have different BCC.
BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel: common mobile logical channel used for broadcasting
system information on the radio interface
BCF Base Common Functions: common BTS control and switching unit (see CBCF and
SBCF)
BDA BSC Application Database: contains all the information objects describing the BSS
BDE Exploitation Data Base (OMC-R): contains all the information objects describing the
BSS under OMC-R management control, and the objects required to manage
OMC-R functionality
BDT Part of the DRX: regenerates GSM TIME bus signals
BER Bit Error Rate: method of measuring the quality of radio link transmission
BFI Bad Frame Indicator: flag indicating the quality of a received traffic frame
BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempts: Unit of telecommunications traffic intensity
BIC-Roam Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home GSM network
BIFP Base Interface Front-end Processor board of BSC managing the interface with BTS
- see CPU-MPU
BIST Built-In Self Test: system built into most BTS and BSC boards which automatically
executes self tests when the boards are initialized or configured
BOIC Barring Outgoing International Calls
BSC Base Station Controller
BSIC Base Station Identity Code: used to identify a base station which allows mobile
stations to distinguish the cells sharing the same BCCH frequency. A BSIC is
defined by an (NCC, BCC) combination
BSS Base Station Subsystem: Radio Cellular Network radio subsystem made up of
Base Station Controllers, one or more remote TransCoder Units and one or more
Base Transceiver Stations
BSSAP BSS Application Part of the BSS A interface protocol stack (BSSMAP + DTAP)
BSSMAP BSS Management Application Part of the A interface protocol stack charged with
managing BSS radio resources and transferring calls
BSSOMAP Application Part of the A interface protocol stack charged with BSS O&M
BTS Base Transceiver Station: radio base station managing one or more cells
B8ZS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution Coding: bipolar coding standard used on T1 PCM

Glossary
C
C Interface between MSC and HLR
CA Cell Allocation: radio frequency channel allocated to a cell
CAMEL Customized Application for Mobile network Enhanced Logic: IN based mechanisms
for GSM
CBCF Compact BCF: new BCF module of the S8000 Indoor and Outdoor
CBCH Cell Broadcast CHannel: logical channel used inside a cell to broadcast short
messages in unacknowledged mode
CC Call Control: sublevel of layer 3 on the radio interface charged with managing call
processing
Country Code
CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers
CCCH Common Control CHannel: common bidirectional mobile control channel, used for
transmitting signaling information on the radio interface
CCF Call Control Function (IN)
CCH Control CHannel: common or dedicated control channel
CCITT Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique et Téléphonique: previous
standardization organization replaced by ITU
CCS Common Channel Signaling: MSC/VLR subsystem of common channel signaling
links
CCS7 Common Channel Signaling CCITT No. 7: BSC common channel signaling No. 7
interface board (A interface)
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access:
CD-ROM Compact Disc-Read Only Memory: for SUN system software installation
CFB Call Forwarding on Busy subscriber
CFNRc Call Forwarding on MS Not Reachable
CFNRy Call Forwarding on No Reply
CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional
CGI Cell Global Identifier: identifier of a mobile network cell. containing the Location
Area Code (LAC), the Mobile Country Code (MCC), the Mobile Network Code
(MNC) and the cell identifier in the Location Area
CIC Circuit Identity Code: terrestrial circuit reference used for A interface
communications
CIR Carrier on Interference Ratio: new name for C/I
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction

Glossary
CM Configuration Management: network O&M function enabled by OMC-R
Connection Management Level 3 of radio interface assembling call processing
procedures (CC), short messages (SMS), and supplementary services (SS)
CMCF Compact Main Common Function: main board of the CBCF (S8000)
CMIP Common Management Information Protocol: OSI level 7 protocol for network
management
CMIS Common Management Information Service: OSI Application level service
CMISE Common Management Information System Element:
CNAP Calling Name Presentation
COAM Centralized Operation Administration and Maintenance: new BCF architecture from
V10 (S2000H&L) or V12 (S4000 and S8000)
CoLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
CoLR Connected Line Identification Restriction
COMICO COMbiner InterCOnnection module for the RF combiners (S8000)
CPCMI Compact PCM Interface: PCM interface board of the CBCF (S8000)
CPU Central Processing Unit: processing boards (BSC 6000/12000)
CPU-MPU/BIFP CPU - Main Processing Unit/Base Interface Front-end Processor: BSC processing
boards
CPU-OMU CPU - Operations & Maintenance Unit: BSC Operation and Maintenance board
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check: method for detecting errors in serial data transmission
(CRC4 and CRC6) Also: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)
CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection: bus access mechanism of
Ethernet LAN
CSPDN Circuit Switched Public Data Network
CSU Control Switching Unit (S4000 BTS)
CSW Control and Switching: BTS control and switching unit made up of CSW1 and
CSW2 boards
CSW1 BTS control board (S4000)
CSW2 BTS switching board (S4000)
CSWM Control and SWitching Module: manages the BCF and contains the connection
matrix in the BTS S8000 first version (before CBCF)
CUG Closed User Group: group of subscribers communicating only among themselves
CW Call Waiting

Glossary
D
D Interface between HLR and VLR
DACS Direct Ambient Cooling System: System Cooling Unit (BTS S8000 Outdoor)
DAT Digital Audio Tape: cartridge used for backing up and storing data
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Channel Concentrator: board of BCF unit (BTS S4000)
DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel: dedicated radio signaling channel with one SDCCH +
one SACCH
DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment: modem for example
DCU or DCU4 Dual Channel Unit: FP unit designed to process TDMA frame time slots
DCU8 Digital Control Unit for 8 channels: signal processing module, part of the DRX
DD Dynamic Data: dynamic attribute of an operational database object updated by
BSC applications
DDTI Dual Digital Trunk Interface: BSC interface board controlling two external PCM links
with BTS (interface Abis) or TCU (interface Ater)
DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier
DLNA Duplexer Low Noise Amplifier: radio module (BTS e-cell)
DLU Downloadable Logical Unit: configuration file for software customization (BTS)
DMS Digital Multiplex switching System: Nortel switch equipment used for MSC (NSS)
DP Permanent Data: permanent attribute of an operational object managed in BDE
and BDA databases
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory: type of read/write memory equipping central
processing units (BSC 6000/12000)
DRX Discontinuous Reception: used on Radio interface
Driver and Receiver unit: signal processing unit for radio transmission and
reception (BTS S8000 and S2000H&L)
DSC Data Signaling Concentration: BCF signaling concentration board (BTS S8000)
DSP Digital Signal Processor: device dedicated to signal digital treatment
DTAP Direct Transfer Application Part: application of the A interface protocol charged with
transferring transparent messages between mobile stations and MSC
DTE Data Terminal Equipment: end equipment of a communication path; PC or server
for example
DTI Digital Trunk Interface: BTS board controlling one external PCM link
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple-Frequency: dialing method using a combination of two
frequencies among a standardized set of frequencies
DTX Discontinuous Transmission: used on Radio interface
DUP Data User Part: interface with PAD (PSDN)

Glossary
E
E Interface between two MSCs
EA Early Assignment
EC Echo Canceler
ECI Equipment Cabinet Interface: supervision board of several Equipment cabinet
boards (BSC 6000/12000)
EFR Enhanced Full Rate: high quality speech vocoder (MS and TCU)
EFT Transferable File Element: sets of files used between OMC-R and BSS, controlled
by the FTAM function
E-GSM Extended GSM: new frequency band allowed to extend the GSM 900
EIR Equipment Identification Register
EIRP Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power
EIU Ethernet Interface Unit: LPP board of the DMS
EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference
eMLPP enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Preemption: supplementary service allowing
priority levels and resources preemption (ASCI service used in GSM-R)
ENET Enhanced NETwork: switching matrix of the DMS (Nortel MSC)
EOS End Of Silence allowing normal voice frame transmission (see DTX)
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory: type of on-board memory
EQPD EQuiPment cabinet shelf housing DDTI boards (BSC 6000/12000)
EQPI EQuiPment cabinet shelf housing ALA, RCB and TSCB boards (BSC 6000/12000)
Erlang Unit of telecommunications traffic intensity representing the average number of
resources or circuits occupied during the peak traffic hour
ERP Effective Radiated Power
ESF Extended Super Frame: PCM T1 multiframe (24 basic frames and CRC6)
ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute

Glossary
F
F Interface between MSC and EIR
FAC Final Assembly Code
FACCH Fast Associated Control CHannel: dedicated signaling channel (Um interface)
Fb Radio transmission Frequency bit
FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel: common frequency synchronization channel
FCH Frequency CHannel: common frequency synchronization channel
FCS Frame Check Sequence: LAPDm
FE Frame Error: frame alignment error counter alarm
Also: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)
FEC Frame Error Counter: on DTI board, FEC counts frame lock error
FH Frequency Hopping
FH bus FH bus: BTS data transmission bus between the FP and TX (S4000)
FM Fault Management: O&M network function enabled by MD-R or OMC-R
FN Frame Number
FP Frame Processor: TDMA radio frame processor in BTS
FP-RX bus BTS data transmission bus between FP and RX (S4000)
FPRX TDMA radio frame processor and receiver function
FR Full Rate: normal quality speech vocoder (MS and TCU)
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
FTAM File Transfer Access and Management: ISO file transfer and remote file
management protocol used by the EFT
G
G Interface between one VLR and another VLR
GMSC Gateway Mobile Switching Center: MSC dedicated for incoming calls
GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying: radio modulation used by GSM
GPP GSM PassPort: Nortel PassPort switch customized for IWF
GSM Global System for Mobile communications
GSM-R GSM network for Railway companies
GSM time GSM system clock in BTS
GTW GaTeWay board between the BCF and the DRXs of the S8000 first version (before
CBCF)

Glossary
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3: bipolar PCM link coding standard 3
HDLC High-level Data Link Control: data link protocol family: LAPB (X.25), LAPD (ISDN),
LAPDm (GSM), MTP-2 (SS7)
HLR Home Location Register: data base for permanent subscribers information (profile,
billing, location, etc.)
HO HandOver: automatic call transfer implemented between the radio channels of the
same or different cells without interrupting transmission
HSI High-Speed Interface (X.25 SUN server board)
HSN Hopping Sequence Number (see Frequency Hopping)
HOLD Call Hold service
H2D Hybrid Coupleur 2 ways with integrated Duplexer
H4D Hybrid Coupleur 4 ways with integrated Duplexer
I
IAM Initial Address Message
IDE Integrated Disk Electronic: hard disk interface between CPU-OMU and MMU_IDE
boards (BSC 12000HC)
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.3 Recommendation IEEE 802.3: standardization of Ethernet, using the CSMA/CD
access method and bus topology LAN
IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity: permanently stored in the MS
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity: primary identification of the subscriber
IN Intelligent Network: open system for universal networks services (personal number,
prepaid calling, sponsored calling, location enquiry, VPN, etc.)
IOM Input Output Module: (DMS)
IP Internet Protocol: level 3 protocol usually used above Ethernet
Intelligent Peripheral: IN node
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISM Integrated Service Module: (DMS)
ISO International Standards Organization
ISPBX Integrated Services Private Branch eXchange
ISUP ISDN user part: subsystem supporting CCITT signaling No. 7
ITU International Telecommunication Union: standardization organization
IWF InterWorking Function: functions for data services (NSS)

Glossary
kb kilobyte (1024 bytes)

Kc Key of ciphering: encrypting key assigned to a mobile subscriber
kHz kiloHertz
Ki Identification key
kW kiloWatt
L1 BTS software element handling the LAPD Level 1 protocol

L1M Layer one Management: Processor functional unit handling BTS radio
measurements
L2 BTS software element handling the LAPD Level 2 protocol
L2ML Abis interface layer level 2 management function
LAC Location Area Code: code used to identify a location area
LAI Location Area Identity: geographic identity of a group of cells used to locate a
mobile station
LAN Local Area Network: local OMC Ethernet network
LAP Link Access Protocol family: LAPB, LAPD, LAPDm
LAPB Link Access Protocol Balanced: X.25 link signaling protocol
LAPD Link Access Protocol on D channel: signaling protocol used on the Abis interface
between BTS and the BSC and on the Ater interface between BSC and TCU
LAPDm Link Access Protocol on D channel, modified: signaling protocol used on GSM
radio interface
LBO Line Build Out: PCM T1 line attenuation
LDB Operating system: one of the three BSC core system software levels
LED Light Emitting Diode
LFA Loss of Frame Alignment: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)
LIU Link Interface Unit: LPP board DMS
LMS Local Message Switch: LPP board of the DMS
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
LNA-splitter Low Noise Amplifier-splitter: used for separation of signals received in the BTS
LOS LOSs of PCM frame alignment alarm signal
LPD box Lightning Protection and Distribution box (S4000 Smart)
LPP Link Peripheral Processor: main interface equipment of the DMS

Glossary
MA Mobile Allocation: table of channel associated frequency allocations

MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset: reference of channel associated frequencies
MAP Mobile network Application Part protocol
Mb Megabyte (1024 kb)
MCC Mobile Country Code
MCGS Meridian Cabinet Global Switch: main cabinet of the Micronode DMS
MCIP Meridian Cabinet Interface Power: cabinet of the Micronode DMS
MD-R Mediation Device OMC-Radio
ME Mobile Equipment: Mobile Station without SIM
MEU Masthead Electronics Unit: remote TX amplifier located close to the antenna
MHz MegaHertz
MIB Management Information Base: data base containing managed objects in Q3
format
MM Mobility Management: radio handling mobile locations
MMI Man Machine Interface enabling message exchanges between OMC-R and users
MMU Mass Memory Unit: SCSI hard disk board (BSC 6000/12000)
MMU_IDE Mass Memory Unit_IDE hard disk board (BSC 12000HC)
MNC Mobile Network Code
MNP Microcom Network Protocol: protocols designed by Microcom to support error
control and data compression for asynchronous modem transmission, standardized
in V42 and V42bis
MNU MaNagement Unit board: management board of FP unit (BTS S4000)
MoU Memorandum of Understanding
MPTy Multiparty service
MPU Main Processing Unit: set of processor boards (BSC 6000/12000)
MS Mobile Station: mobile voice and data terminal or handset
MSC Mobile services Switching Center: GSM switch equipment (NSS)
MSISDN Mobile Station ISDN: number used by the calling party to reach a GSM subscriber
MSRN Mobile Station Roaming Number
MSW Main SWitching: switching matrix board of the SWU (BSC 6000/12000/12000HC)
MTP Message Transfer Part: CCITT signaling system No. 7 part (A interface)
Multibus II Data bus between the different BSC processing boards (Intel standard, equivalent
to IEEE standard 1296) Multibus II is a registered trademark of Intel

Glossary
N
NACK Negative ACKnowledgement
NCC Network Color Code: first three bits of the BSIC code. Each country is assigned a
NCC
NDC National Destination Code
NFS Network File System: standard network file management system; set of level 5 to 7
protocols enabling transparent file sharing between several machines (possibly
heterogeneous) connected in a local network
NIU Network Interface Unit: LPP board of the DMS
NMC Network Management Center: linked to all the OMC, to manage the entire GSM
network as a whole
NOS NO Signal: PCM alarm LED for no frame signal received (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)
NRZ Non Return to Zero: coding scheme used for binary signal (internal PCM)
NSS Network and switching SubSystem: subsystem including an MSC, main HLR, VLR,
EIR and AUC
NTPs Nortel Technical Publications: Nortel Networks product documentation
O
OACSU Off-Air Call SetUp: procedure for setting up calls with allocating a radio channel
during the call routing time
OAM OMN Access Management: functional enabled by OMC-R
OE Managed object: Object managed by OMC-R on the OMN interface, modeling an
entity, set, function or BSS equipment
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
O&M Operation and Maintenance
O&M bus Operation and Maintenance bus (BTS-BSC 6000/12000-TCU 6000)
OMC Operation and Maintenance Center
OMC-R Operation and Maintenance Center – Radio: for BSS
OMC-S Operation and Maintenance Center – Switching: for NSS
OML Operation and Maintenance Link: LAPD link supporting BSS Operation and
Maintenance functions
OMN Operation and Maintenance Network: interface used for transferring messages
between OMC-R and connected BSC
OMU See CPU-OMU board
OSI Open System Interconnection: standard model for computer communications,
organized into seven layers, each containing several protocols
OSS Operation SubSystem: operations subsystem including the OMC-R and OMC-S

Glossary
P
PA Power Amplifier
PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler (X.25)
PC Personal Computer
PCH Paging CHannel: common subscriber radio paging channel
PCM Pulse Code Modulation: PCM link connecting either BSC to BTS (Abis interface), or
BSC to TCU (Ater interface)
E1 : 2.048 Mbit/s (2 Mbit/s physical link supporting 32 x 64 kbit/s time slots (TS))
T1 : 1.544 Mbit/s (1.5 Mbit/s physical link supporting 24 x 64 kbit/s time slots (TS))
PCM bus Pulse Code Modulation bus: Internal BTS PCM distribution bus
PCMI PCM Interface board supporting two PCM interfaces between BTS and BSC
PCU Power Control Unit (BTS S8000)
PDTC Pcm-30 Digital Trunk Interface (DMS)
P-GSM Primary GSM band: new name of the basic GSM 900 band
PIN Personal Identity Number
PLL Phase Locked Loop: to maintain the synthetizer frequency
PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
PM Performance Management: function enabled by OMC
POD Physical Object Dictionary used as a configuration file by the Fault Management
function (OMC-R)
PPCM Pico PCM Interface: BTS e-cell board controlling two external PCM links with BSC
(Abis interface)
PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory
PSCMD Power Supply CoMmanD board for the converters of the BCF first version (BTS
S8000)
PSDN Packet-Switched Data Network
PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PSU Power Supply Unit
QoS Quality of Service
Q3 interface Standard communication interface between a manager and agent in

Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) architecture

Glossary
R
RACH Random Access CHannel: common mobile logical channel, reserved for random
access requests transmitted by mobile stations on the radio interface
Radio interface Interface between the mobile station (MS) and BTS
RAM Random Access Memory: read and write memory
RAND RANDom binary word generated by AUC for authentication algorithms
RCB Rate Converter Board enabling PCM rate conversion for LAPD (BSC 6000/12000)
RECAL REmote Control Alarm: new board used with the Compact BCF to replace ALCO
inside each S8000 cabinet
RF Radio Frequency
R-GSM Railway GSM: new GSM 900 band (4 MHz) allocated to Railway companies
RISC Reduced Instruction-Set Computer: computer which provides the ability to process
an optimized set of instructions
RLP Radio Link Protocol
ROM Read Only Memory
ROSE Remote Operations Service Element: OSI layer 7 protocol for network
management
ROT Remote Operations Terminal: remote OMC-R operations terminal
RR Radio Resource: layer 3 radio interface sublevel handling radio resources
RRA Receiver Remote Alarm: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)
RSL Radio Signaling Link
RX Receiver part of the TRX (BTS)
RXD BTS diversity receiver
RXM BTS main receiver
RX-Splitter Reception Multicoupler

Glossary
SABM Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode: initialization LAPD frame
SACCH Slow Associated Control CHannel: slow logical control channel associated with a
traffic channel during a communication
SAPI Service Access Point Identifier (LAPD)
SBCF Small BCF: BCF module of the S2000H&L BTS
SCC Supernode Combined Core: main cabinet of the SNSE DMS
SCCP Signaling Connection Control Part (CCITT No. 7)
SCE Service Creation Environment: IN station
SCF Service Control Function: IN function
SCH Synchronization CHannel: common time division synchronization channel
SCP Service Control Point: IN node
SCSE Communication Service with managed Systems: application handling
communications with systems managed by OMC-R
SCSI Small Computer System Interface: hard disk interface between the MMU and CPU-
OMU boards (BSC 6000/12000)
SDCCH Standalone Dedicated Control CHannel: dedicated radio signaling channel
temporarily allocated during call set up. There are 2 types of SDCCH = SDCCH/8
and SDCCH/4, on which the logical channels are grouped by 4 and by 8
respectively and combined with CCH
SDF Service Data Function: (IN function)
SDO OMC-R data server (Serveur de Données Objet)
SF Super Frame: PCM T1 multiframe (12 basic frames without CRC)
SFH Slow Frequency Hopping: FH used in GSM
SICD Serial Interface Controller LAPD: LAPD controller board for Abis and Ater interface
(BSC 6000/12000)
SICD8V SICD board evolution for 8 channels
SICX Serial Interface Controller X.25 (BSC 6000/12000)
SID SIlence Descriptor: silence frame used in discontinuous transmission (DTX)
SIGN SIGNalization unit: signalization unit processing two time slots
SIM Subscriber Identity Module: smart card containing information on the subscriber
SKP SKiP indication received: PCM alarm LED (DTI/TDTI/DDTI boards)
SLS Serial Link Switch board supporting the link with OMC-R (BSC 6000/12000)
SLS2 Serial Link Switch board supporting the link with OMC-R (BSC 12000HC)
SM Security Management: software management function supported by OMC-R

Glossary
SMS Short Messages Service: service for sending and receiving short messages
between Radio Cellular Network mobile stations. Point to point short messages
include short SMS-MO/PP messages and short SMS-MT/PP messages.
Service Management System: IN server
SMS-CB Short Message Service-Cell Broadcast
SMS-SC Short Message Service-Service Center: point to point message center equipment
SNSE SuperNode Size Enhanced: compact SuperNode DMS
SPU Signal Processor Unit: radio signal processor for one time slot (BTS)
SRES Signed RESult: binary word generated by AUC for authentication algorithms
SRF Specialized Resource Function: (IN function)
SRU Set of Rectifier Units of the BTS S8000
SS Supplementary Services: radio interface layer 3 sublevel handling supplementary
services
SS7 Signaling System 7: functional unit handling the Signaling System No. 7 (A-
interface)
SSA SPARC Storage Array: SUN hard disk unit of the OMC-R
SSF Service Switching Function: IN function
SSP Service Switching Point: IN node
STP Signaling Transfer Point
SUP SUPervision board supervising a processing unit (BSC 6000/12000)
SUP2 SUPervision board supervising a processing unit (BSC 12000HC)
SWC SWitching Controller board of the SWU (BSC 6000/12000/12000HC)
SWE SWitching Extension board enabling V11/TTL conversion for internal PCM (BSC
6000/12000)
SWG SwitchinG shelf (Equipment cabinet) housing the SWU (SWC, MSW and SWE)
and the ECI boards (BSC 6000/12000)
SWU SWitching Unit regrouping SWC, MSW and SWE boards (BSC
6000/12000/12000HC)
SYNC SYNChronization board (BTS S4000 indoor)
SYNO SYNchronization Outdoor board (BTS S4000 outdoor)

Glossary
TAF Terminal Adaptation Function

TC Terrestrial Circuit: PCM link time slot used to support traffic on A interface
TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part (CCITT SS7)
TCB TransCoding Board, enabling speech transcoding (FR) and data rate adaptation up
to 9.6 kbps (TCU 6000)
TCB2 TransCoding Board, enabling speech transcoding (FR and EFR) and data rate
adaptation up to 14.4 kbps (TCU 6000)
TCH Traffic CHannel: radio traffic channel
TCH/F Traffic CHannel/Full rate
TCH/H Traffic CHannel/Half rate
TCP Transmission Control Protocol: level 4 protocol usually used above IP
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: levels 4 and 3 of the OSI
reference model
TCU TransCoder Unit: Nortel name for the Transcoder Rate Adapter Unit equipment
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access: abbreviation used to designate a transmission frame
on the radio interface, divided into eight time slots (TS) or channels
TDTI Transcoder Dual Trunk Interface: board handling PCM links (TCU 6000)
TEI Terminal Equipment Identifier: address allocated to site entities (BCF and TRX), or
to a TCU used to route messages to and from the BSC on the Abis or Ater
interface (LAPD protocol)
TFH Microwave terminal
TIB BCF part of the TIL application
TIF TRX part of the TIL application
TIL Terminal for Local Intervention: TML application dedicated to BTS on-site
maintenance
TA Timing Advance: alignment process designed to compensate propagation time
between a mobile and BTS
TMG Traffic ManaGement: processor functional unit enabling BSC traffic handling
capabilities
TML Local Maintenance Terminal: specialized software running on a PC, used to test
the different entities of the BSC and the BTS
TMN Telecommunication Management Network: operation, maintenance and
administration functions for networks management, normalized by ITU
TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
TRAU Transcoder Rate Adaptor Unit (see TCU)
TRX Transmission/reception subsystem of the BTS

Glossary
TS Time Slot: a TDMA radio frame contains eight contiguous time slots
TSCB Transcoder Signaling Concentration Board concentrating LAPD signaling channels
between BSC and TCU into a single channel (BSC 6000/12000)
TUC Transcoder Unit Controller board designed to monitor other boards and internal
PCM cross connections (TCU 6000)
TUP Telephone User Part
TX Transmitter part of TRX (BTS)
T2 Period at which Permanent, Instrument panel and Temporary observation counters

are recovered to generate observation reports, and also to back up Permanent and
Temporary observation reports
T3 Temporary observation counter time
T4 30 mn reference period used to obtain uniform daily statistics (synchronized
activation of permanent and instrument panel observations)

Glossary
UA Unnumbered Acknowledgement: acknowledgement LAPD frame
UL Underwriters Laboratory: North American standard

Um interface See “Radio interface”
V
VAD Voice Activity Detection (see DTX)
VBS Voice Broadcast Service: ASCI supplementary service allowing speech distribution
into a geographical area
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator: type of oscillator in which the frequency may be
adjusted by a control voltage
VCXO Voltage Controlled crystal-Oscillator
VEA Very Early Assignment: procedure for setting up calls with allocating a radio
channel at initial assignment
VGCS Voice Group Call Service: ASCI supplementary service adding to VBS the change
of the calling subscriber (full duplex channel) to another subscriber
VLR Visitor Location Register: MSC data base for subscribers moving within its
coverage area (NSS)
VMS Voice Mail System
VPN Virtual Private Network
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
V.35 ITU recommendation
V.42 ITU recommendation for error control procedures
V.42bis ITU recommendation for data compression technique used with V42
V.110 ITU recommendation for data transmission
W
WS WorkStation: OMC stations linked to servers via an Ethernet LAN
X.25 ITU recommendation for terminals using packet transmission over PSPDN

GSM-Cellular Networks PDF-Book

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

GSM-Cellular Networks PDF-Book

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

GSM System and Products Overview

"NORTHERN TELECOM AND NORTEL MATRA CELLULAR CONFIDENTIAL:

© Nortel Matra Cellular and Northern Telecom 2000

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

Version Date Comments

04.01/EN September, 97 Creation

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

No. Title Reference Version/Edition

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

GSM TRAINING CURRICULUM 1-2

2. GSM HISTORY 2-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

GPRS AND EDGE 2-17

3. BASIC NETWORK OVERVIEW 3-1

5. CELLULAR PRINCIPLES 5-1

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

CALCULATED CELL COVERAGE (TRISECTORIAL SITE) 5-10

6. RADIO INTERFACE 6-1

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

WHY 26 AND 51 FRAMES PER MULTIFRAME? 6-23

7. ARCHITECTURE, FUNCTIONS AND PROTOCOLS 7-1

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

CHECK YOUR LEARNING 7-26

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

9. BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION FUNCTIONS 9-1

10. S2000/S4000/S8000 BTS FAMILIES 10-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

S2000E/S4000 FAMILY 10-28

11. BASE STATION CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS 11-1

12. BSC 6000/12000/12000HC FAMILY 12-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

13. TRANSCODER UNIT: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 13-1

14. TCU: PHYSICAL PRESENTATION 14-1

15. NSS FUNCTIONS 15-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

16. NSS NORTEL: DMS AND GPP 16-1

17. OSS FUNCTIONS 17-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

OMC-R FUNCTIONS 17-16

18. OMC-R, TML AND OMC-S 18-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000

19. PICONODE FAMILY 19-1

PICONODE: A VERY SMALL GSM SYSTEM 19-2

20. SOLUTIONS OF EXERCISES 20-1

CELLULAR PRINCIPLES: FREQUENCY REUSE PATTERN 20-2

21. GLOSSARY 21-1

"Confidential information -- may not be copied or disclosed without permission".

PE/TRD/CN/0101 12.01/EN January, 2000